Está en la página 1de 1047

CHANCADOR TRAYLOR

MANUAL DE INSTALACION, OPERACION Y MANTENIMIENTO

MANUAL DE INSTALACION,
OPERACION Y MANTENIMIENTO DE
1525mm x 2870mm (60x113)
TIPO NT
CHANCADOR GIRATORIO TRAYLOR
VOLUMEN 2 of 3 (SUMINISTRADORES)
SOCIEDAD MINERA
CLIENTE:
CERRO VERDE S.A.A.
UBICACION PLANTA : AREQUIPA, PERU
ORDEN DE COMPRA NO.: A1WF-59-001-PO
FFEM CONTRATO NO.: 04-31645-720
EQUIPO NO.: C-3110-CR-001
COPYRIGHT FFE Minerals USA Inc. 2004

COVER PAGE - VOLUME 2


Manual Volume 2 Manual Section Preface ai Contract No. 04-31645-720
Prep. by SRH Date 11/21/2005 FFEM DWG. No. 5.401475
App by MDS Date 11/21/2005 Rev. 0 Page 1 of 1
CHANCADOR TRAYLOR
MANUAL DE INSTALACION, OPERACION Y MANTENIMIENTO

FFE MINERALS USA., INC.


HOJA DE REGISTRO DE DISTRIBUCION y REVISION
PARA
1525 X 2870 (60x113) TIPO NT
CHANCADOR GIRATORIO TRAYLOR
MANUAL DE INSTALACION,
OPERACION Y MANTENIMIENTO
CLIENTE: SOCIEDAD MINERA
CERRO VERDE S.A.A.

Volumen COMENTARIOS REV. POR FECHA


Manual No. TRANSMISION
2 MANUAL - CERTIFICADO 0 S.R. HARRIS 12/16/2005
2 MANUAL ELECTRONICO - CERTIFICADO 0 S.R. HARRIS 12/16/2005

Distribucion: Cliente : 6 Copias & 3 Copias Electronica


FFEM Ingeniera CHQ : 1 Copias & 3 Copias Electronica
FFEM Chile : 3 Copias & 3 Copias Electronica

DISTRIBUTION AND REVISION RECORD


Manual Volume 2 Manual Section Preface aii Contract No. 04-31645-720
Prep. by SRH Date 11/21/2005 FFEM DWG. No. 5.401476
App. by MDS Date 12/12/2005 Rev 1 Page 1 of 1
CHANCADOR TRAYLOR
MANUAL DE INSTALACION, OPERACION Y MANTENIMIENTO

RENUNCIA

El presente manual es un servicio de FFE Minerals U.S.A. Inc. A pesar de


nuestros mejores esfuerzos, cierta informacin en este manual puede quedar
obsoleta con l. FFE Minerals U.S.A. Inc. no acepta responsabilidad por la
exactitud, la integridad o el uso de, ni ninguna otra responsabilidad en la puesta
al da de la informacin contenida en el presente manual. Estos materiales se
entregan TAL COMO SON, SIN GARANTA DE NINGN TIPO, NI EXPRESA
NI IMPLCITA, INCLUYENDO, AUNQUE NO LIMITADO A, LAS GARANTAS
INVOLUCRADAS RELATIVAS AL COMERCIO, OPORTUNIDAD PARA UN
PROPSITO PARTICULAR O DE NO TRANSGRESIN, UD. ASUME LA
COMPLETA RESPONSABILIDAD Y RIESGO POR EL USO DE ESTE
MATERIAL. Algunas jurisdicciones no permiten la exclusin de las garantas
implicadas, por lo que las exclusiones establecidas anteriormente, podran no
aplicarse a Ud.

FFE MINERALS U.S.A. INC., SUS AGENTES, REPRESENTANTES Y


EMPLEADOS, NO SON RESPONSABLES NI IMPUTABLES POR CUALQUIER
DAO DIRECTO, INDIRECTO, INCIDENTAL, CONSECUENCIAL, ESPECIAL,
EJEMPLAR, PUNITIVO U OTROS, QUE SURGIERAN DE O SE RELACIONEN
DE ALGUNA MANERA CON EL PRESENTE MANUAL Y/O SU CONTENIDO,
TRADUCCIN, NI LA INFORMACIN DENTRO DEL MANUAL. SU NICO
ACTO DE INSATISFACCIN RESPECTO DE ESTE MANUAL ES DEJAR DE
UTILIZARLO.

Todos los contenidos dentro de este manual, incluyendo, aunque no limitado a,


su texto, logos e imgenes, son de propiedad de FFE Minerals U.S.A. Inc.
Ninguna porcin de los materiales de estas pginas puede ser reimpreso o
republicado de ninguna forma sin la expresa autorizacin por escrito de FFE
Minerals U.S.A. Inc.

AL USAR ESTE MANUAL UD RECONOCE HABER LEIDO, COMPRENDIDO Y


EST DE ACUERDO CON LOS TRMINOS PARA SU USO.

DISCLAIMER
Manual Volume all Manual Section preface Contract ALL
Orig. by J. Anthony Date 1/22/2003 FFEM DWG. No. 7.500267
Rev. by M. Solomon Date 5/14/2004 Rev. 1 Page 1 of 1
CHANCADOR TRAYLOR
MANUAL DE INSTALACION, OPERACION Y MANTENIMIENTO

SEGURIDA

SE ESTABLECEN EN EL PRESENTE MANUAL REGLAS


BSICAS RELATIVAS A LA SEGURIDAD DENTRO Y
CERCA DE UNA PLANTA CHANCADORA EN LA SECCIN
1.2, PROCEDIMIENTO DE TRABAJO SEGURO.
LA SEGURIDAD DE UN OPERADOR Y LA DE LOS DEMS
DEPENDE DEL CUIDADO Y JUICIO RAZONABLES EN LA
OPERACIN DE ESTE CHANCADOR. UN OPERADOR CUIDADOSO
ES UN BUEN SEGURO CONTRA ACCIDENTES.
LA MAYORA DE LOS ACCIDENTES, SIN IMPORTAR
DONDE OCURREN, SON CAUSADOS POR FALLAS AL
OBSERVAR Y RESPETAR REGLAS O PRECAUCIONES
SIMPLES Y FUNDAMENTALES. POR TAL RAZN, LA
MAYORA DE LOS ACCIDENTES PUEDEN PREVENIRSE
RECONOCIENDO PELIGROS Y SIGUIENDO PASOS PARA
EVITARLOS ANTES QUE OCURRA UN ACCIDENTE.
SIN DESMEDRO DEL CUIDADO QUE SE HA TENIDO EN
EL DISEO Y CONSTRUCCIN DE ESTE TIPO DE
EQUIPOS, EXISTEN CONDICIONES QUE NO PUEDEN SER
COMPLETAMENTE SALVAGUARDADAS, SIN INTERFERIR
CON UN ACCESO RAZONABLE Y UNA OPERACIN
EFICIENTE. SE INCLUYEN ADVERTENCIAS EN EL
PRESENTE MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES PARA
RESALTAR DICHAS CONDICIONES.

SAFETY STATEMENT
Manual Volume all Manual Section prefac Contract ALL
Orig. by J. Anthony Date 1/22/2003 FFEM DWG. No. 7.500268
Rev. by M. Solomon Date 5/14/2004 Rev. 1 Page 1 of 1
TRAYLOR CRUSHER
CHANCADOR TRAYLOR
INSTALLATION, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
MANUAL DE INSTALACION, OPERACION Y MANTENIMIENTO

A Spanish translation of this Installation, Maintenance and


Operation manual has been provided. The Spanish translation was
prepared by an outside service. FFE Minerals USA, Inc. cannot
guarantee or warrant the accuracy of the translation, and therefore
the English version of this manual shall be the official manual for all
purposes.

In the event of any inconsistency or conflict between the English and


Spanish version, or in the event that the Spanish version omits or
fails to accurately state in Spanish what is stated in English, the
English version shall prevail.

*******************************************************

Se ha hecho llegar una versin en Espaol para el Manual de


Instalatcin, Mantencin y Operacin. Esta versin fue realizada
por servicios externos a nuestra compaia. Aunque fue FFE
Minerals USA, Inc. No se hace responsable ni garantiza su exacto
traduccin, este manual se considerar como el documanto oficial
para cualquier propsito.

En la eventualidad de existir alguna disconformidad o mala


interpretacin de la traduccin Ingls al Espaol, o que su versin
omita o no corresponda con lo indicado en Ingls, prevalecer e
trmino en Ingls

TRANSLATION WARNING
Manual Volume all Manual Section prefac Contract ALL
Orig. by SRH Date 08/19/2004 FFEM DWG. No. 7.500433
Rev. by MDS Date 08/19/2004 Rev. 0 Page 1 of 1
CHANCADOR TRAYLOR
MANUAL DE INSTALACION, OPERACION Y MANTENIMIENTO

INFORMACION ACERCA ESTE MANUAL

ESTE MANUAL CONSTA DE 3 VOLUMENES.

CADA VOLUMEN CONTIENE ESTA DESCRIPCIN & UNA TABLA


DE CONTENIDOS DEL VOLUMEN.

EL CONTENIDO DE LOS VOLUMENES ES:

VOLUMEN 1: INSTRUCCIONES DE INSTALACIN, OPERACIN


& MANTENCIN MECANICAS & PLANOS FFEM
MECANICOS

VOLUMEN 2: PLANOS E INSTRUCCIONES DE


SUMINISTRADORES

VOLUMEN 3: ELECTRICIDAD

ABOUT THIS MANUAL


Manual Volume all Manual Section preface Contract 04-31645-720
No.
Prep. by SRH Date 11/21/2005 FFEM DWG. No. 5.401468
App by MDS Date 11/21/2005 Rev. No. 0 Page 1 of 1
CHANCADOR TRAYLOR
MANUAL DE INSTALACION, OPERACION Y MANTENCION

TABLA DE CONTENIDOS
VOLUMEN 2
SEC MPL TITULO Plano No. Rev.
(o pgina No.) No.

ai Cubierta 5.401475 0
aii Registro de Distribucin y Revisin 5.401476 0
aiii Exencin de Responsabilidad 7.500267 1
aiv Declaracin de Seguridad 7.500268 1
````
av Aviso Sobre la Traduccion 7.500433 0
avi Acerca de este Manual 5.401468 0
INDICE TABLA DE CONTENIDOS 5.401477 0
1 RODAMIENTOS CONTRA-EJE, TIMKEN
Manual de Mantencin de Cojinetes 7313
Manual de Mantencin de Cojinetes Espaol 7313S
2 COJINETE CONTRA-EJE RTD DE MINCO

RTD de Minco S56

Soporte de Minco FG110-1


Cabeza de Conexin de Minco CH103

3 UNIDAD HIDRAULICA Y DE LUBRICACION

1 Listado de Materiales 6.507158 0


2 Arreglo General 6.506776 1
3 Dibujos Esquemticos 6.506777 0
4 Diagrama de Cableado 6.506779-01 0
6.506779-02 0

TABLA DE CONTENIDOS
Vol. Manual 2 Seccin INDICE Contrato No. 04-31645-720
Prep. por SRH Fecha 12/12/2005 PLANO FFEM No. 5.401477
Aprobado MDS Fecha 12/12/2005 Rev. 0 Pag. 1 de 6
por No.
CHANCADOR TRAYLOR
MANUAL DE INSTALACION, OPERACION Y MANTENCION
5 Informacin de Vendedores
4 ENFIRADOR DE AIRE, YOUNG
Catlogo de Enfriador OCS 10-2000
Plano Enfriador OCS 6.506996 0
Enfriador OCS - Recomendaciones &
Form 2952-1
Instrucciones de Instalacin
Enfriador OCS Instrucciones de Mantencin y Form 2952
Garanta
Instrucciones Enfriador OCS Espaol Form 2952-1
Motor 10HP, Toshiba Hojas Tcnicas

- Hoja Tecnica, Motor MDSL0001-04

- Instrucciones de IOM, Motor

- Instrucciones de Lubricacion MDS-O-0001

- Almacenaje, Motor

5 VALVULA DE ALIVIO DE LUBRICACIN,


FULFLO
Vlvula de Alivio, Fulflo Vlvula Serie V
INTERRUPTOR DE FLUJO, UNIVERSAL FLOW
6 MONITOR
Manual de Instalacion y Mantenimiento, Monitor de GENMAN-200.5M
Flujo
Instrucciones de Instalacion, Monitores de Flujo SPGENMAN-200.1

Contador de Flujo, Plano Serie MN 6.507816 3


Contador de Flujo, Catalago Serie MN
Contador de Flujo, Plano Serie SN 6.507815 2

TABLA DE CONTENIDOS
Vol. Manual 2 Seccin INDICE Contrato No. 04-31645-720
Prep. por SRH Fecha 12/12/2005 PLANO FFEM No. 5.401477
Aprobado MDS Fecha 12/12/2005 Rev. 0 Pag. 2 de 6
por No.
CHANCADOR TRAYLOR
MANUAL DE INSTALACION, OPERACION Y MANTENCION

Contador de Flujo, Catalago Serie SN

7 VALVULA DE BOLAS CON MOTOR,


JAMESBURY
Vlvula de bolas, Jamesbury, Catlogo B101-2 6/05

Vlvula de bolas, Jamesbury, Manual de


IMO-213EN 7/05
Instalacin, Operacin y Mantencin
Actuador Elctrico, Jamesbury, Catlogo A120-3 12/03

Actuador, Jamesbury, Instrucciones de IMO-516 7065 12/01


Instalacin, Operacin y Mantencin
Instrucciones de Montaje Vlvula/Actuador AMI-388 12/01

Actuador Elctrico, Limitadores adicionales de IMO-505 01/02


fin de carrera
Limitadores adicionales de fin de carrera
(disyuntores de seguridad), Jamesbury, EK-5120 A
Instrucciones
Limitadores adicionales de fin de carrera
(disyuntores de seguridad), Valvcon, 1080 D
Instrucciones
8 RTD & THERMOWELL
Sensores de temperatura y accesorios Rosemount 00813-0100-2654
Instrucciones de Alambraje del Sensor y Planos aprobados 00813-0400-2654

ENSAMBLE VALVULA ALIVIO &


9
ACUMULADOR
Plano FFE Arreglo General 1.512208 3
Diagrama Esquemtico de Distribuidor HS43-A37-3026-A 1
Acumulador, Distribuidor y Base, Ensamble y 43AS-13074-0-C 2
Arreglo General
Acumulador & Distribuidor, Arreglo General de AGA-14591-0-C 0
Ensamble
Acumulador & Distribuidor, Ensamble y Listado
R978933506
de Materiales

TABLA DE CONTENIDOS
Vol. Manual 2 Seccin INDICE Contrato No. 04-31645-720
Prep. por SRH Fecha 12/12/2005 PLANO FFEM No. 5.401477
Aprobado MDS Fecha 12/12/2005 Rev. 0 Pag. 3 de 6
por No.
CHANCADOR TRAYLOR
MANUAL DE INSTALACION, OPERACION Y MANTENCION

Lquidos a base de petrleo para ser usados en


motores y bombas de paleta, de engranajes, de RA 07 075/03.96
pistones y radiales.

Ensamble, Puesta en Marcha y Mantencin de


RA 07 300/06.98
Vlvulas Industriales Ingls
Ensamble, Puesta en Marcha y Mantencin de
RA 07 300/12.02
Vlvulas Industriales Espaol
Ensamble, Puesta en Marcha & Servicio de
Unidades y Sistemas Hidrulicos Ingls RA 07 900/06.98

Ensamble, Puesta en Marcha & Servicio de


RA 07 900/12.02
Unidades y Sistemas Hidrulicos Espaol
Vlvula de Aguja PU-A21-16-00 5

Manmetro PU-A31-11-00 1
Elemento Lgico 971 55 08 4 272182 b
Vlvulas de Cartucho de 2 vas Ingls RA 21 050/06.98

Vlvulas de Cartucho de 2 vas Espaol RS 21 050/02.03

Acumulador 9 535 233 184/01.04

Instrumento de Carga & Prueba de Acumulador 1 539 929 009


i
Documento de Reparacin de Acumulador
Estndar
Gua de Repuestos Recomendados
10 SISTEMA DE LUBRICACIN DE LA ARAA

Bomba Electrica Rotatoria tipo FloMaster 422823

Interruptor Limitador Serie D 402877


Vlvulas Dividoras 9505A
Controlador de Lubricacin Serie A 402671

TABLA DE CONTENIDOS
Vol. Manual 2 Seccin INDICE Contrato No. 04-31645-720
Prep. por SRH Fecha 12/12/2005 PLANO FFEM No. 5.401477
Aprobado MDS Fecha 12/12/2005 Rev. 0 Pag. 4 de 6
por No.
CHANCADOR TRAYLOR
MANUAL DE INSTALACION, OPERACION Y MANTENCION

11 SISTEMA INDICADOR DE POSICION DEL EJE


PRINCIPAL
Caja de Ensamble de Indicador de Barras 6.507184 0
Transductor Lineal, Balluff 814511U
Conjunto de cuerdas, Balluff
Caja, Hoffman CHQR
Kit de Ventana de Caja, Hoffman
Suministro de Energa, AstroDyne, Serie PS, PD-
25
Indicador de barra, Sistema M, Modelo 49AV2 ES-9333 Rev 6

Transmisor de Seal, Sistema M, Modelo W2VS ES-5518 Rev 3

Bloque terminal montado sobre riel, 020000000


Mdulos de Interfase de Cables, Riel DIN

12 ACOPLAMIENTO DE ENGRANAJE &


ENSAMBLE DE EJE, FALK
Plano de acoplamiento de engranaje y ensamble 6.507057 1
de eje
Instalacin & Mantencin - Ingls 458-110
Instalacin & Mantencin - Espaol 458-110S
13 POTENCIA HIDRAULICA PACK, SIMPLEX
Instrucciones de Operacin & Mantencin #54393
Listado de Partes del Cilindro, Simplex #86183
Instrucciones de Operacin del Cilindro, Simplex #86183
Detalles de Manguera
14 SOPLADOR DEL SELLO DE POLVO, GAST
Especificaciones y dimensiones del soplador
Manual de Operacin y Mantencin del Soplador 70-6000 F2-200 G
Instrucciones de Operacin de la Vlvula de
70-6300 F2-105 F
Alivio

TABLA DE CONTENIDOS
Vol. Manual 2 Seccin INDICE Contrato No. 04-31645-720
Prep. por SRH Fecha 12/12/2005 PLANO FFEM No. 5.401477
Aprobado MDS Fecha 12/12/2005 Rev. 0 Pag. 5 de 6
por No.
CHANCADOR TRAYLOR
MANUAL DE INSTALACION, OPERACION Y MANTENCION
Instrucciones de Operacin del Soplador Ingls UK10103 D
Instrucciones de Operacin del Soplador
UK10103 D
Espaol
15 PLATAFORMA DE SERVICIO Y CARRO DE LA
EXCENTRICA

LATER

TABLA DE CONTENIDOS
Vol. Manual 2 Seccin INDICE Contrato No. 04-31645-720
Prep. por SRH Fecha 12/12/2005 PLANO FFEM No. 5.401477
Aprobado MDS Fecha 12/12/2005 Rev. 0 Pag. 6 de 6
por No.
WHEN ORDERING SPECIFY SENSING ELEMENT, CASE LENGTH, NUMBER
OF LEADS, AND LEAD LENGTH.

S56PA124Z24 EXAMPLE OF MODEL NUMBER

S56 SPECIFICATIONS DRAWING NUMBER.

PA SENSING ELEMENT:
CC = COPPER;
NA = NICKEL;
PA = 100 OHM, .00392 PLATINUM.

124 CASE LENGTH A IN .1O INCREMENTS (124 = 12.4O).


MINIMUM A = 40 (4.0O) [102];
MAXIMUM A = 480 (48.0O) [1219].

Z NUMBER OF LEADS:
Y = 2 LEADS PER ELEMENT (NOT AVAILABLE WITH CC
ELEMENT MODELS);
Z = 3 LEADS PER ELEMENT.

24 LEAD LENGTH B IN INCHES.

1. ELEMENTS (2): COPPER, NICKEL, OR PLATINUM.


2. RESISTANCE (EACH ELEMENT):
COPPER: 10.00 OHMS .50% (10.05/9.95) AT 25C (77F), R/T TABLES
#16-9 (C) AND #17-9 (F);
NICKEL: 120.0 OHMS .5% (120.6/119.4) AT 0C (32F), R/T TABLES
COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL
#7-120 (C) AND #8-120 (F); PROPRIETARY INFORMATION
PLATINUM: 100.0 OHMS .5% (100.5/99.5) AT 0C (32F), R/T TABLES
#1-100 (C) AND #2-100 (F).
OF MINCO PRODUCTS, INC.
RESISTANCE IS EXCLUDING ALL LEADWIRE RESISTANCE.
3. TEMPERATURE RANGE: -50C TO 260C (-58F TO 500F).
DO NOT DUPLICATE
4. INSULATION RESISTANCE: 100 MEGOHMS MINIMUM AT 100 VOLTS DC,
BETWEEN ELEMENTS AND LEADS TO PROBE CASE.
5. LEADS: AWG #22, STRANDED, TFE INSULATED.
6 TOLERANCE ON LEAD LENGTH:
71O [1803] AND UNDER: +2/-0O [+51/-0];
72O TO 119O [1829 TO 3023]: +4/-0O [+102/-0];
120O [3048] AND OVER: +6/-0O [+152/-0].
7. CASE: STAINLESS STEEL, COPPER ALLOY TIP.
8 CASE MAY BE CUT TO SHORTER LENGTH. USE CARE NOT TO DAMAGE
LEADWIRE INSULATION. LOCATE THE SLIP-FIT TFE SLEEVE IN END OF
CUT-OFF CASE TO PROTECT LEADWIRE INSULATION AT POINT OF
EMERGENCE. MINIMUM A FOR CUT-OFF CASE IS 40 (4.0) [102].

Print Date: 05/20/2010 16:32


MODEL USED WITH O-RING BODY
NUMBER MINCO PROBE A MATERIAL MATERIAL
FG114-1 .188 .190 VITON
FG114-2 .188 .190 BUNA N
FG110-1 .215 .218 VITON TYPE 303
FG110-2 .215 .218 BUNA N STAINLESS STEEL
FG113-1 .250 .253 VITON
FG113-2 .250 .253 BUNA N
FG914 .188 .190 VITON
TYPE 316
FG912 .215 .218 VITON
STAINLESS STEEL
FG911 .250 .253 VITON
FG314 .188 .190 VITON
FG310 .215 .218 VITON
NYLON
FG315 .236 .242 VITON
FG313 .250 .253 VITON

1. HOLDER IS EQUIPPED WITH AN O-RING TO SEAL AROUND PROBE.


2. PRESSURE RATING: 50 PSI (3.4 BAR).
3. TEMPERATURE LIMITS:
VITON O-RING: -40C TO 260C (-40F TO 500F);
BUNA N O-RING: -53C TO 149C (-65F TO 300F);
NYLON HOLDER: -40C TO 120C (-40F TO 248F).
4 NYLON HOLDER TO HAVE 1.0" WRENCH FLATS.

Print Date: 05/20/2010 16:32


WHEN ORDERING SPECIFY PIPE THREAD CODE AND TYPE OF CONNECTION
POINTS.

CH103P4T6 EXAMPLE OF MODEL NUMBER

CH103 SPECIFICATIONS DRAWING NUMBER.

P4 PIPE THREAD CODE:


CODE THREAD A THREAD B
P1 3/4 14 NPT 1/2 14 NPT 3
P2 3/4 14 NPT 3/4 14 NPT
P3 1/2 14 NPT 1/2 14 NPT 3
P4 1/2 14 NPT 3/4 14 NPT

T6 TYPE OF CONNECTION POINTS: 2


T0 = MOUNTING PACKAGE FOR TEMPTRAN MOUNTING;
T6 = TERMINAL BLOCK WITH 6 CONNECTION POINTS;
T8 = TERMINAL BLOCK WITH 8 CONNECTION POINTS;
W0 = EMPTY ENCLOSURE (NO CONNECTION POINTS);
W4 = 4 WIRE NUTS;
W6 = 6 WIRE NUTS.

1. CONNECTION HEAD PROVIDES A WEATHERPROOF ENCLOSURE IN


WHICH LEADWIRE FROM PROBE TYPE RESISTANCE THERMOMETERS OR
THERMOCOUPLES CAN BE CONNECTED TO EXTENSION WIRES LEADING
TO REMOTELY LOCATED READOUT OR CONTROL INSTRUMENTATION.
2 CONNECTION HEAD CAN BE SUPPLIED WITH TEMPTRAN MOUNTING
PACKAGE OR A TERMINAL BLOCK FOR MAKING CONNECTIONS
BETWEEN PROBE LEADWIRES AND EXTENSION LEADWIRES.
3 ONE 3/4 x 1/2 NPT REDUCER BUSHING SUPPLIED WITH EACH HEAD.
4. T6 (EPOXY GLASS) OR T8 (PHENOLIC) TERMINAL BLOCK: SCREW
CONNECTIONS ARE SUITABLE FOR CONNECTING PROBE LEADWIRES TO
EXTENSION WIRES RANGING IN SIZE UP TO AWG #16.
5. WIRE NUTS: PORCELAIN, SUITABLE FOR CONNECTING PROBE WIRES TO
EXTENSION WIRES RANGING IN SIZE UP TO AWG #14.
6. TEMPERATURE LIMIT: 600F MAXIMUM, WHEN USED WITH WIRE NUTS.
7 INSTALLATION: THE MOUNTING FITTING FOR THE PROBE NORMALLY
ATTACHES TO THREAD A. CONDUIT ADAPTER OR PIPE FOR EXTENSION
WIRES NORMALLY ATTACHES TO THREAD B.
8. SUITABLE FOR USE IN ENVIRONMENTS AS DEFINED IN
NEMA TYPE 3 AND 4.
9. APPROXIMATE WEIGHT: 2.05 LBS.

Print Date: 05/20/2010 16:32


MANUAL

TROLA-DYNE, INC.

2951

Lube and Hydraulic Unit

For

FFE Minerals USA Inc.

Project: Fluor/Cerro Verde/Phelps Dodge

FFE Contract Number: 0431645

FFE Purchase Order Number: 003338

FFE Line Item Number: 1

FFE Inventory ID Number: F005122


www.Imo-Pump.com
Performance Shown at 150 PSID (10 BAR),
200 SSU (43 CST)

1 The reliable pump people


www.Imo-Pump.com
IMO Series 3G Pump

AXIAL OR RADIAL
HYDRAULICALLY
(ELBOW) INLET VARIETY OF PORT
BALANCED
PUMP SCREWS STYLES AVAILABLE
(SEE TABLE)

CHOICE OF
SHAFT SEALING

FOOT OR
FLANGE MOUNT

Shown Above: 3G-095, Flange Mount Iron Cased Axial Inlet, Built-In Relief Valve

Shown Above: Tamper Resistant Optional Built-In Pressure Relief Valve


for sizes 162 and smaller

The reliable pump people 2


www.Imo-Pump.com
Applications

The 3G series pump is intended for use in lubrication, hydraulic and control oil services such as those
found on rotating machinery or other equipment needing forced lubrication, circulation, fluid transfer,
distillate fuel burner or similar systems. This series is available in seventeen displacements fitted into five
casing sizes. Pump casings are produced from cast iron with the option of cast steel.
All pumps are fitted with mechanical shaft seals. Inlet porting can be either radial (elbow), rotatable in 90o
increments, or axial. An internal tamper resistant relief valve is available as an option. Porting on the 95
through 162 rotor size pumps can be either SAE straight thread or SAE 4-bolt, Code 61, flange pad.
Porting on the 187 through 250 pumps is SAE 4-bolt, Code 61, flange pad.
Steel case pumps are equipped with SAE 4-bolt flange pads. An optional in-line relief valve is also
available. All SAE flange pads accept 4-bolt, O-ring sealed, Code 61 mating flanges of either socket weld
or FNPT style.
Both iron and steel pumps are designed for flange mounting and can be provided with mating foot brack-
ets or pump to motor (C-face) brackets. Flange or foot mounting on rotor sizes 95 through 162 and flange
mounting on rotor sizes 187 through 250 allows the pump outlet port to be directed radially in 90
increments. Port options allow almost any global standard connection type. Units can also be supplied for
vertical tank mounting.

3G095 with radial SAE pad inlet port

3G095 mounted to a C face electric motor on lube oil service

3 The reliable pump people


www.Imo-Pump.com
2-210 GPM (7-795 L/M) Pressure
to 250 PSIG (17 Bar)

E BOLT CIRCLE 2 HOLES

E BOLT CIRCLE 4 HOLES

A B C D E H L M N R U W WEIGHT*
PUMP
SIZE INCH MM INCH MM INCH MM INCH MM INCH MM INCH MM INCH MM INCH MM INCH MM INCH MM INCH MM INCH MM LBS. KG

95 1 25.4 3/4 19 4.66 118.4 3.249 82.52 4.19 106.4 4.57 116.1 10.83 275.1 2.25 57.2 1.88 47.8 5.02 127.5 .5 12.7 5.25 133.4 18 8.0

118 1-1/2 38.1 1 25.4 6 152.4 5 127 6.38 162 5.76 146.3 13.91 353.3 4 101.6 2.80 71.1 6.19 157.2 .625 15.875 9 228.6 34 15.4

143/162 2 50.8 1-1/2 38.1 7.67 194.8 5 127 6.38 162 7.57 192.3 16.26 413.1 4 101.6 2.76 70.1 6.65 168.9 .75 19.05 7.75 196.9 44 20.0

E BOLT CIRCLE 4 HOLES

A B C D E H L M N R U W WEIGHT*
PUMP
SIZE INCH MM INCH MM INCH MM INCH MM INCH MM INCH MM INCH MM INCH MM INCH MM INCH MM INCH MM INCH MM LBS. KG

187/200 3 76.2 2 50.8 10.06 255.5 6 152.37 9 228.6 9.44 239.8 22.52 572 4.94 125.5 3.31 84.1 9.84 249.9 1.250 31.75 5.62 142.7 117 53

250 4 101.6 2-1/2 63.5 12.61 320.3 6 152.37 9 228.6 10.19 258.8 25.84 656.3 4.94 125.5 3.31 84.1 10.21 259.3 1.250 31.75 5.62 142.7 131 59.4

* Inlet and Outlet are SAE 4-bolt 3000 PSI flange pads.
* Flange mounted version. Weights exclude port adapters and mounting foot bracket / plate.

For a more detailed view of the above referenced outline drawings, please refer to our website at
http://www.imo-pump.com
The reliable pump people 4
www.Imo-Pump.com
Specifications
Casing Cast iron or cast steel.
Rotors Power rotor is ductile (nodular) iron. Idler rotors are gray iron.
Shaft Seal Type V: Fluoroelastomer bellows mechanical seal with carbon on ni-resist faces,
fluoroelastomer O-rings, recommended for viscosities below 3000 SSU (650 CST) and
distillate fuel oils.
Type H: Metal bellows balanced, positive drive mechanical seal with carbon on silicon carbide faces,
fluoroelastomer O-rings, recommended for viscosities above 3000 SSU (650 CST) or for
closer compliance with API.
Type J: Balanced, positive drive mechanical seal with neoprene O-rings for high inlet pressure /
low differential pressure applications.
Type N: No shaft seal (must use mounting option I).
Bearing Internal, ball type.
Relief Valve Optional internal, tamper resistant, built-in pressure relief valve for viscosities not exceeding 1500
SSU (324 CST). Specify differential set pressure in 15 PSI (1.03 BAR) increments, i.e. 60, 75210.
(This relief valve is intended for momentary protection for the pump against overpressure. It
is not intended to be a system pressure control device). Minimum set pressure is 60 PSID (4.1
BAR). Maximum set pressure is 210 PSID (14.5 BAR). An optional in-line relief valve with external
return-to-tank connection is also available.
Viscosity Range 32 to 3000 SSU (2 to 650 CST) type V seal.
32 to 15,000 SSU (2 to 3200 CST) type H seal.
Inlet Pressure 50 PSIG (3.4 BAR) normal maximum.
300 PSIG (20.7 BAR) optional maximum (Contact factory).
Outlet Pressure 250 PSIG (17 BAR) maximum [(to 300 PSIG (20.7 BAR) with inlet at 50 PSIG (3.4 BAR)]. Operation
at differential pressures below 40 PSI (2.8 BAR) may require pump modification- consult Imo Pump
with full operating range data.
Temperature 0 to 225F (-18 to 107C)
Drive/Rotation Direct only. Clockwise facing pump shaft standard. Counterclockwise optional.
Speed Size 95: 5000 rpm maximum. Sizes 118 - 200: 4000 rpm maximum. Size 250 1.3D & 1.6D leads:
4000 rpm maximum. Size 250 2D lead: 3250 rpm maximum.
Mounting May be foot or flange mounted in any orientation. Vertical tank mounts available.
Connections Port Type Availability
Inlet Port Type Iron Case Steel Case
Axial SAE Straight Thread Yes No
Axial SAE 4-Bolt Pad, Code 61 Yes Yes
Radial SAE Straight Thread Yes No
Radial SAE 4-Bolt Pad, Code 61 Yes Yes
Outlet Port Type Iron Case Steel Case
Radial SAE Straight Thread Yes No
Radial SAE 4-Bolt Pad, Code 61 Yes Yes

Straight thread for use with O-ring fittings. SAE pad is for use with mating SAE 4-bolt 3000 PSI flanges.
Filtration Inlet strainers are required to keep contaminants and abrasives out of the pump and must be
selected in consultation with the strainer vendor to prevent pump starvation. Normally, 60 mesh
(0.01 inch- 238 micron) for light and 1/8-3/16 inch (3-5mm) openings for heavy oils are
recommended. Return line filters for closed loop systems also recommended.
Accessories Completely mounted pump/driver assemblies with baseplates or NEMA C face motor adapters are
available.

5 The reliable pump people


www.Imo-Pump.com
Model Code Nomenclature

Model No. Code Example A A 3 G / N V I J F B 1 1 8 S P 0 0 0

Design Sequence Designator for Special Modifications


Pump Series Size/Lead/Rotation
095AE = 1.2D, CW 162SP = 1.6D, CW
Separator
095AF = 1.2D, CCW 162SR = 1.6D, CCW
Fixed Designator 095SP = 1.6D, CW 162SC = 2.0D, CW
095SR = 1.6D, CCW 162SD = 2.0D, CCW
Seals 095SC = 2.0D, CW
095SD = 2.0D, CCW 187SY = 1.45D, CW
V = Fluorocarbon Bellows mechanical seal, 187SZ = 1.45D, CCW
carbon on Ni-resist, Fluorocarbon O-rings 118SP = 1.6D, CW 187SM = 1.75D, CW
H = Metal bellows balanced mechanical seal, 118SR = 1.6D, CCW 187SN = 1.75D, CCW
carbon on silicon carbide, Fluorocarbon 118SC = 2.0D, CW 187SC = 2.0D, CW
O-rings 118SD = 2.0D, CCW 187SD = 2.0D, CCW
N = No shaft seal (must use mounting I), 143SJ = 1.5D, CW 200SC = 2.0D, CW
Fluorocarbon O-rings 143SK = 1.5D, CCW 200SD = 2.0D, CCW
J = Metal Bellows balanced mechanical seal, 143SE = 1.7D, CW
143SF = 1.7D, CCW 250AL = 1.3D, CW
carbon on silicon carbide, Neoprene O-rings
143SC = 2.0D, CW 250AM = 1.3D, CCW
Case Material and Outlet Port 143SD = 2.0D, CCW 250SP = 1.6D, CW
250SR = 1.6D, CCW
I = Iron case, SAE straight thread port** 250SC = 2.0D, CW
P = Iron case, SAE 4-bolt port pad 250SD = 2.0D, CCW
S = Steel case, SAE 4-bolt port pad
Relief Valve Set Range (Limit 1500 ssu)
X = Special
**Not available on Rotor Sizes 187 thru 250 A = No relief valve
B = 60/75 psi differential
Inlet Port C = 90/105/120 psi differential
J = Axial inlet, SAE straight thread port** D = 135/150/165 psi differential
No Weep Hole
STANDARD

K = Axial inlet, SAE 4-bolt port pad E = 180/195/210 psi differential


L = Radial inlet, SAE straight thread port** Iron Pump only
M = Radial inlet, SAE 4-bolt pad In-line relief valve option available
Mounting
N = Axial inlet, SAE straight thread port**
C = SAE flange mount
WEEP HOLE
Front Cover

P = Axial inlet 4-bolt port pad F = Foot mount


R = Radial inlet, straight thread port** I = Integral flange mount
(note: must specify N for Seals)
S = Radial inlet 4-bolt port pad
**Not Available on Rotor Sizes 187 thru 250

The reliable pump people 6


Imo Pump is proud to be a member of the Colfax
Pump Group associated with Allweiler Pump of
Radolfzell, Germany, Houttuin Pump of Utrech,
The Netherlands, Warren Pump of Warren, Mas-
sachusetts, USA, providing World-Class fluid
handling equipment and services to a global
market.
Imo Pump means in a word, Performance. Imo
Pumps Performance Over Time provides the
best overall value by providing low maintenance or
lengthy service intervals and efficient product
operation or low energy costs, which results in the
lowest Total Cost of Ownership.
All of Imo Pumps products are designed to be of
Heavy Duty - Industrial Grade construction and
certain models are designed specifically for
Severe Duty services such as Marine, Power
Generation or Process Applications.
Imo Pump is fully qualified to respond on all of the
imposed quality and design standards provided,
such as Military Standards, ABS, ANSI, ASME,
SAE, ISO-9000, CE, UL, CSA, NEMA and ISO,
among others.
Imo Pump maintains a fully qualified staff of
experienced Application Engineers, Technical
Sales Engineers, Product Engineers, Service
Engineers and Draftsmen capable of handling the
most demanding applications.
We are responding to our customer needs with
efficient, reliable products capable of handing a
wide range of fluids over a long service life.

Our QuickServe Department processes


internet and credit card orders. Most repair kits
can be shipped same or next business day
delivery saving valuable down time. Visit out
our E-Commerce site on the web or call our
customer service department to place your
order today!

Quality Management System


Bulletin 3G-00
Bulletin 3G-00 2000 Imo Pump All rights reserved.
TM

GENERAL INSTALLATION, OPERATION,


MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
MANUAL
FOR
THREE SCREW AND CIG SERIES PUMPS

WARNING
This manual, and the specific INSTRUCTION MANUAL, should be
read thoroughly prior to pump installation, operation, maintenance
or troubleshooting.

This manual now is


identified as part no.
SRM00046

Manual No. CA-1 Rev. 4 September 1997


READ THIS ENTIRE PAGE BEFORE PROCEEDING

FOR THE SAFETY OF PERSONNEL AND TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO THE EQUIP-


MENT, THE FOLLOWING NOMENCLATURE HAS BEEN USED IN THIS MANUAL:

DANGER

Failure to observe the precautions noted in this box can result in severe
bodily injury or loss of life.

WARNING

Failure to observe the precautions noted in this box can cause injury to
personnel by accidental contact with the equipment or liquids. Protection
should be provided by the user to prevent accidental contact.

CAUTION ATTENTION

Failure to observe the precautions noted in this box can cause damage or
failure of the equipment.

Non-compliance of safety instructions Safety instructions Safety instructions which shall be con-
identified by the following symbol could where electrical safety sidered for reasons of safe operation
affect safety for persons: is involved are identi- of the pump and/or protection of the
fied by: pump itself are marked by the sign:

ATTENTION

CONTENTS

SAFETY AND TABLE OF CONTENTS .................................................................................. A


A - GENERAL ......................................................................................................................... 1
B - TRANSPORTATION AND STORAGE ............................................................................... 1
C - DESCRIPTION OF THE PUMP ........................................................................................ 1
D - INSTALLATION/ASSEMBLY .............................................................................................. 1
E - STARTUP, OPERATION AND SHUTDOWN ................................................................... 10
F - MAINTENANCE .............................................................................................................. 14
G - FIELD AND FACTORY SERVICE ................................................................................... 15
H - TROUBLESHOOTING .................................................................................................... 16

A
APPLICATIONS MANUAL FOR IMO PUMPS

A. GENERAL
The instructions found herein cover the general installation, operation, maintenance and trouble-
shooting of subject equipment. NOTE: Individual contracts may have specific provisions that vary
from this manual. Should any questions arise which may not be answered by these instructions, refer
to the specific pump instruction manual provided with your order. For further detailed information and
technical assistance to questions not answered by these manuals, please refer to Imo Pump, Techni-
cal/Customer Service Department, at (704) 289-6511.
This manual cannot possibly cover every situation connected with the installation, operation, mainte-
nance and troubleshooting of the equipment supplied. Every effort was made to prepare the text of
the manual so that engineering and design data was transformed into easily understood wording.
Imo Pump must assume the personnel assigned to operate and maintain the supplied equipment and
apply this instruction manual have sufficient technical knowledge and experience to use sound safety
and operational practices which may not be otherwise covered by this manual.
In applications where equipment furnished by Imo Pump is to become part of a process or other
machinery, these instructions should be thoroughly reviewed to determine proper fit of the equipment
into overall plant operational procedures.
WARNING
If installation, operation, and maintenance instructions are not correctly and strictly fol-
lowed and observed, injury to personnel or serious damage to pump could result. Imo
Pump cannot accept responsibility for unsatisfactory performance or damage resulting
from failure to comply with instructions.

B. TRANSPORTATION AND STORAGE


Always protect the pump against taking in water and other contaminants. Store the pump in a clean,
dry and relatively warm environment. Pumps are delivered with their internals oiled (unless specified
otherwise by the customer order) and with protective covers in or over all openings. These covers
should remain in place during the mounting and alignment procedures. The covers must be removed
just prior to attaching system piping to pump. If pumps are to be stored in other than a clean, warm,
or dry environment, or if they are to be stored for more than six months, contact Imo for appropriate
storage procedures.
C. DESCRIPTION OF THE PUMP
See specific pump instruction manual provided with your order.
D. INSTALLATION / ASSEMBLY

WARNING
On critical or dangerous equipment, provide safety and emergency systems to protect
personnel and property from injury due to pump malfunction. If pumped liquids are flam-
mable, toxic, corrosive, explosive or otherwise hazardous, provide for safety in the event of
leakage or malfunction. BEFORE working on equipment, make sure all power to equip-
ment is disconnected and locked-out.

D.1 TOOLS
The procedures described in this manual require common mechanics hand tools, dial indicators
for alignment and suitable lifting devices such as slings, straps, spreader bars, etc.
D.2 LIFTING OF PUMP AND PUMP/DRIVER ASSEMBLIES
All pumps and pump/driver assemblies should be lifted with appropriate devices securely at-
tached to the whole unit. Ensure units center-of-gravity is located between lifting points. See
Figure 1. This will avoid tipping of pump or pump/driver assembly. Spreader bars should be
used as necessary to insure load is properly distributed and lifting straps do not damage equip-
ment.
Some pumps and pump/driver assemblies have designated lifting points that are shown on their
outline drawings.
DANGER ATTENTION
Lifting a vertical pump/driver using straps or hooks attached to the pump or pump-to-
driver bracket may be dangerous since the center-of-gravity of the assembly may be higher
than the points of attachment. Take precautions to prevent slippage of slings and hooks.
Always use properly rated lifting devices.

Max 90
Min 60
Max 90 Max 90
Min 60

Figure 1 Lifting Pumps and Pump/Driver Assemblies

D.3 INSTALLATION OF PUMP ASSEMBLY


To insure adequate flow of liquid to pumps inlet port, place pump near liquid source and prefer-
ably place pump centerline below liquid surface. Use short, straight inlet lines.
A dry, clean, well-lit and well-ventilated site should be selected for installing the pump assembly.
Sufficient open space should be provided around pump rotor and/or gear housing to permit
routine visual inspection, on-site service and maintenance, and pump replacement. For instal-
lation and servicing of large pump units, ample overhead clearance should be provided to allow
for lifting device maneuvering.
D.4 FOUNDATIONS AND BASEPLATES
Foundations and baseplates must be designed and installed so pump and driver alignment can
be maintained at all times. Be sure baseplates are level and rest on smooth flat surfaces. Small
pumps may be mounted on baseplates or directly to existing floors that meet the criteria of
foundations. Larger pumps and/or drivers must be mounted to baseplates and foundations. It is
recommended that pumps and their drivers be mounted on common baseplates.
D.5 MOUNTING OF FOOT MOUNTED PUMPS AND DRIVERS
Some pumps are shipped on baseplates without drivers. For these units, install and tighten
each coupling half on driver and pump shafts. Place driver on baseplate and set proper dis-
tance between shafts and coupling hubs (See Figure 2). Locate driver so pump and driver
shafts are in axial alignment. See Section D.6 on Alignment.
Coupling Installation

Gap Length

Figure 2 Coupling Gap Measurement

For pumps driven through a separate gearbox or other device, first align device relative to pump,
and then align driver relative to device.
See Section D.6.5 for belt-driven pumps. On horizontal pump/driver assemblies, shaft couplings
are often shipped disassembled to prevent coupling damage during shipping and handling.
When not supplied by the manufacturer, coupling, shaft and/or belt guards conforming to ANSI
B15.1 should be installed for personnel protection during pump operation.
Final alignment of pump and driver should take place after unit is secured to foundation. If
baseplate is to be grouted, this should be completed before final alignment.
NOTE: Grouting is recommended to prevent lateral shifting of baseplate, not to take up irregu-
larities in the foundation. For installations requiring grouting, a baseplate designed
specifically for this purpose is needed.
WARNING
Install guards over couplings and shafts to protect personnel from accidental contact with
rotating couplings, belts, sheaves, chains, shafts and/or keyways.

D.6 ALIGNMENT
D.6.1 General
All pump and driver assemblies must be aligned after site installation and at regular
maintenance intervals. This applies to factory-mounted units (new or rebuilt) because
factory alignment is often disturbed during shipping and handling. Flexible couplings
shall be used to connect pump to its driver (unless otherwise specified by Imo Pump).
The objective of any aligning procedure is to align shafts (not align coupling hubs) by
using methods that cancel out any surface irregularities, shaft-end float, and eccentricity.
At operating temperatures above 175o F (65o C), pumps require hot alignment after
pump and driver reach normal operating temperatures. Also, re-check final alignment
after all piping is connected to pump.
D.6.2 Flexible Shaft Couplings
Flexible couplings are intended to provide a mechanically flexible connection for two
aligned shaft-ends. Flexible couplings are not intended to compensate for major angular
or parallel shaft misalignment. The allowable misalignment varies with the type of cou-
pling. Any improvement in alignment beyond coupling manufacturers minimum specifi-
cation will extend pump, mechanical seal or packing, coupling, and driver service life by
reducing bearing loads and wear.
CAUTION ATTENTION
Flexible couplings are NOT intended to permit significant shaft misalignment. Proper
alignment must be established/maintained to obtain proper operation and maximum life.
Pump alignment requirements are nearly always more strict than coupling alignment
requirements. Regardless of coupling manufacturers stated limits, pump-to-driver shaft
alignment must be per pumps alignment requirement.
Be sure all coupling set-screws and bolts are tight and coupling gap is properly set.

D.6.3 Aligning Foot Mounted Pumps - See Figure 3

Feet

Figure 3 Foot Mounted Pump

To install foot mounted pumps, perform the following:


Install pump and driver onto baseplate after installing appropriate coupling halves on
pump and driver shafts.
Perform alignment of pump and driver shafts using dial indicators. Acceptable align-
ment has been attained when FIM (Full Indicator Movement) is less than or equal to
0.005 inch (0.13 mm) for face (angularity) and rim (parallelism) readings at or near
coupling outer diameter while rotating both shafts together one full turn (360). See
Figure 4.

Foot Mounted Pumps

Dial Indicator Dial Indicator

X1

X2

A. Face check (Angularity) B. Rim Check (Parallelism)


Rotating both shafts together for one full Rotating both shafts together for one full
turn, align pump and driver until shaft turn, align pump and driver until shaft
centerlines are parallel ( = 0, X1 = X 2) centerlines coincide (Y = 0) within 0.005
inch (0.13 mm) FIM.
within 0.005 inch (0.13 mm) FIM.

Figure 4 Coupling and Hub Alignment


D.6.4 Aligning Flange Mounted Pumps and Drivers - See Figure 5

Mounting Flange

Figure 5 Flange Mounted Pump

Shaft alignment requirements for flange mounted pumps are the same as for foot mounted
pumps. That is, shafts must be aligned within 0.005 inch (0.13 mm) FIM (Full Indicator
Movement) for face (angularity) and rim (parallelism) at or near coupling outer diameter
while rotating both shafts together one full turn (360).
When a pump and driver are both flange mounted to a bracket, DO NOT assume bracket
will automatically align shafts to the above requirements. Brackets must be designed to
obtain/maintain required alignment as well as to support pump weight plus any (small)
residual piping forces without distorting. If at all possible, bracket design should include
adequate room to check shaft alignment with dial indicators with both pump and motor
mounted onto bracket. See Figure 4. If this is not possible, align bracket to driver shaft
(see Figure 6), then attach pump to bracket (assumes pump fits snugly into its mounting
bore in the bracket).
After pump-bracket-driver is installed into system and after piping is connected to pump,
shaft alignment should be re-checked and adjusted, if necessary,
When a right-angle foot bracket is used, mount pump onto bracket and tighten pump-to-
bracket mounting bolts. At this point, bracket base, in effect, becomes pump feet. Con-
tinue with aligning procedure as if pump were foot mounted. See Section D.6.3.

Driver
Flange Mounted Pumps
Mounting Bracket

Dial Indicator

A
Locating bore (A) must be concentric to driver shaft
centerline within 0.002 inch FIM. Mounting surface
(B) must be perpendicular to driver shaft centerline
within 0.002 inch (0.05 mm) FIM.

Figure 6 Alignment of Flange Mounted Pumps


CAUTION ATTENTION
Be sure all coupling set screws and bolts are tight and coupling gap is properly set.
Install safety shield(s) or plate(s) over bracket opening(s).

D.6.5 Belts and Sheaves


It is only acceptable to belt drive Imo pumps that are specifically designed for this pur-
pose. It is generally not acceptable to belt drive pumps with ratings in excess of 600 psi
differential pressure. Contact Imo if not sure a particular pump can be belt driven.
Belts and sheaves must be properly selected aligned and tensioned to minimize belt
wear, eliminate possibility of belt turnover in sheave grooves, and avoid excessive side
load on pump shaft. Adjustable slide rails mounted under driver are recommended for
proper belt tensioning.
Check belt tension frequently during first 24 to 48 hours of run-in operation. Follow belt
drive manufacturers recommendations for alignment of sheaves and belt-tension set-
tings.
CAUTION ATTENTION
Loose, slipping belts will squeal and cause overheating of sheaves leading to reduced belt
life. Excessively tightened belts will result in reduced belt and bearing life and possible
bearing or shaft failure.

D.7 PIPING AND VALVES


D7.1 General
Piping connected to pump MUST be independently supported and not allowed to
impose strains on pump casing including allowing for expansion and contraction
due to pressure and temperature changes.
To prevent foaming and air entrainment, all return lines in recirculating systems should
end well below liquid surface in reservoir. Bypass liquid from relief pressure and flow
control valves should be returned to source (tank, reservoir, etc.), NOT to pump inlet
line.
Shut-off valves should be installed in both the suction and discharge lines so pump can
be hydraulically isolated for service or removal. All new piping should be flushed clean
before connecting to pump.
CAUTION ATTENTION
Pipe strain will distort a pump. This could lead to pump and piping malfunction or failure.
Return lines piped back to pump can cause excessive temperature rise at pump which
could result in catastrophic pump failure.

D.7.2 Relief Valve


Use relief valves to protect pumps from overpressure. They need to be connected to
pump discharge lines as close to pumps as possible and with no other valving between
pumps and relief valves. Relief valve settings should be set as low as practical.

DO NOT set relief valve higher than maximum pressure rating of pump, including pres-
sure accumulation at 100% bypass. Relief valve return lines should NOT be piped into
pump inlet lines because they can produce a loop that will overheat pump. See Figure 7.
DANGER
The Imo pump is a positive displacement type. It will deliver (or attempt to deliver) flow
regardless of back-pressure on unit. Failure to provide pump overpressure protection can
cause pump or driver malfunction and/or rupture of pump and/or piping.

Relief Valve

Figure 7 Proper Relief Valve Return Line Arrangement


Some low pressure pump models include built-in safety relief valves. They are intended
only for emergency operation, NOT for system control. Extended operation of relief
valves in these pumps could lead to pump damage or failure.
D.7.3 Suction Line
The suction line should be designed so pump inlet pressure, measured at pump inlet
flange, is greater than or equal to the minimum required pump inlet pressure (also re-
ferred to as Net Positive Inlet Pressure Required or NPIPR). Suction line length should
be as short as possible and equal to or larger than pumps inlet size. All joints in suction
line must be tight and sealed. If pump cannot be located below liquid level in reservoir,
position suction line or install a foot valve so liquid cannot drain from pump while it is shut
down. See Figure 8. When pump is mounted vertically with drive shaft upward, or
mounted horizontally with inlet port opening other than facing upward, a foot valve or
liquid trap should be installed in suction line to prevent draining. The suction line should
be filled before pump start-up.
CAUTION ATTENTION
DO NOT operating pump without liquid or under severe cavitation.

Filling
Port

Filling
Port

Foot Liquid Trap


Valve

Figure 8 Fluid Trap and Foot Valve Arrangements for Vertical Pumps
D.7.4 Suction Strainer /Filter
Pump life is related to liquid cleanliness. Suction strainers or filters should be installed in
all systems to prevent entry of large contaminants into pump. See Figure 9.
The purpose of a suction strainer or filter is for basic protection of internal pumping
elements. It should be installed immediately ahead of inlet port. This location should
provide for easy cleaning or replacement of strainer element. Appropriate gages or
instrumentation should be provided to monitor pump pressure. Pressure drop across a
dirty strainer must not allow inlet pressure to fall below NPIPR. General guidelines for
strainer sizing are as follows:
When pumping relatively clean viscous liquids (over 5000 SSU), use 10 to 12 mesh
screens or those with about 1/16 inch (about 1 12 mm) openings.
When pumping relatively clean light liquids such as distillate fuels, hydraulic oil and light
lube oils, use suction strainers of 100 to 200 mesh.
When pumping heavy crude oils, use 5 to 6 mesh strainer screens or those with or about
1/8 inch (3 mm) openings.
When pumping relatively clean distillate fuels in high pressure fuel supply systems, use
25 micron absolute filters for three screw pumps and 10 micron absolute filters for
gear pumps.
Make sure size/capacity of strainer or filter is adequate to prevent having to clean or
replace elements too frequently.
CAUTION ATTENTION
Before connecting pump to system, all system piping must be thoroughly flushed to re-
move debris which accumulates during fabrication, storage, and installation. Imo pumps
should not be used for flushing. One large, hard particle may cause internal damage,
possibly requiring a pump overhaul. Pay particular attention to suction line between suc-
tion strainer and pump to be sure it is clean.

Valves
Pressure Gage Pressure Gage

Strainer

Figure 9 - Ideal Strainer Arrangement

D.7.5 System Filtration


In systems that recirculate the pumped liquid, downstream (pressure and/or return side)
filtration should be installed. Downstream filters may also be required to protect compo-
nents such as servo valves in hydraulic systems or high-pressure fuel nozzles and flow
dividers in fuel oil supply systems for gas turbines.
The systems most contamination-sensitive component determines its liquid cleanliness
requirement. For optimum Imo pump life when running on fuel oil, light lube oil, hydraulic
oil and other relatively low viscosity (thin) liquids, a high efficiency 10 micron absolute
or finer filter is recommended. This same filter rating is recommended for pumps run-
ning at extreme operating conditions and/or in harsh environments. For pumps running
on relatively clean, more viscous (thicker) liquids, filter ratings as high as 25 micron
nominal may be acceptable as long as operating conditions and the operating environ-
ment are moderate. Imo should be contacted for filtration requirements for pumps
running on very low viscosity (water thin) and low lubricity as well as for those
with an unusually large quantity of contaminants.
The system builder determines filter size (dirt holding capacity) by the amount and size
of contamination expected to be produced by system and other external contamination
sources, by allowable pressure drop across filter and by acceptable frequency for clean-
ing/replacing filter elements.

D.7.6 Outlet Piping


In general, outlet piping should be sized to accommodate the pumps flow rate while
minimizing pipe friction losses. It should also be designed to prevent gas and air pock-
ets. Piping downstream of pump should include a vent at highest point in system to allow
air to escape during priming.
D.8 SHAFT PACKING AND SEAL LEAKAGE
The pump should be installed so any leakage from shaft packing or shaft seal does not become
a hazard. Packing leakage should be about 8 to 10 drops per minute. A small amount of liquid
may also leak from mechanical or lip seals (usually less then or equal to 10 drops per hour).
Provisions should be made to collect leakage from packing or shaft seals.
WARNING DANGER
If not appropriately collected, packing leakage may make floor slippery or expose person-
nel to hazardous fluids.

D.9 QUENCHED SHAFT SEALS


Some pumps include quenched mechanical shaft seals. For these pumps, a low pressure
stream of steam, nitrogen, or clean water is supplied from an external source to atmospheric
side of seal faces.
Quenching is used in selected seal applications to:
Heat or cool seal area.
Prevent build up of coke formations by excluding oxygen.
Flush away undesirable material build-up around dynamic seal components.
When quenched mechanical seals are part of pump assembly, an appropriate quenching
stream must be supplied by user.
NOTE: Refer to pump or pump/driver outline drawing and/or specific pumps instruction manual
for quench connection size and port locations.
D.10 GAGES
Pressure and temperature gages are recommended for monitoring the pumps operating condi-
tions. These gages should be easily readable and placed as close as possible to pumps inlet
and outlet flanges. See Figure 10a.
D.11 IDEALIZED INSTALLATION FOR PUMPS LOCATED ABOVE LIQUID LEVEL
Figures 10a and 10b are compilations of Figures 7, 8 and 9 showing good-practice installation
schemes for pumps located above the liquid reservoir in systems that recirculate the pumped
liquid.
Valves

SYSTEM
Temperature Relief Valve
Filter
Gage

Filling Pressure Gages


Port
Pressure Gages

Valves
Outlet

Suction
Strainer
Temperature
Inlet Trap Gage
Reservoir

Figure 10a Vertical Mounted Pump

Filling Port
Outlet
Inlet
Same as Figure 10a

Same as Figure 10a

Seal or Package Leakage Drain Line

Figure 10b - Horizontal Mounted Pump

E. Startup, Operation and Shutdown

CAUTION ATTENTION
Operation conditions, such as speed, liquid viscosity, temperature, inlet pressure, dis-
charge pressure, filtration, duty cycle, drive type, mounting, etc., are interrelated. Due to
these variable conditions, specific application limits may be different from pumps operat-
ing and structural limits. This equipment must not be operated without verifying systems
operating requirements are within the pumps capabilities.

DANGER
Make sure all power equipment is disconnected and locked-out before proceeding.

E.1 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS


Verify electrical requirements for driver match electrical supply with respect to voltage, number
of phases and terminal connections. Also, check that driver has been wired to rotate in correct
direction.
E.2 ROTATION
Before connecting couplings, check pump rotation to be sure it matches rotation of driver. When
coupling is connected and shafts are correctly aligned, pump should turn freely by hand. Rota-
tion direction is indicated by an arrow cast on casing or by an attached plate showing a rotation
direction arrow. See Figure 11.
CAUTION ATTENTION
Operating pump in the reverse direction may cause pump damage. Make sure rotation
direction is not confused with inlet or outlet flow direction arrows.

Outlet
Arrow
Inlet
Arrow
Rotation
Arrow

Figure 11 Rotation Arrow

E.3 HYDROSTATIC TESTING THE SYSTEM


Before any system is hydrostatically tested, pump must be removed or isolated.
CAUTION ATTENTION
To prevent damage to pump, it is necessary to remove or isolate it from the system prior to
starting hydrostatic testing.

E.4 PROTECTIVE DEVICES


E.4.1 General
Automatic shutdowns, emergency switches, and similar controls should be part of pumping
system. They are generally supplied by system supplier or user.
E.4.2 Covers and Guards
Before start-up, insure all protective-covers and guards are in place.
WARNING DANGER
To protect personnel from accidental contact with rotating couplings, sheaves, belts,
shafts,keys, keyways, etc., install the following covers or guards over:
Bracket openings on flange mounted pumps.
Couplings and shafts on foot mounted pumps.
Sheaves, gears, chains, belts or other type drives.
E.4.3 Valves
Check all valves, especially those that are manually operated, to be sure they are in the
proper position. Check that there is no possibility of starting pump with a blocked suction
or discharge line.
WARNING
Starting a pump with discharge line blocked and without adequate relief protection will
cause catastrophic pump failure and possible injury to personnel.
E.5 INTERMEDIATE DRIVE LUBRICATION
Some Imo pump units include intermediate gearboxes or other devices between pump and
driver. When these devices are present, lubrication is required. Add lubricant to specified level
per device manufacturers recommendations before start-up.
E.6 HEATING JACKETS
Some pumps require heating before start-up. See Section E.12 on Thermal Shock and Operat-
ing Temperature Limits. This is usually done with steam, hot water, heat transfer fluid or electric
heat strips. Some pumps are fitted with heating jackets (sometimes called steam jackets).
Where electric heating is used, fill jacket with appropriate heat transfer fluid prior to start-up.
Unless specified otherwise, maximum permissible pressure in a heating jacket is 150 psi gage.
WARNING
Provide safeguards to prevent personnel from coming in contact with hot liquid or other
heated equipment surfaces.

E.7 QUENCHED SHAFT SEALS


When quenching fluid is hot water or steam, apply to seal at least 30 minutes prior to pump
start-up to insure seal area is thoroughly heated. When steam is used, it should be saturated at
about 4 to 7 psi gage. When quench fluid is ambient temperature nitrogen, it can be applied just
prior to pump start-up.
E.8 PUMPED LIQUIDS
NEVER operate a pump with water. The pump is designed for liquids having general character-
istics of oil. In closed or recirculating systems, check liquid level in tank before and after start-up
to be sure it is within operating limits. If initial liquid level is low, or if it drops as system fills during
start-up or pumping operations, add sufficient clean liquid to tank to bring liquid to its normal
operating level. Only use liquid recommended or approved for use with the equipment. Regular
checks should be made on the condition of the liquid. In closed systems, follow suppliers
recommendations for maintaining liquid and establishing when liquid is to be changed. Be sure
temperature is controlled so liquid can not fall below its minimum allowable viscosity which
occurs at its maximum operating temperature. Also, insure that maximum viscosity at cold
start-up does not cause pump inlet pressure to fall below its minimum required value.

CAUTION ATTENTION
NEVER operate a pump without liquid in it!
Operate only on liquids approved for use with pump.

WARNING
If not appropriately collected, packing or seal leakage may make floor slippery and/or
expose personnel to hazardous fluids.

E.9 PRIMING
Prime pump before initial start-up by pouring some of liquid to be pumped into fill point in system
or directly into pump suction port. Rotate pump slowly by hand until rotors or gears (pumping
elements) are wet and suction line is as full of liquid as possible. See Figure 12. Also, fill
mechanical seal chamber with liquid to insure seal does not start dry.
CAUTION
Dry-starting a pump is likely to cause damage to pumping elements and shaft seal.
Priming
Point

Figure 12 Priming Point


E.10 START-UP
It is suggested that the driver be started and immediately stopped (jogged) three or four times in
order to verify proper pump rotation and to insure pump is filled with liquid. Open bleed port at
high point in system and vent trapped air until a solid stream of liquid emerges (where practical).
When pump is running, check for unusual noise or vibration. Investigate any abnormalities.
Check inlet and outlet gages to see if pump is operating within its ratings. Generally, differential
pressure across pump should be at least 25 psi to insure proper pump operation.
WARNING
Precautions must be taken when venting air in system using hazardous liquids.
Provide hearing protection whenever high noise levels are expected from system com-
ponents and/or environment.
If operating temperatures exceed 140 F (60 C), measures should be taken to avoid
skin contact.
E.11 SHAFT PACKING (STUFFING BOX) LEAKAGE
Pumps with packing-type seals must be checked to insure packing gland is not too tight. Exces-
sive gland pressure on packing will cause a scored shaft, overheating and rapid breakdown of
packing. Keep gland nuts only finger tight. After new packing has been installed, gland nuts
should be tightened evenly but only tight enough to seat packing rings properly. Then, loosen
gland nuts and re-tighten finger tight. The final adjustment should allow a leakage of approxi-
mately ten drops per minute while pump is operating. This leakage is necessary to lubricate the
packing. Provide a place for safe draining and disposal of this leakage.
WARNING
If not appropriately collected, packing leakage may make floor slippery and/or expose
personnel to hazardous fluids.

E.12 THERMAL SHOCK AND OPERATING TEMPERATURE LIMITS


During pump start-up, as well as during pump operation, pump must not see a thermal shock
greater than 50 F (28 C) from liquid entering the pump. Rapid temperature changes beyond
this limit must be avoided. Unless approved by Imo, liquids entering pump inlet must not be
hotter than 225 F (107 C) nor colder than 0 F (-18 C). Most pumps also have temperature
limits of 225 F to 0 F. The maximum rate of temperature change during pump heating or
cooling should be about 1.5 F/minute (0.8 C/minute). A heated or cooled pump should be held
at its start-up temperature for at least an hour prior to start-up. This will insure uniform tempera-
ture distribution throughout pump assembly.
CAUTION ATTENTION
Never exceed minimum or maximum allowable pump or liquid temperature. Do not expose
equipment to thermal shock. Differences in metallurgy and their respective coefficients of
expansion could cause distortion of pump parts resulting in a breakdown condition. Use of
insulation and heating jacket or heat tracing to maintain pump at liquid temperature is
recommended in high temperature applications.

E.13 SHUTDOWN
If system is to be shut down for a short period, do not drain pump as this would require re-
priming at start-up. If pump is to be stored, apply a rust-inhibiting agent (one compatible with all
pump materials) to all internal and external surfaces, especially those that are machined.

F. MAINTENANCE

DANGER
BEFORE starting any maintenance procedure, do the following:
Shut off all power switches and circuit breakers.
Remove any electrical service fuses.
Lock electrical service panel supplying power to driver.
Shut, wire or chain, and lock all valves in pump inlet/outlet piping.
If applicable, shut off any steam or other fluid supply lines to pump.
F.1 FILTERS AND STRAINERS
All filter and strainer elements should be periodically checked for cleanliness and cleaned or
replaced as necessary. This will protect equipment from damage due to pressure-drop across
clogged or dirty elements.
F.2 FOUNDATION
Foundation and hold-down bolts should be checked for tightness at least every six months.
F.3 ALIGNMENT
Alignment of pump and its driver should be checked and corrected, if necessary, at least every
six months. If system experiences an unusual amount of vibrations or large variations in operat-
ing temperatures, this should be done often. Well-maintained alignment will help insure maxi-
mum equipment life.
WARNING
Rotating parts, such as couplings, pulleys, external fans, or unused shaft extensions should
be permanently guarded against accidental contact with personnel or clothing. This is
particularly important where parts have surface irregularities such as keys or set- screws.

F.4 LUBRICATION
F.4.1 Bearings
Pump environment, operating conditions and intervals between bearing checks all effect
bearing life. Bearings have a finite life and should be checked often for increase in
temperature and/or rough operation. If either condition is noted, stop equipment and
replace bearing. When grease or oil fittings are provided, lubricate bearings as specified
in applicable pump instruction manual.
CAUTION ATTENTION
Continued running with a rough or worn bearing can lead to catastrophic bearing failure
which could cause seal and/or pump failure.
F.5 PACKING
A pump should be repacked when all packing gland travel is exhausted or when packing is
damaged. Follow packing replacement instructions in applicable pump instruction manual.
F.6 SHAFT SEALS AND LEAKAGE
Visually check equipment frequently for signs of damage/leakage from shaft seals, gaskets or
O-rings. Be sure all connections are tight. If seal leakage is more than about 10 drops per hour
per seal, shut down equipment and repair or replace necessary parts. Shaft seals have a finite
life which is affected by operating conditions and environment. Expect them to wear and even-
tually fail. When leakage becomes unacceptable, replace seal unit with one compatible with
pumps operating conditions. Dirty liquids will reduce seal life.
NOTE: A very small amount of leakage (10 drops per hour per seal) is normal, even when
shaft seals are new.
NOTE: Make sure any seal leakage is disposed of properly.
WARNING
Since leakage or seal failure can be expected to eventually occur, be sure installation can
withstand this situation. Take appropriate measures if liquid is hazardous.

F.7 SPARE PARTS


Where pump out-of-service time is of vital concern, and this down time must be minimized, a set
of spare parts or repair kits should be retained on-site.
F.8 DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY
Various procedures for disassembly and reassembly apply to different pumps. Refer to the
specific pump instruction manual on how to perform these procedures.

G. FIELD AND FACTORY SERVICE AND PARTS


Imo Pump maintains a staff of trained service personnel that can provide pump installation, pump
start-up, maintenance/overhaul and troubleshooting supervision as well as installation and mainte-
nance training.

Our factories provide maintenance as well as overhaul and test facilities in the event the user prefers
to return pumps for inspection or overhaul. Pumps that have been factory-overhauled are normally
tested and warranted as-new for a period of one year from date of shipment.
For either field service or factory overhaul assistance, contact your local Imo Sales Office or repre-
sentative at the Technical/Customer Service Department in Monroe, NC, USA.
Most pumps have repair kits available. Minor Repair Kits are used to repair leaking seals, bad bear-
ings and/or for re-assembly after pump tear-down. They include (as applicable) pump shaft seals,
packing, all gaskets/O-rings and bearings. Major Repair Kits are sufficient to rebuild completely
worn-out pumps to as-new condition. They include all parts found in Minor Repair Kits plus all major
internal parts subject to wear. Since kits have all the necessary parts, it is preferred that they be
purchased rather than selecting individual parts. When parts are individually selected from the Parts
List, some needed components are often overlooked. In addition, mixing worn or used parts with new
parts risks rapid wear and shortened service life from the new parts.
H. TROUBLESHOOTING

MALFUNCTION POSSIBLE CAUSE REMEDY


System component malfunction Inspect all system components.
Correct any malfunctions. Insure that
suction and discharge lines are open
and all valves are in proper positions.
Pump not primed or vented Check reservoir oil level and fill as
required. Vent air from pump.
Low pump speed Insure driver is not overloaded. For
belt drives, insure belt not slipping. For
variable speed drivers or variable
speed intermediate devices, insure
Loss of Flow proper speed is set.
or Low Capacity Incorrect pump rotation Correct directioon of driver rotation.
Obstruction in piping Inspect all system piping and valves.
Remove any obstructions.
Wear of rotors and/or housings Replace worn rotors, gears, and/or
housing(s).
System bypass Check all system bypass valves,
including relief valve. Repair or replace
as required.
Insufficient inlet pressure Remove obstruction. Clean suction
strainer or filter element.
Suction line closed, blocked Verify suction line valve is locked open.
or leaking Inspect suction line, especially joints.
Remove any obstruction and repair any
leaks. Clean strainer or replace filter.

Loss of Suction Excessive viscosity Reduce viscosity by heating pump


and/or system liquids.
Dirty suction strainer Clean or replace strainer or filter
element.
Wrong direction of rotation Correct direection of driver rotation.
Low liquid level in reservoir Check liquid level in reservoir. Fill as
necessary.
Air in system Insure pump is vented and suction
lines are full of liquid.
Worn rotors, gears, and/or Replace worn rotors, gears, and/or
housing(s) housing(s).
Low Discharge
Pressure Obstruction in piping Inspect inlet piping and suction
valve(s). Remove any obstruction(s).
Dirty suction strainer Clean/replace suction strainer or filter
element.
System bypass problem Check all system bypass valves for
leakage, including relief valves. Repair
or replace as as required.
H. TROUBLESHOOTING (Continued)
MALFUNCTION POSSIBLE CAUSE REMEDY
Misalignment Check pump and driver alignment and
correct as required.
Restricted suction line Check suction line and remove any
obstructions.
Air in system Insure pump is vented and suction
lines are full of liquid. Check reservoir
level. Fill as necessary. Check all
lines, flanges, joints and connections
Excessive for leakage. Repair as necessary.
or
Dirty suction strainer Clean suction strainer or filter element.
Unusual Noise
or Relief valve chatter or leakage Check discharge relief valve pressure
Vibration setting. Re-adjust, repair or replace
relief valve.
Heavy internal rubbing of pump parts Verify pump and driver alignment.
Inspect pump wearing parts. Replace
as required.
Mechanical problem Check for loose or mis-positioned
coupling, bent or broken shafts, or
worn bearing. Repair or replace as
required.
Fluid contains abrasive foreign Collect samples of liquid and test for
matter foreign matter. Reduce downstream
filter ratings in re-circulating systems
(do not exceed NPIPR). If necessary,
replace liquid in re-circulating systems.
Fluid contains water Remove any water from reservoir.
Find source and prevent further
Rapid Pump Wear ingestion.
Misalignment Check pump and driver alignment.
Correct as required.
Insufficient liquid Check liquid level in reservoir and
correct as required. Remove any
suction line obstructions.
Clean/replace strainer or filter element.
Fluid more viscous than specified Heat fluid to proper viscosity and/or
design temperature.
Pump suction and/or discharge lines Insure suction and discharge lines are
closed or blocked open, and remove obstructions if
present.
Excessive Heavy internal rubbing of pump parts Verify pump and driver alignment.
Power Inspect pump wearing parts. Replace
Usage as required.
Excessive pump speed Reduce pump speed to design limits.
Mechanical problems Check for bent shaft, tight shaft
parking, or pipe strain. Repair or
replace as required.
Use QuickServe TM

for fast shipment of


TM
popular pumps
kits, and spare parts
Pump
Now, many of our most popular pumps, repair kits and spare parts are available from this Imo Pump
web site using a secure charge card (MasterCard, Visa or AMEX) ordering procedure. Available
kits are shipped freight prepaid, to any USA destination the same or next business day.

No purchase order needed


No Minimum billing
No separate invoice to process
No credit to establish
No emergency breakdown surcharge
Ship ground or air (prepaid and added)
Fast shipment of the correct parts
Order 24 hours/day, 7 days a week
Repair Kits available for over 500 Imo pump types

QuickServe
Pumps Kits Spare Parts
Series 110H/210H kits
Series 313A kits
Series 3D Pumps Series 3D kits
Order... Spare Parts
Series 3/4SIC Pumps Series 3E kits
Series 6D kits
Other kits

on the web at www.Imo-Pump.com

Imo Pump
1710 Airport Road
PO Box 5020
TM Monroe, NC USA
28111.5020
Pump tel 704.289.6511
fax 704.289.9273
Quality Management System email IMO.PUMP@COLFAXCORP.COM

1997 Imo Pump All rights reserved.


TM

INSTRUCTION MANUAL
AND
PARTS LIST
FOR
3G SERIES PUMPS
SIZES 187 THROUGH 250
(Iron Version Only)

WARNING
This Special Instruction Manual and General Instructions Manual, CA-1,
should be read thoroughly prior to pump installation, operation or
maintenance.

SRM00074 Rev. 0 (01-0228) May 02, 2001


READ THIS ENTIRE PAGE BEFORE PROCEEDING
FOR THE SAFETY OF PERSONNEL AND TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO THE EQUIPMENT,
THE FOLLOWING NOMENCLATURE HAS BEEN USED IN THIS MANUAL:

DANGER
Failure to observe the precautions noted in this box can result in severe bodily
injury or loss of life.

WARNING
Failure to observe the precautions noted in this box can cause injury to personnel
by accidental contact with the equipment or liquids. Protection should be provided
by the user to prevent accidental contact.

CAUTION ATTENTION
Failure to observe the precautions noted in this box can cause damage or failure
of the equipment.

Non compliance of safety Safety instructions where Safety instructions which


instructions identified by electrical safety is shall be considered for
the following symbol involved are identified by: reasons of safe operation
could affect safety for of the pump and/or
persons: protection of the pump
itself are marked by the
sign:
ATTENTION

CONTENTS
Safety and Table of Contents..................................................................................................... A
General Instructions ....................................................................................................................1
Pump Model Identification ...........................................................................................................1
Description of the Equipment ......................................................................................................2
Ordering Instructions...................................................................................................................2
Operation ....................................................................................................................................2
Spare Parts and Kits ...................................................................................................................3
Inspection of Parts ......................................................................................................................4
Pump Maintenance .....................................................................................................................4
Pump Disassembly Instructions ..................................................................................................4
Pump Assembly Instructions .......................................................................................................7
Troubleshooting ..........................................................................................................................7
Pump Assembly Drawings .................................................................................................. 8 - 12

ATTENTION
If operation of this pump is critical to your business, we strongly
recommend you keep a spare pump or major repair kit in stock at all times.
As a minimum, a minor repair kit (o-rings, gaskets, shaft seal and bearings)
should be kept in stock so pump refurbishment after internal inspection can
be accomplished.
A
A. GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
The instructions found herein cover the disassembly, assembly and parts identification of the 3G-187
through 250 Series, Imo pumps.
NOTE: Individual contracts may have specific provision that vary from this manual. Should any
questions arise which may not be answered by these instructions, refer to the General
Instructions Manual, CA-1, provided with your order. For further detailed information and
technical assistance please refer to Imo Pump, Technical Service Department at (704) 289-6511.
This manual cannot possibly cover every situation connected with the installation, operation, inspection
and maintenance of the equipment supplied. Every effort was made to prepare the text of the manual so
that engineering and design data is transformed into the most easily understood wording. Imo Pump must
assume the personnel assigned to operate and maintain the supplied equipment and apply this instruction
manual have sufficient technical knowledge and are experienced to apply sound safety and operational
practices which may not be otherwise covered by this manual.
WARNING
If installation, operation and maintenance instructions are not correctly and strictly followed and
observed, injury to personnel or serious damage to pump could result. Imo Pump cannot accept
responsibility for unsatisfactory performance or damage resulting from failure to comply with instructions.

B. INTRODUCTION
This instruction manual covers series 3G Imo Pumps. This series of pumps has been designed for general
use in lubricating, seal and distillate fuel oil applications. The size and construction of each pump is
identified in the model number on the pump nameplate. Definitions of model designators are identified in
Figure 1.

Figure 1 Model Designator Definitions


1
C. DESCRIPTION OF EQUIPMENT
The 3G Series pumps are positive displacement, rotary screw pumps consisting of a precision bored
housing that encloses a drive screw (power rotor) and two intermeshing driven screws (idler rotors).
These screws, when rotating, form a succession of closures or cavities. As they rotate, the fluid is moved
axially from the inlet to the outlet port in a continuous, uniform flow with minimum fluid pulsation and
pump noise.

D. ORDERING INSTRUCTIONS
To order replacement pump or parts, contact an Imo sales office or representative with pump model
number, serial number and part IDP number. This information can be found on pump nameplate and in
this manual.

E. OPERATION
LIQUID LIMITATIONS
Never operate with water. The pump is designed for liquids having the general characteristics of
lubricating oil or distillate fuel oils
OPERATING LIMITS

CAUTION ATTENTION
Operating conditions, such as speed, fluid viscosity, temperature inlet pressure,
discharge pressure, filtration, duty cycle, drive type, mounting, etc., are
interrelated. Due to these variable conditions, the specific application limits may
be different from that of the operational limitations. This equipment must not be
operated without verifying the systems operating requirements are within the
pumps capabilities.
Under no circumstances are operating and structural limits (specified in Table 1) to be exceeded
without specific approval from Imo Pump.

Table 1 Pump Operating and Structural Limits


Maximum Speed .................................... 4000 RPM for 187/200 models and 3600 RPM for 250 models.
Viscosity....................... 15000 SSU (3200 cSt) Max./ 1500 SSU (325 cst) Max. for Relief Valve models.
2.0 cst Minimum for all models
NOTE: Consult factory for allowable operating viscosity at specific speeds and pressures.
DO NOT alter design viscosity without prior consultation with Imo Pump.
Temperature ..................................................................................................0 to 225F (-18 to 107C)
Inlet Pressure........................................................................................................ 50 psig (3.4 Bar) Max.
Differential Pressure......................................................................................... 250 psig ( 17.2 Bar) Max.
Discharge Pressure............................................................................................. 300 psi (20.7 Bar) Max.
Drive ............................................................................................................................. Direct Drive Only
Filtration .......................................................................................See General Installation Manual, CA-1
Mounting ............................................................................................................ Foot or Flange Mounted
Shaft Rotation .................................................................................... Available in CW or CCW versions.
Pump is NOT bi-rotational.

2
MODELS WITH RELIEF VALVES

CAUTION ATTENTION
The optional built-in relief valve is intended for momentary protection of the pump
against overpressure. It is not intended to be a pressure or flow control device.
Continuous bypass of pumped liquid through this valve will cause the liquid to heat
up very rapidly. Excessive temperature rise will damage the pump.
The optional externally connected relief valve can be used as a pressure or flow
control device if its bypass line is piped back to the fluid tank and not the pump
inlet. The minimum and maximum relief valve set pressures are 60 psid (4.1 Bar)
and 255 psid (17.6 Bar) respectively.

DANGER
Relief valves are pre-set at the factory. DO NOT TAMPER WITH RELIEF VALVE. Tampering
with relief valve will void pump warrantee and can cause bodily injury or loss of life. If relief
valve must be adjusted, return pump to factory.

PARTS LIST TABLE TABLE 2

IDP QTY DESCRIPTION IDP QTY DESCRIPTION


1 1 Housing 13 1 Key
2 1 Inlet Cover 15 X 1 Retaining Ring
3 8 Bolt 16 X 1 Seal
4 1 Inboard Cover 26 X 1 Inlet Cover O-Ring
7 1 Shaft 31X 1 Inboard Cover O-Ring
8 2 Idler Rotor 47 1 Pipe Plug
11X 1 Ball Bearing 95 1 Pin
X = Minor Repair Kit Item

INSPECTION
The interval for inspection and replacement of worn parts varies with the properties of the pumped liquid
and can only be determined by experience. All internal parts of the 3G Series pumps are lubricated by the
pumped fluids. Pumping liquid which contains abrasive materials or liquid that is corrosive, will
significantly reduce service life and call for shorter service intervals. A worn pump will be noticeable by
excessive vibration, noise, reduction in flow output and/or reduction in system pressure.

3
PUMP MAINTENANCE
WARNING
Failure to observe precautions while installing, inspecting, and maintaining the pump can
cause injury to personnel from accidental handling, e.g.: Liquids that may harm skin or
clothing, fire hazard risks from flammable liquids, or injury from high pressure fluid jets.

DANGER
BEFORE working on equipment, be sure all power to the equipment is disconnected and
locked-out.

GENERAL COMMENTS
Part number identifiers (IDPs) contained in Table 2 and shown within parenthesis such as (8) refer to the
circled numbers shown on the assembly drawings.

NOTE: If upon disassembly, significant wear on power or idler rotors or rotor housing is found,
Imo Pump recommends replacement of the entire pump.
TOOLS REQUIRED
The procedures described in this manual require common mechanics hand tools, an arbor press, a torque
wrench and a suitable lifting device such as a sling for smaller pumps or a strap for larger models.

PUMP DISASSEMBLY SEE ASSEMBLY DRAWING, FIGURE 4


CAUTION ATTENTION
Fluid leakage from disassembly of pump may make the floor slippery
and cause personal injury.

The following steps are required before starting any maintenance action:
a) De-energize and lock out power to driver and tag power control box WARNING - Out of Service.
b) Close all inlet and outlet valves and tag valves WARNING - Out of Service.
c) Vent pressure from pump and drain pumping liquid.
d) Remove pipe fittings/flanges at pump inlet and outlet openings.
e) Remove bolts holding pump to its mounting.
f) Remove coupling hub and key (13) from power rotor (7) shaft and locate pump on a suitable
workbench.

NOTE: The 3G Series pumps incorporate highly finished precision parts that must be handled carefully to
avoid damage to critical machined surfaces. The parts removed should be tagged for identification
and their exact positions in the pump carefully noted so that new parts, or the removed parts can
be properly replaced.

CAUTION ATTENTION
When removing inboard cover (4) from pump in step 1, below, DO NOT pull out
the rotors (7 & 8) since they may drop to floor and be damaged. If rotors start to
come out, hold them in place.

4
1. Remove bolts (3) from inboard cover (4) and then remove inboard cover (4) from pump housing (1).
2. For lip seal installed pumps, remove lip seal (16) and O-ring (31) from inboard cover (4). For
mechanical seal installed pumps, remove stationary seat of seal (16) and O-ring (31) from inboard
cover (4).
CAUTION ATTENTION
In next step, the rotors will be removed from the pump. They will come out as a
unit. Use care to support the rotors set as it is withdrawn from the housing so the
idlers will not be dropped on the floor.

3. Remove power rotor (7) and idlers (8) by grasping shaft of power rotor and easing it out of housing
(1). Set idlers (8) aside.
4. For mechanical seal pumps, perform the following:
a) For Elastomeric Bellows Type Seals (see Figure 2 below) Slide rotating assembly (3) of
mechanical seal (16) off power rotor (7).
b) For Metal Bellows Type Seals (see Figure 3 below) Loosen set screw (3F) and slide rotating
assembly (3) from power rotor (7).

NOTE: IF ONLY REPLACING SEALS, pump disassembly is complete. For lip seal installation,
proceed to Pump Reassembly and complete steps 3, 4, 8 through 11 and 13 through 16.
For mechanical seal installation, complete steps 3, 5 through 10 and 12 through 16. If
remainder of pump needs to be disassembled, proceed below.
5. Remove ball bearing (11) from power rotor (7) by first removing the retaining ring (15) from the
groove in the power rotor (7) shaft. The ball bearing (11) can then be removed with a gear puller or
arbor press.
CAUTION ATTENTION
Removal of bearing by force applied to its outer ring could damage bearing.

NOTE: Imo Pump strongly recommends replacement of the ball bearing every time the bearing is
pressed off the power rotor.
6. Remove inlet cover (2) by removing four bolts (3).
7. Remove O-ring (26) from inlet head (2).
5
PUMP REASSEMBLY SEE ASSEMBLY DRAWING FIGURE 4

NOTE: Prior to pump assembly, all parts should be cleaned and inspected for nicks, burrs or
gouges. When ready for assembly, wipe all parts, including bolts, O-rings and seal
faces with clean, lubricating oil or pumped product, if applicable.

CAUTION ATTENTION
Bearing service life could be significantly reduced if the bearing is pushed on by its
outer race.

1. Install ball bearing (11) onto shaft (7) using an arbor press and sleeve by pushing on ball bearing
(11) inner race only until ball bearing (11) is positioned against shoulder on power rotor (7).
2. Install retaining ring (15) in groove in power rotor (7).
3. Before installing seal (16), insure power rotor (7) shaft is clean and has no burrs or sharp edges.
4. If pump has a lip seal (16), install lip seal into outboard cover (4) and skip to step 7 below.
Note: Seal Lip is graphite impregnated Teflon and should not be lubricated when installed.).
5. If pump has mechanical seal (16), apply clean lubricating oil to rotor shaft at seal diameter.
a. If seal has elastomeric rubber bellows, (see figure 2), apply light film of oil to bore of bellows
and install rotating assembly (3) on power rotor (7) shaft with a twisting motion by pushing on
seal retainer only with fingers. Do not touch carbon face with fingers. Clean carbon face of seal
with alcohol and lint free cloth. Apply light film of clean lubricating oil to carbon face.
b. If seal is metal bellows type, (see figure 3), apply a light film of oil to rotating seat O-ring of
seal and slide rotating assembly (3) on power rotor shaft (7). Tighten setscrew (3F). Do not
touch carbon seal face with fingers. Clean carbon face of seal with alcohol and lint free cloth.
Apply light film of clean lubricating oil to carbon face.
6. Apply light film of clean lubricating oil on seat and O-ring of stationary seat (3B) of mechanical seal
(16). Install stationary seat (3B) into bore in inboard cover (4) with fingers (do not touch seal face
with any tools) so slot in face of seal is facing into inboard cover (4). Be sure stationary seat (3B) is
all the way to bottom of the bore in inboard cover (4) and slot in seal mates up to pin (95) in inboard
cover (4).
7. Clean stationary seat of mechanical seal (16) in inboard cover (4) with alcohol and soft, lint free
cloth, and apply light film of clean lubricating oil to carbon face.
8. Mesh the two idler rotors (8) and power rotor (7) together into a rotor assembly making sure idler
rotors and balance piston are properly engaged.
9. Install rotors by positioning pump housing in a vertical position and sliding rotor assembly into
housing bore (1) until ball bearing (11) bottoms out in housing bore.
10. Install O-ring (31) in groove in inboard cover (4).
11. If pump has lip seal (16), install seal installation tool (see figure 8) on coupling end of power rotor (7).
Then, carefully install inboard cover (4) on housing being sure that inboard cover (4) is kept square
with power rotor shaft and inner lip seal lip (16) does not roll under as cover (4) is installed

CAUTION ATTENTION
Failure to use seal installation tool (see Figure 8) on lip seal units is likely to result
in improper lip seal installation.

6
12. If pump has mechanical seal, install inboard cover (4) on housing (1) without seal installation tool.
CAUTION ATTENTION
To maximize seal life, seal vent in cover must be oriented at 12:00
o'clock when pump is horizontally mounted in its installed position.
Vent orientation is not critical when unit is vertically mounted.
13. Install the four bolts (3) into inboard cover (4) and thread bolts into housing (1). Torque bolts to
values shown on assembly drawing.
14. Install O-ring (31) in groove in inlet head (2).
15. Install inlet head (2) onto housing (1) with cap screws (3).
16. Installing key (13) into power rotor (7) keyway and coupling on shaft (7).
17. On pumps with external relief valves, install relief valve using cap screws (5) and O-ring (10). See
figure 8. Relief valve can be installed in original position or facing 180 from original position.

INSTALLATION, ALIGNMENT AND TROUBLESHOOTING


Install coupling to driver shaft and align pump and driver as detailed in the Installation Manual, CA-1.

After pump is connected to piping and inlet and outlet valves are open, be sure to vent air from seal
chamber before starting pump by opening pipe plug at inboard end of pump until oil comes out. This will
assure that seals are lubricated at startup.
For detailed instructions regarding installation, alignment, operation and trouble shooting, see General
Installation, Operation, Maintenance & Troubleshooting Manual, CA-1.

FIELD AND FACTORY SERVICE AND PARTS

Imo Pump maintains a staff of trained service personnel that can provide pump installation, pump start-up,
maintenance/overhaul and troubleshooting supervision as well as installation and maintenance training.
Our factories provide maintenance as well as overhaul and test facilities in the event the user prefers to
return pumps for inspection or overhaul. Pumps that have been factory-overhauled are normally tested
and warranted as-new for a period of one year from date of shipment.
For either field service or factory overhaul assistance, contact your local Imo Sales Office or
representative at the Technical/Customer Service Department in Monroe, NC, USA.
Most pumps have minor repair kits available. Minor Repair Kits are used to repair leaking seals, bad
bearings and/or for re-assembly after pump tear-down. They include (as applicable) pump shaft seals,
packing, all gaskets/O-rings and bearings. Since kits have all the necessary parts, it is preferred that they
be purchased rather than selecting individual parts. When parts are individually selected from the Parts
List, some needed components are often overlooked. In addition, mixing worn or used parts with new
parts risks rapid wear and shortened service life from the new parts.

7
Figure 4 Pump Assembly Drawing

8
A MEMBER OF THE
COLFAX PUMP GROUP
Imo Pump
1710 Airport Road
PO Box 5020
Monroe, NC USA
28111.5020
tel 704.289.6511
fax 704.289.9273
email Imo.Pump@ColfaxCorp.com
web WWW.IMO-PUMP.COM

2001 Imo Pump All rights reserved.


Flexible Drive Couplings

INDEX:
Magnaloy Coupling
DesignFeatures..............2
Load Lock Design.................................2
Radial Lug Design.................................2
Lug Design Comparisons....................2

Premiium Flexible
Drive Couplings...........2
Performance Specifications................3
Dimension Specifications....................4
Standard Bore & Keyway
Combinations.........................................5
Bore Tolerances.....................................5
Additional Specifications.....................5
Splined Couplings.................................6
Clamp Type Couplings.........................6
Steel Bushed Couplings.......................6
Splined Coupling
Specifications.........................................7
Clamp Type Coupling
Specifications.........................................7
Insert Selection Guide..........................8
Service Factors & Load
Characteristics.......................................9
Selection Method..................................9
Installation...........................................10
Recommended Torques
for Fasteners........................................11
Mis-Alignment
Capabilities..........................................11
Technical Bulletin
& Notes.................................................12

PM 90
Coupling ........................13
Drive Lug Features.............................13
Performance Specifications.............14
Dimensional Specifications.............14
Bore Tolerances..................................14
Bore & Keyway Combinations........15
Insert Materials...................................15

Other Magnaloy
Products...........................16

magnaloy coupling company P.O. Box 455 Alpena, MI 49707 989-356-2186 1


A Division of Douville Johnston Corporation Fax: 989-354-4190 http://www.magnaloy.com
Magnaloy Coupling Design Features

Load-Lock Design is simple and effective. The drive-lug


configuration is tapered from top to base, as are the mating
lugs of the opposing coupling hub. Under load, the insert
conforms to the tapers, inter-locking the two hubs. This load-
lock design protects bearings and equipment by eliminating
end thrust in both directions... and it requires only one
set-screw in each hub.

Radial Lug Design is logical and efficient. The most common failure of an
elastomeric insert type drive coupling is hysteresis failure of the elastomeric
element - breakdown of the elastomer due to cyclical overworking
and associated heat generation. Magnaloy Couplings drive lugs
are in a true radial orientation. Applied forces are evenly distributed
in the compressive direction only, eliminating the heat generating
radial component. True compressive loading reduces internal heat
generation and improves elastomer life.

F
MAGNALOY COUPLING DESIGN
F Under loaded conditions, the resultant forces applied
on the element segments are evenly distributed in the
compressive direction only. This results in no radial
F forces to multiply the internal heat generation.
F

Fc Fr CONVENTIONAL DESIGN A
F Under loaded conditions this jaw design results in the
applied forces exerting components in the compressive
and radical directions. These forces change direction
and magnitude along the jaw arc which greatly increase
F the internal movement of the element which causes heat
Fc generation.
Fr

Fc
CONVENTIONAL DESIGN B
Fr
This more conventional straight sided jaw design also
F exerts component forces in the compressive and radial
directions when under load. The radial component is
outward (acting to extrude the element) and changes
Fc in magnitude only, as does the compressive component,
along the jaw surface. The component forces resulting
F
Fr from this design also causes increased internal
movement in the element.

magnaloy coupling company P.O. Box 455 Alpena, MI 49707 989-356-2186 2


A Division of Douville Johnston Corporation Fax: 989-354-4190 http://www.magnaloy.com
Magnaloy is a registered trademark of the Douville Johnston Corp.
Premium Flexible Drive Couplings

Magnaloy is the original lightweight, heavy-duty


flexible drive coupling. Light weight magnesium
construction makes Magnaloy couplings 76% lighter
than cast iron and 36% lighter than aluminum units...
and theyre stronger than either!
The benefits are many... Reduced loads on
bearings, shafts and pumps, for longer component
life. Easier handling and installation. Rust proof and
corrosion resistant.
Magnaloys close machining tolerances
(TIR of .002) assures vibration - free operation and
easy, accurate alignment without need for special
tools. Solid magnesium alloy permanent mold
castings are heat treated and offer the highest
strength-to-weight ratio available.

Coupling Performance Specifications


Rated Torsional Horse Power Rating@
Coupling Maximum Wr2 Insert Torque Rigidity 100 1200 1800
Model Bore lb.- ft2. Number lb.- in. lb-in/Deg rpm rpm rpm
170N 340.7 42 .55 6.5 9.8
100 1-1/8 .0046 170U 511.0 53 .82 9.8 14.7
170H 1,022.1 182 1.65 19.8 29.7
270N 398.3 55 .64 7.6 11.5
200 1-3/8 .0068 270U 597.4 68 .96 11.5 17.2
270H 1,194.9 234 1.92 23.0 34.5
370N 701.4 81 1.12 13.5 20.2
300 1-5/8 .022 370U 1,052.1 148 1.68 20.2 30.3
370H 2,104.2 336 3.36 40.4 60.6
470N 1,056.3 138 1.69 20.3 30.4
400 1-7/8 .031 470U 1,584.5 310 2.5 30.4 45.6
470H 3,168.9 488 5.1 60.8 91.3
570N 2,194.8 314 3.5 42.1 63.2
500 2-3/8 .071 570U 3,292.2 695 5.3 63.2 94.8
570H 6,584.4 1,571 10.5 126.4 189.6
670N 4,946.7 676 7.9 94.9 142.5
600 2-5/8 .16 670U 7,420.1 1,510 11.9 142.5 213.7
670H 14,840.1 2,960 23.7 284.9 427.4
770N 11,639.8 1,805 18.6 223.5 335.2
700 2-7/8 .34 770U 17,459.7 2,104 27.9 335.2 502.8
770H 29,099.5 - 46.5 558.75 838.0
870N 21,889.4 3,680 35.0 420.3 630.4
800 3-7/8 .95 870U 32,834.1 - 52.5 630.4 945.6
870H 47,062.2 - 75.2 903.0 1,354.5
970N 47,842.3 8,428 76.5 918.6 1,377.9
900 4-3/4 4.20
970U 71,763.5 - 114.8 1,377.9 2,066.8

magnaloy coupling company P.O. Box 455 Alpena, MI 49707 989-356-2186 3


A Division of Douville Johnston Corporation Fax: 989-354-4190 http://www.magnaloy.com
Dimensional Specifications
Magnaloy Coupling Dimensional Specifications
X
Models 100, 200, 300, 400 T W
100 200 300 400
A 2.54 3.10 3.58 4.24
B 2.600 2.900 3.450 3.980
C 2.00 2.25 2.90 3.05
D 0.56 0.68 0.78 1.00
E 0.68 0.84 0.96 1.06 C B
F 0.42 0.42 0.44 0.54
G 0.31 0.43 0.56 0.73
W 1/16 1/16 1/16 1/16
X 0.90 0.90 0.98 1.20
T 1/4-20 5/16-18 5/16-18 3/8-16

D E F G
TOLERANCES: 2 Place Decimals + .01
3 Place Decimals + .001 A

X
Model 500 T W
500
A 4.67
B 4.800
C 4.00 X*: Maximum Space between
D 1.04 shaft ends to allow full
E 1.23
shaft engagement
in Hub Bore.
CB
F 0.64
G 0.70 Y*: Minimum spacing
between shaft ends.
W 1/16
X 1.41
T 3/8-16
* Given for reference only.
TOLERANCES: 2 Place Decimals + .01
D E F G
3 Place Decimals + .001 A
X
Models 600, 700, 800, 900 T W
600 700 800 900
A 5.98 6.99 7.99 10.15
B 5.975 6.900 8.600 11.400
C 4.50 5.19 7.00 8.30
D 1.60 2.08 2.25 2.75
E 1.33 1.32 1.62 2.20 C B
F 0.62 0.89 1.00 1.32
G 1.13 1.13 1.58 1.88
W 1/16 1/16 1/16 1/16
X 1.36 1.97 2.25 2.89
T 3/8-16 1/2-13 1/2-13 3/4-10

TOLERANCES: 2 Place Decimals + .01 D E F G


3 Place Decimals + .001 A

magnaloy coupling company P.O. Box 455 Alpena, MI 49707 989-356-2186 4


A Division of Douville Johnston Corporation Fax: 989-354-4190 http://www.magnaloy.com
Bore & Keyway Combinations

Standard Bore and Keyway Combinations


Magnaloy Standard Bore & Key Combinations Magnaloy Standard Bore & Key Combinations
Model Bore/Key Model Model Bore/Key Model

100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800

100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
900
Code Code Bore Key Code Code Bore Key
M __ __ __ 01203 3/8 x 3/32 M __ __ __ 12414 1 3/4 x 7/16
M __ __ __ 01403 7/16 x 3/32 M __ __ __ 12816 1 7/8 x 1/2
M __ __ __ 01404 7/16 x 1/8 M __ __ __ 13016 1 15/16 x 1/2
M __ __ __ 01604 1/2 x 1/8 M __ __ __ 20016 2 x 1/2
M __ __ __ 01804 9/16 x 1/8 M __ __ __ 20416 2 1/8 x 1/2
M __ __ __ 02005 5/8 x 5/32 M __ __ __ 20816 2 1/4 x 1/2
M __ __ __ 02006 5/8 x 3/16 M __ __ __ 21220 2 3/8 x 5/8
M __ __ __ 02206 11/16 x 3/16 M __ __ __ 21620 2 1/2 x 5/8
M __ __ __ 02404 3/4 x 1/8 M __ __ __ 22020 2 5/8 x 5/8
M __ __ __ 02406 3/4 x 3/16 M __ __ __ 22420 2 3/4 x 5/8
M __ __ __ 02806 7/8 x 3/16 M __ __ __ 22824 2 7/8 x 3/4
M __ __ __ 02808 7/8 x 1/4 M __ __ __ 30024 3 x 3/4
M __ __ __ 03008 15/16 x 1/4 M __ __ __ 30824 3 1/4 x 3/4
M __ __ __ 10006 1 x 3/16 M __ __ __ 31228 3 3/8 x 7/8
M __ __ __ 10008 1 x 1/4 M __ __ __ 31628 3 1/2 x 7/8
M __ __ __ 10408 1 1/8 x 1/4 M __ __ __ 32028 3 5/8 x 7/8
M __ __ __ 10608 1 3/16 x 1/4 M __ __ __ 32428 3 3/4 x 7/8
M __ __ __ 10808 1 1/4 x 1/4 M __ __ __ 32832 3 7/8 x 1
M __ __ __ 10810 1 1/4 x 5/16 M __ __ __ 40032 4 x 1
M __ __ __ 11210 1 3/8 x 5/16 M __ __ __ 40432 4 1/8 x 1
M __ __ __ 11212 1 3/8 x 3/8 M __ __ __ 40832 4 1/4 x 1
M __ __ __ 11412 1 7/16 x 3/8 M __ __ __ 41232 4 3/8 x 1
M __ __ __ 11610 1 1/2 x 5/16 M __ __ __ 41632 4 1/2 x 1
M __ __ __ 11612 1 1/2 x 3/8 M __ __ __ 41640 4 1/2 x 1 1/4
M __ __ __ 12012 1 5/8 x 3/8 M __ __ __ 42040 4 5/8 x 1 1/4
M __ __ __ 12412 1 3/4 x 3/8 M __ __ __ 42440 4 3/4 x 1 1/4
Shaded Area: AGMA semi-standard bore key combinations.
Bore Tolerances
Part Number Usage: Magnaloy Coupling Hub part numbers Over Include Tolerance
may be specified using the following format: Start with let- -- 1 +.0008/ +.0003
ter M designating Magnaloy, followed by 3 digit Model 1 2 +.0013/ +.0005
2 3 +.0018/ +.0008
Code (100, 200, etc.), then the specific 5 digit Bore Key 3 4 +.0020/ +.0010
Code. 4 5 +.0023/ +.0010

Example: Model 500 hub with a 1 3/8 bore and 5/16 key-
way would be specified as: M50011210 - No bore hubs are
designated as R code, ie: M500R.

Additional Coupling Specifications


Model Number 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900
Maximum Bore 1-1/8 1-3/8 1-5/8 1-7/8 2-3/8 2-5/8 2-7/8 3-7/8 4-3/4
Complete Coupling Approx. Wght. 3/4 1 2 3 4 7 12 18 38
(Solid Hub)

Number of Drive Lugs 3 3 3 3 4 6 6 6 6


Hub Movement for Insert Removal .74 .74 .75 .98 1.12 1.02 1.50 1.63 2.27
Basic Insert Number 170 270 370 470 570 670 770 870 970

magnaloy coupling company P.O. Box 455 Alpena, MI 49707 989-356-2186 5


A Division of Douville Johnston Corporation Fax: 989-354-4190 http://www.magnaloy.com
Splined Couplings

Magnaloy couplings are available with a variety


of special features which include splined bores.
The Splined Coupling Specifications chart on
page 7 shows several in-house splines available
for quick delivery. Many additional splined bores
are available upon contacting the factory, including
straight side PTO type splines and metric splines.

The Clamp-Type Coupling utilizes the basic Magnaloy


coupling with the addition of the clamp feature.
Developed to compensate for variations in spline
formation methods and tolerances. Assures centering
of the coupling and positive retention on the shaft.
The clamp feature is suggested for all splined couplings,
but is also available in smooth bored and keyed models.

Magnaloys Steel Bushed Splined Bore* Coupling


combines all the design and lightweight features of the
Magnaloy Coupling with the added spline tooth strength and
wear resistance of steel. Under normal conditions the stan-
dard Splined Bore coupling will perform satisfactorily and
the addition of the Clamp Feature compensates for various
fit conditions. When heavy cyclic loads, reverse loading and
high torque loads exist in combination with fit variations,
spline tooth failures and fretting can be corrected by utilizing
Magnaloys steel bushed coupling. Of course, to achieve
optimum benefits, Magnaloys clamp feature is
recommended - assuring accurate centering and positive
retention of the coupling on the shaft.
*Although the steel bushing feature was designed primarily
for spline bores, it is also available smooth bored and keyed.

magnaloy coupling company P.O. Box 455 Alpena, MI 49707 989-356-2186 6


A Division of Douville Johnston Corporation Fax: 989-354-4190 http://www.magnaloy.com
Spline & Clamp Specifications

Splined Coupling Specifications


Spline Size Pressure Major Std. Coupling Steel Bushed Coupling
Number Spline Angle SAE Diameter Available Bushing Available
of Teeth Pitch Code (Degrees) Design (Inches) Model Sizes O Model Sizes
o
9 16/32 0916 30 A .625 100-900 1.250 200-900
o
13 8/16 1308 30 D,E 1.750 400-900 2.625 600-900
o
13 16/32 1316 30 B .875 100-900 1.500 300-900
o
14 12/24 1412 30 C 1.250 200-900 2.250 500-900
o
15 8/16 1508 30 F 2.000 500-900 3.500 800-900
o
15 16/32 1516 30 BB 1.000 100-900 1.750 400-900
o
17 12/24 1712 30 CC 1.500 300-900 2.250 500-900
o
21 16/32 2116 30 1.375 300-900 2.250 500-900
o
23 16/32 2316 30 1.500 300-900 2.250* 500-900
o
27 16/32 2716 30 1.750 400-900 2.625 600-900
o
40 16/32 4016 30 2.562 600-900 3.875 800-900

*NOTE: With Model 600-900 Bushing O.D. is 2.625


Spline Type Identifier Code -- A = Spline B = Steel Bushing Spline C = Clamp Type

Part Number Usage: Magnaloy Splined Coupling part numbers may be specified using the
following format: Start with letter M designating Magnaloy, follow with 3 digit model code
(100, 200, etc.), next use single letter Spline Type Identifier Code (A for regular spline or B
for steel bushing) then the specific 4 digit spline code.
If a clamp type coupling is specified - use the letter code C after the spline code.
Example: Model 300 hub with 13 tooth 16/32 splined bore, M300A1316; same as above with
steel bushing, M300B1316; same as above with steel bushing and clamp, M300B1316C.

Clamp Type Coupling Specifications Optional


Clamp Bolt
Coupling Bolt Location U Z U
Model Z Y Bolt Size Torque Spec.
100 .31 .68 1/4-20 130-140 in. lbs.
200 .43 .75 1/4-20 130-140 in. lbs. Y
300 .47 .95 5/16-18 210-220 in. lbs.
400 .69 1.06 5/16-18 210-220 in. lbs.
500 .72 1.25 3/8-16 300-310 in. lbs.
600 1.13 1.50 7/16-14 35-36 ft. lbs.
700 1.13 1.75 7/16-14 35-36 ft. lbs.
800 1.44 2.56 1/2-13 49-50 ft. lbs.
900* .75 & 2.19 3.00 3/4-10 100-110 ft. lbs. Optional
Steel Bushing Bushing
* Model 900 utilizes two bolt clamp design. O

magnaloy coupling company P.O. Box 455 Alpena, MI 49707 989-356-2186 7


A Division of Douville Johnston Corporation Fax: 989-354-4190 http://www.magnaloy.com
Insert Selection Guide

Magnaloy Couplings full range of flexible inserts


permit custom design performance for a wide range
of applications. All insert materials offer complete
electrical insulation, as Magnaloys design elimi-
nates all metal-to-metal contact.

Neoprene (Code N) - Black material -


Standard material with Magnaloy Coupling.
Good general purpose material offering good
resiliency
o
and
o
load
o
capabilities.
o
Temp range -
30 F to +250 F (-34 C to =121 C) optional 80A
durometer (painted gold) and 90A durometer
(painted silver) are available for slight
increased load capability and less resiliency.
Nitrile (Buna N) (Code B) - Painted blue -
Excellent material with petroleum products.
Excellent compression set and abrasion o
resistance
o o
characteristics.
o
Temp range -60 F to
+250 F (-51 C to +121 C).
Urethane (Code U) - Yellow
Excellent mechanical and physical
properties. Offers good medium duty
durability and resiliency. Urethane tends to
soften in higher temperatureso
ando humid con-
ditions.
o
Temp o
Range -30 F to +150 F
(-34 C to +66 C).
Part Number Usage: Magnaloy Coupling Viton (Fluorocarbon) (Code V) - Red material -
Insert part numbers may be specified using Excellent fluid compatibility and high
the following format: Start with letter M temperature characteristics. Good
designating Magnaloy followed by 3 digit compression
o o
set and
o
resiliency.
o
Temp range -
20 F to +350 F (-29 C to +177 C).
insert model size (170, 270, etc.) then the
specific material code letter. If an optional Hytrel (Code H) - Blue-green material - Superior
durometer is being specified, after the physical and mechanical properties and
material code letter supply the durometer excellent fluid compatibility and high temper-
number divided by 10. ature characteristics. Hardness (50D)
EXAMPLES: Urethane insert for Model 300, M370U; approaches that of plastic and offers little
80 Duro Neoprene for Model 200, M270N8. resiliency. Excellent performanceo under heavy
o
dutyo conditions.
o
Temp range -65 F to +300 F
(-54 C to +149 C).
Other materials are available for special applications.
Consult factory for recommendations and availability.

magnaloy coupling company P.O. Box 455 Alpena, MI 49707 989-356-2186 8


A Division of Douville Johnston Corporation Fax: 989-354-4190 http://www.magnaloy.com
Insert Selection Guide
Service Factors - Load Characteristics
Type of Prime Mover
Load Standard Motor High Torque I.C. Engine I.C. Engine
Classification or Turbine Motor 6 or more cyl. less than 6 cyl.
Uniform (U) 1.0 1.5 1.5 2.0*
Moderate (M) 1.5 2.0 2.0* 2.5*
Heavy (H) 2.0* 2.5* 2.5* 3.0*

Uniform Load: Steady loading, non-reversing, torque does not exceed rating.
Moderate Load: Uneven loading with moderate shock, frequent starts,
infrequent reversals, peak torque may exceed average rate of prime
mover by 125%.
Heavy Load: Uneven loading with heavy shock, frequent reversals, peak
torque may exceed average rating of prime mover by 150%.
*Recommend use of Urethane or Hytrel Insert.

Drive Unit Load Sym. Selection Method


Agitators U 1. Several specifics must be considered to make the best
Blowers U choice of couplings:
Compressors Centrifugal U
Rotary M A. Type of prime mover and load characteristics
Reciprocating H* (see table above).
Conveyors U B. Shaft diameter and key size or spline configuration
Reciprocating M
Screw M (No. of teeth, pitch ratio, pressure angle).
Shaker H C. Horsepower rating of loads to be transmitted.
Cranes & Hoists M D. Maximum operating speed (rpm).
Crushers H* E. Maximum operating misalignment.
Elevators M
Freight & Pass. H* F. Clearance limitations.
Fans Centrifugal U 2. Calculate effective hp/100 rpm by use of table above
Propeller M and select the minimum size couplings recommended.
Cooling Tower H
3. VERIFY YOUR SELECTION:
Generators U
Welding H A. Check for maximum bore size.
Mills H* B. Check dimensions for adequate clearance.
Machine Tools M C. Indicate any special insert specification and/or
Mixers M coupling coating for environmental protection, if
Paper Mill Machinery M
required.
Pumps Centrifugal U
Rotary M Equation: Effective HP per 100 RPM = rated HP x Service
Reciprocating H* Factor x 100/RPM
On Injection H*
Molding Equip. Example: 150 HP 4 cyl. Diesel Engine Driving
Screens Air & Water U Reciprocating Irrigation Pump operating
Washing at 3250 RPM
Freight & Pass. H
Service Factor = 3.0 (Hytrel Insert recommended)
Stokers U
Textile Machinery M Eff. HP per 100 RPM = 150 HP x 3.0 x 100/3250
Woodworking Machinery M RPM = 13.85 HP/100 RPM Model 600 rating with
Winches H* Hytrel Insert is 23.7 HP/100 RPM
NOTE: Above service factors are intended for use as a general guide only.
* Recommend use of Steel Bushing and Clamp with Splined Bores.

magnaloy coupling company P.O. Box 455 Alpena, MI 49707 989-356-2186 9


A Division of Douville Johnston Corporation Fax: 989-354-4190 http://www.magnaloy.com
Installation Instructions

Shaft spacing should be within range given by


dimensions W and X as shown in charts on page 4.
Position each hub on proper size shaft - Magnaloy
couplings are bored to standard push fit tolerances,
if a tight fit exists check shaft for burrs.
Maximum benefits are obtained with hubs posi-
tioned to allow complete shaft engagement within
bore. However, some equipment designs do not
permit this condition - maximum shaft engagement
should be utilized in any case.

Alignment - Place a straight edge (scale) at top


and side of coupling. Use a .005 inch feeler gauge
under scale for final inspection. This will indicate
accurate parallel and angular alignment.
Magnaloys precision tooled outside surfaces
permit this simple, but accurate alignment method.

Secure equipment mounts and recheck alignment


for movement.
Install the insert in the coupling positioning hubs in
contact with lip around outside of insert.
Before tightening set screws, run the coupling and
check for separation of hubs or creep . Recheck
alignment and tighten set screws.
With the Steel Bushed/Clamp type couplings, to
facilitate installation on the shaft, it may be necessary
to slightly loosen the set-screw over the keystock.
When securing the coupling to the shaft, first tighten
the clamp bolt, then tighten the set--screw against
the keystock.

magnaloy coupling company P.O. Box 455 Alpena, MI 49707 989-356-2186 10


A Division of Douville Johnston Corporation Fax: 989-354-4190 http://www.magnaloy.com
Mis-Alignment Capabilities

Magnaloy couplings offer four-way flexibility (parallel,


angular, axial and torsional) and require no lubrica-
tion. They are easily installed and properly aligned
without use of special tools or equipment - a straight
edge and hex wrench are the only tools required.
Magnaloys insert reduces noise and vibration and
permits needed flexibility for proper operation within
alignment capabilities.
Recommended Torques
for Fasteners
Model Set Screw Clamp Screw
100 60-70 in. lbs. 130-140 in. lbs.
200 130-140 in. lbs. 130-140 in. lbs.
300 130-140 in. lbs. 210-220 in. lbs.
400 190-200 in. lbs. 210-220 in. lbs.
500 190-200 in. lbs. 300-310 in. lbs.
600 190-200 in. lbs. 35-36 ft. lbs.
700 300-310 in. lbs. 35-36 ft. lbs.
800 300-310 in. lbs. 49-50 ft. lbs.
900 100-110 ft. lbs. 100-110 ft. lbs.
Intended as a general guide for fastener torques
with Magnaloy Couplings.

Perfect alignment of equipment shafts, in most cases, is impractical to obtain or maintain,


and misaligned equipment produces excess stress on bearings and coupling. Magnaloys
insert design will accept misalignment strain and, when excessive, will cause insert wear as
a visual and audible indication of misalignment problems. However, Magnaloys inserts are
inexpensive and easily replaced; under normal conditions the insert seldom requires
replacement.

Maximum
1o Angular
Mis-Alignment
Mis-Alignment
Capabilities

Maximum
.015 in. Parallel
Mis-Alignment

magnaloy coupling company P.O. Box 455 Alpena, MI 49707 989-356-2186 11


A Division of Douville Johnston Corporation Fax: 989-354-4190 http://www.magnaloy.com
Technical Bulletin & Notes
Keystock Interference with Drive Lug
Since the Magnaloy Coupling keyway in a bored and keyed hub is broached between the
drive lugs, there is a potential for interference with the keystock of the drive lugs and the
driver lugs of the driven hub. Interference will result when ALL the following conditions exist:
A) The shaft diameter is GREATER than listed below.
B) T h i s shaft extends into the hub insert core area.
C) The keystock on this shaft extends with the shaft.
The interference condition can be corrected by shortening the keystock so it does not
extend into the coupling hub insert core area.
Interference Potential exists when
shaft diameters are greater than Area of Interference Cut Keystock even
shown in this chart with this Surface

Model Size Shaft Diameter Key Size


100 7/8 1/4
200 1 - 3/16 1/4
300 1 - 5/16 5/16
400 1 - 1/2 3/8
500 1 - 15/16 1/2
600 2 - 1/2 5/8
700 2 - 3/4 5/8
800 3 - 1/2 7/8
900 4 - 1/2 1 - 1/4

Failure to correct this condition will result in assembly difficulty and could cause damage
to the drive or driven equipment.

Notes

magnaloy coupling company P.O. Box 455 Alpena, MI 49707 989-356-2186 12


A Division of Douville Johnston Corporation Fax: 989-354-4190 http://www.magnaloy.com
Powdered Metal PM90 Couplings

The Strong, High Quality, Low Cost, Powdered Metal Coupling from Magnaloy
When your priorities for a coupling are economy and strength...
specify the all-new Magnaloy Type PM 90.
The PM 90 is made from high-density powdered metal
and is available in standard bores up to 1 1/8 inch
maximum. Double set screws are standard in all bores
1/2 inch and over. The set screws are placed over the
keyway and at a 45o angle to the keyway to allow
greater hoop-stress generation and maximum shaft
gripping. The increased drive lug surface area on the
PM 90 provides low unit loads on insert drive elements
while insuring more rapid heat dissipation. Magnaloys
exclusive insert design allows easy installation and replacement
without hub removal. The drive lug design provides even compressive
loading with no radial loading of insert drive elements

It is a well established fact that the major cause of failure in an elastomeric insert type drive
coupling is hysteresis failure which results from overworking the insert by application of
cyclic loads and the associated heat generation. These cyclic loads can be internal in ori-
gin as a result of coupling design (see page 2) and when coupled with externally applied
loads can greatly reduce elastomer life. Specifying Magnaloys Type PM Coupling with
radial designed drive lugs results in true compressive loads and improved insert life.

magnaloy coupling company P.O. Box 455 Alpena, MI 49707 989-356-2186 13


A Division of Douville Johnston Corporation Fax: 989-354-4190 http://www.magnaloy.com
PM 90 Specifications
Model PM 90 Performance Specifications
Torque Torsional Complete Coupling Wr2
Maximum Minimum Insert Rating HP Rating Rigidity Approx. Weight (lb) (lb. Ft.2)
Bore Bore Number (in.lb.) Per 100 RPM (in.lb./deg.) Solid Max. Bore (Solid)
P097N7 224 0.36 38.3
1-1/8 7/16 P090U9 336 0.54 69.9 1.8 1.3 0.946
P090H5 672 1.08 158.7

Model PM 90 Dimensional Specifications


T W

A- Over all length (Assembled) - 2.78


B- Outside Diameter - 2.125
T- Set Screw 1/4 -20 UNC, 2 places
B W- Distance between shaft ends 3/16 min.
X- Distance between shaft ends 3/4 max.
Y- Hub movement required for insert removal (1.20 total)

Y X

Notes

magnaloy coupling company P.O. Box 455 Alpena, MI 49707 989-356-2186 14


A Division of Douville Johnston Corporation Fax: 989-354-4190 http://www.magnaloy.com
PM 90 Specifications
Model PM 90 - Standard Bore - Keyway Sizes (Per AGMA Class 1, Clearance Fit)
Part Bore & Keyway Set Screw
Number Combinations Bore Size** Key Width Key Depth Size Quantity
P090014N 7/16 x No.Key .4375 / .4385 No Keyway - 1/4 - 20 UNC 1
P09001403 7/16 x 3/32 .4375 / .4385 .0938 / .0958 .484 / .495 1/4 - 20 UNC 1
P09001404 7/16 x 1/8 .4375 / .4385 .125 / .127 .496 / .507 1/4 - 20 UNC 2
P09001604 1/2 x 1/8 .500 / .501 .125 / .127 .560 / .571 1/4 - 20 UNC 2
P09001804 9/16 x 1/8 .5625 / .5635 .125 / .127 .623 / .634 1/4 - 20 UNC 2
P09002005 5/8 x 5/32 .625 / .626 .1562 / .1582 .698 / .709 1/4 - 20 UNC 2
P09002006 5/8 x 3/16 .625 / .626 .1875 / .1895 .709 / .720 1/4 - 20 UNC 2
P09002206 11/16 x 3/16 .6875 / .6885 .1875 / .1895 .773 / .784 1/4 - 20 UNC 2
P09002404 3/4 x 1/8 .750 / .751 .125 / .127 .812 / .823 1/4 - 20 UNC 2
P09002406 3/4 x 3/16 .750 / .751 .1875 / .1895 .837 / .848 1/4 - 20 UNC 2
P09002806 7/8 x 3/16 .875 / .876 .1875 / .1895 .964 / .975 1/4 - 20 UNC 2
P09002808 7/8 x 1/4 .875 / .876 .250 / .252 .982 / .993 1/4 - 20 UNC 2
P090010006 1 x 3/16 1.000 / 1.001 .1875 / .1895 1.090 / 1.101 1/4 - 20 UNC 2
P090010008 1 x 1/4 1.000 / 1.001 .250 / .252 1.114 / 1.125 1/4 - 20 UNC 2
P090010408 1 1/8 x 1/4 1.125 / 1.126 .250 / .252 1.241 / 1.252 1/4 - 20 UNC 2
*Shaded combinations are Semi-special - See price sheet
**Other Bore/Keyway combinations available. Consult factory for quotation.

Model PM 90 Bore Tolerances


Key
Width
Features Tolerance
Bore -.000 / +.001
Key
Key Width -.000 / +.002 Depth Bore
Key Depth +.005 / +.016

As with Magnaloys standard line of Nitrile, 70A Durometer.....


couplings, insert elastomer selection Standard elastomer material offering
allows variable performance excellent resistance to petroleum
characteristics. Insert design products and superior compression
eliminates metal-to-metal set characteristics.
contact and assures Urethane, 90A Durometer....
electrical isolation Excellent mechanical and physical
properties. Note: Urethane material
of shafts. tends to soften when exposed to
elevated temperatures or humid
conditions
Hytrel, 50D Durometer....
Superior mechanical and physical
properties and offer excellent fluid
compatibility and high temperature
characteristics.

Additional insert materials available upon request from factory.


See page 8 for additional information on insert selection.

magnaloy coupling company P.O. Box 455 Alpena, MI 49707 989-356-2186 15


A Division of Douville Johnston Corporation Fax: 989-354-4190 http://www.magnaloy.com
Make the Connection
with ......
Whatever your Fluid Power Unit needs,
magnaloy has the products
to keep you connected.

PM 90 Couplings
Economical PM-90 Iron Powder
Couplings have long lasting
Flexible Drive Couplings nitrile, hytrel or urethane inserts.
Top-of-the-line magnesium couplings Double set screws give excellent
are lighter, yet stronger than either Pump/Motor Mounts gripping power.
cast iron or aluminum. They also Precision machined aluminum & custom
offer better corrosion resistance steel pump/motor mounts directly connect
and easier handling. the motor and pump while ensuring
accurate shaft alignment and enclosing the
coupling. Vertical and horizontal models
readily available from stock.

Magnaloy Hydraulic Bar Magnaloy Reservoirs


Manifolds & Accessories Complete line of J.I.C. Style and
custom reservoirs from 10 to 5,000
Complete line of inline Bar Manifolds, Rod End Couplers gallons. Drip Pans, Stacking
Subplates, Cover Plates, Valve Adaptors, Two models of accurately machined Modules, Clean Out Covers and
Integrated Circuit Manifolds, and high tensile cylinder rod end alignment many other accessories are also
Accessories to make the design and o o
available from stock.
couplers offer 7 or 10 spherical
fabrication of Hydraulic Circuitry simple
and 1/8 parallel misalignment
and easy. Wide range of sizes include:
capabilities.
D03, D05, D05H & D08 in aluminum and
steel with ports available in SAE, NPTF,
BSPP, and BSTP styles. Custom design and
fabrication also available, consult factory.
Magnaloy Pressure Switch
Accessories Pressure Sensing switch capable of sensing up
Filler Breather Adaptors, Filler Breathers, to three (3) separate pressures. Each sensor
Reservoir Flanges, Suction Strainers, is externally independently adjustable from
Gauge Isolators, Liquid Level Gauges, 200 to 4000 psi. Viton seals provide wide
Modular O-Ring Kits. fluid compatibility range.

magnaloy coupling company P.O. Box 455 Alpena, MI 49707 989-356-2186 16


A Division of Douville Johnston Corporation Fax: 989-354-4190 http://www.magnaloy.com
Return To Contents A1

SOLFRUNT Pressure Gauges and


Other Products for the Process Industries
AMETEKs line of high quality process gauges are styles, case materials, and mounting arrangements,
specifically designed to meet the demanding needs and wetted parts are available in bronze, stainless
of the chemical and petroleum processing steel, alloy steel, and MONEL. Recalibration
industries, and are also widely used in industries adjustments can be made from the rear of the case
such as fossil fuel and nuclear power generation, without removing the internals. On the 1900 Series
aerospace and marine. The gauges design and the pointer is adjusted by removing the ring and
materials of construction provide reliable service in front window. Most SOLFRUNT gauges are factory
applications where corrosive atmospheres, stock and are readily available through your U.S.
corrosive media, pressure pulsation, vibration, and Gauge Distributor.
wide variations in ambient temperatures are
Visit our Web site for a list of local stocking distributors:
present. SOLFRUNT gauge cases feature an www.ametekusg.com/products/distributors.cfm
integral wall between the measuring element and 1
It is recommended that users of gauges become familiar with American National
the window, and a pressure relieving back for Standard ASME B40.100-1998 entitled Pressure Gauges and Gauge
Attachments. This specification is available from the American Society of
increased safety1. They are available in various Mechanical Engineers, United Engineering Center, 345 East 47th Street, New York,
New York 10017.

2002, by AMETEK, Inc. All rights reserved. 15M1102A (160126) Specifications are subject to change without notice. Visit our Web sites for the most up-to-date information.

For Gauges/Thermometers: For Electronic Products: For Diaphragm Seals:


U.S. GAUGE PMT PRODUCTS M&G PRODUCTS
820 Pennsylvania Blvd. 820 Pennsylvania Blvd. 8600 Somerset Drive
Feasterville, PA 19053 U.S.A. Feasterville, PA 19053 U.S.A. Largo, FL 33773 U.S.A.
Tel: (215) 355-6900 Tel: (215) 355-6900 Tel: (727) 536-7831
Fax: (215) 354-1802 Fax: (215) 354-1800 Fax: (727) 539-6882
www.ametekusg.com www.ametekusg.com www.ametek.com/tci
Customer Service Tel: (863) 534-1504
Customer Service Fax: (863) 533-7465
A4 Return To Contents

Process Gauges
SOLFRUNT 4-1/2 Models 1980, 1982, and 1986
DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATIONS
The Models 1980, DIAL SIZE: 4-1/2
1982, and 1986 CASE AND RING:
4-1/2 Process For Stem or Wall Mounting:
Gauges have a PET TURRET CASE (black) with glass-filled polypropylene
threaded ring and pressure-relieving back
PET turret style
case for chemical WINDOW: High temperature acrylic, other options available
and petrochemical POINTER: Anodized aluminum, micro-adjustable with black
processing finish
applications. The DIAL: Aluminum with baked white background and black
PET material gives this markings
case superior impact MOVEMENT: Geared movement with components of
strength and a broad spectrum corrosion-resistant 300 series stainless steel
of chemical resistance. These
BOURDON TUBE: Phosphor bronze/silver brazed; 316L
models are available with wetted surface material in stainless steel/TIG welded; or K MONEL, MONEL/micro-
brass/phosphor bronze, alloy steel/316L or brazed
MONEL for NACE Standard MR0175 applications. CONNECTION: Brass, alloy steel, or MONEL, 1/2-14 ANPT
They are available dry or liquid filled from the standard (1/4-18 ANPT, optional)
factory or your local stocking distributor, liquid fill ACCURACY: 0.5% of span (Grade 2A), except where
kit, or the E-Z Fill design to facilitate filling in the stainless steel bourdon tubes are used in following ranges:
field without special tools. Type 316L from 10,000 to 11,600 psi; accuracy is 0.5% on
ascending pressure and 1.0% on descending pressure
Models 1980, 1982, and 1986 4-1/2
SOLFRUNT gauges are supplied in 30 vacuum,
compound, and pressure ranges from 30 Hg
vacuum through 11,600 psi. The low-connected
PET turret case can be easily liquid filled in the field
using the appropriate conversion kit.
Span adjustments can be accomplished from
rear of case without disturbing the gauge internals.
INCHES
Pointer adjustments are easily made by removing (MM)
ring and window.

5.84 3.13 PET TURRET CASE


(148.3) (79.5) MOUNTING CONFIGURATION
MAX.

270
ARC
5.38
5.06 (136.5)
(128.6)

2.62
(66.5)

.88 .58 .25


(22.2) .22 (14.6) (6.4)
SQUARE (5.6) MINIMUM
3 HOLES 3 HOLES EQUALLY SPACED
THREAD 1/2-14 ANPT 1.58
(40.1)

Please see the MODEL SELECTION CHART on page A11

2002, by AMETEK, Inc. All rights reserved. 15M1102A (160126) Specifications are subject to change without notice. Visit our Web sites for the most up-to-date information.

For Gauges/Thermometers: For Electronic Products: For Diaphragm Seals:


U.S. GAUGE PMT PRODUCTS M&G PRODUCTS
820 Pennsylvania Blvd. 820 Pennsylvania Blvd. 8600 Somerset Drive
Feasterville, PA 19053 U.S.A. Feasterville, PA 19053 U.S.A. Largo, FL 33773 U.S.A.
Tel: (215) 355-6900 Tel: (215) 355-6900 Tel: (727) 536-7831
Fax: (215) 354-1802 Fax: (215) 354-1800 Fax: (727) 539-6882
www.ametekusg.com www.ametekusg.com www.ametek.com/tci
Customer Service Tel: (863) 534-1504
Customer Service Fax: (863) 533-7465
Return To Contents A5

Process Gauges
SOLFRUNT 4-1/2 Models 1980, 1982, and 1986
SPEC NUMBER SELECTION CHART
Model Number 1980 1982 1986
Bourdon Tube Phosphor Bronze 316L Stainless Steel K MONEL
Socket Brass Alloy Steel MONEL
Size 4-1/2" 4-1/2" 4-1/2"
Range* Spec No. Spec No. Spec No.
0-30" Hg VAC 150000 150038 150060
30"-0-15 psi 150001 150039 150061
30"-0-30 psi 150002 150040
30"-0-60 psi 150003 150041 150063
30"-0-100 psi 150004 150042 150064
30"-0-150 psi 150005 150043 150065
0-15 psi 150006 150044 150066
0-30 psi 150007 150045 150067
0-60 psi 150008 150046 150068
0-100 psi 150009 150047 150069
0-150 psi 150010 150048 150070
0-200 psi 150011 150049 150071
0-300 psi 150012 150050 150072
0-400 psi 150013 150051 150073
0-600 psi 150014 150052 150074
0-800 psi 150053
0-1000 psi 150015 150054 150075
0-1500 psi 150055
0-2000 psi 150525 150529
0-2300 psi 150056
0-3000 psi 150526 150530
0-3500 psi 150057
0-5000 psi 150527 150531
0-6000 psi 150058
0-10,000 psi 150528 150532
0-11,600 psi 150059

* Metric and dual scale dials are available on all 1900 Series gauges. Please refer to
page A12 for part numbers or call Customer Service at (863) 534-1504
1/4-18 ANPT available use 155XXX when ordering
When ordering EZ Fill Option use 170XXX (for 1/2-14 ANPT); use 175XXX (for
1/4-18 ANPT)

SPARE PARTS
Item Description Part No.
Lazy Hand Lazy Hand 1980 132371
Fill Kit 1980 Series Bladder Design 150300
Fill Kit 1980 Series O-Ring Design 150298

2002, by AMETEK, Inc. All rights reserved. 15M1102A (160126) Specifications are subject to change without notice. Visit our Web sites for the most up-to-date information.

For Gauges/Thermometers: For Electronic Products: For Diaphragm Seals:


U.S. GAUGE PMT PRODUCTS M&G PRODUCTS
820 Pennsylvania Blvd. 820 Pennsylvania Blvd. 8600 Somerset Drive
Feasterville, PA 19053 U.S.A. Feasterville, PA 19053 U.S.A. Largo, FL 33773 U.S.A.
Tel: (215) 355-6900 Tel: (215) 355-6900 Tel: (727) 536-7831
Fax: (215) 354-1802 Fax: (215) 354-1800 Fax: (727) 539-6882
www.ametekusg.com www.ametekusg.com www.ametek.com/tci
Customer Service Tel: (863) 534-1504
Customer Service Fax: (863) 533-7465
A10 Return To Contents

Process Gauges
SOLFRUNT 4-1/2 Liquid Filled Gauges
DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATIONS
4-1/2 PET or aluminum cased DIAL SIZE: 4-1/2
SOLFRUNT liquid filled gauges CASE AND RING:
are designed to extend For Wall Mounting Only:
PET TURRET CASE with threaded polypropylene ring, black
service life wherever finish; BUNA-N O-ring sealed, pressure-relieving back.
corrosive atmosphere and/or Externally vented or internal diaphragm case available for
severe operating conditions temperature/ atmospheric compensation (Model 1980L,
1981L, 1982L and 1986L)
(such as compressors,
For Stem or Wall Mounting:
pulsating pumps, machine tool CAST ALUMINUM, BACK-FLANGED CASE with aluminum
applications, etc.) affect the bayonet ring, black finish; BUNA-N O-ring sealed, pressure-
performance of standard gauges. The relieving back. Externally vented case or internal diaphragm
liquid fill may be a mixture of glycerine* case available for temperature/atmospheric compensation
(Model 1901L, 1911L, and 1931L)
and water, silicone oil, or mineral oil.
WINDOW: High temperature acrylic, other options available
The liquid effectively dampens
POINTER: Anodized aluminum with black finish
mechanism and pointer
DIAL: Aluminum with baked white background and black
oscillation and vibration while markings
providing continuous lubrication MOVEMENT: Geared movement with components of
and protection from corrosion for corrosion-resistant 300 series stainless steel
the gauge internals. A specially BOURDON TUBE: Phosphor bronze/silver brazed; 316L
designed rear blowout panel with a stainless steel/TIG welded; or K MONEL, MONEL/nicro-
vent for atmospheric pressure and brazed
temperature compensation is standard. CONNECTION: Brass, alloy steel, 316L stainless steel or
MONEL. 1/2-14 ANPT, standard (1/4-18 ANPT, optional)
U.S. Gauge liquid filled gauges are available in three
optional configurations: liquid filled at factory; dry with ACCURACY: 0.5% of span (Grade 2A), except where
stainless steel bourdon tubes are used in following ranges:
liquid fill kit sold separately; E-Z Fill (PET case only) Type 316L from 10,000 to 11,600 psi; accuracy is 0.5% on
design to facilitate filling in the field without special ascending pressure and 1.0% on descending pressure
tools or fixtures. RANGES: See Standard Dial Ranges charts on page A11
* NOTE: Glycerin not suitable for use with alloy steel or 403 stainless steel sockets. DIMENSIONS: See drawings on page A4 for PET turret case
and page A7 cast aluminum case

MODEL SELECTION CHART


MODEL BOURDON
MOUNTING CASE RING SOCKET CONNECTION*
NUMBER TUBE
1901L Stem/Wall Aluminum Back Flange Aluminum Bayonet Phosphor Bronze Brass 1/2-14 ANPT LM
1911L Stem/Wall Aluminum Back Flange Aluminum Bayonet 316L Stainless Steel Alloy Steel 1/2-14 ANPT LM
1931L Stem/Wall Aluminum Back Flange Aluminum Bayonet 316L Stainless Steel 316L Stainless Steel 1/2-14 ANPT LM
1980L Stem/Wall PET turret Threaded Polypropylene Phosphor Bronze Brass 1/2-14 ANPT LM
1981L Stem/Wall PET turret Threaded Polypropylene 316L Stainless Steel 316L Stainless Steel 1/2-14 ANPT LM
1982L Stem/Wall PET turret Threaded Polypropylene 316L Stainless Steel Alloy Steel 1/2-14 ANPT LM
1986L Stem/Wall PET turret Threaded Polypropylene MONEL MONEL 1/2-14 ANPT LM

* 1/4-18 ANPT optional

Liquid Fill Conversion Kits


U.S. Gauge offers two liquid fill kits; one provides a hermetically sealed back cover with screws and a special window retaining ring. Kits
case incorporating a pressure equalizing diaphragm, the other contains a available for both PET and aluminum case styles.
vent for temperature/pressure compensation. These kits, complete with Vented case kits contain: window, socket and back cover O-rings,
easy-to-follow instructions, enable the user to quickly and conveniently fill a rubber vent plug with metal vent pin, stainless steel back cover with
dry gauges without special tools or fixtures. screws and a special window retaining ring. Kits available for both PET
For hermetically sealed gauges the kit contains: window and socket and aluminum case styles.
O-rings, an elastomeric diaphragm with integral O-ring, a stainless steel

2002, by AMETEK, Inc. All rights reserved. 15M1102A (160126) Specifications are subject to change without notice. Visit our Web sites for the most up-to-date information.

For Gauges/Thermometers: For Electronic Products: For Diaphragm Seals:


U.S. GAUGE PMT PRODUCTS M&G PRODUCTS
820 Pennsylvania Blvd. 820 Pennsylvania Blvd. 8600 Somerset Drive
Feasterville, PA 19053 U.S.A. Feasterville, PA 19053 U.S.A. Largo, FL 33773 U.S.A.
Tel: (215) 355-6900 Tel: (215) 355-6900 Tel: (727) 536-7831
Fax: (215) 354-1802 Fax: (215) 354-1800 Fax: (727) 539-6882
www.ametekusg.com www.ametekusg.com www.ametek.com/tci
Customer Service Tel: (863) 534-1504
Customer Service Fax: (863) 533-7465
Return To Contents A11

Process Gauges
SOLFRUNT 4-1/2 Standard Gauge Summary
This information applies for all 4-1/2 Process Gauges:
Models 1981, 1981 Advantage, 1980, 1982, 1986, 1901, 1931, 1911, 1903, 1933, and 1913

STANDARD DIAL RANGES STANDARD DIAL RANGES


PRESSURE RANGES COMPOUND & VACUUM RANGES
(psi) (In. Hg0psi)
MAXIMUM FIGURE INTERMEDIATE MINOR FIGURE INTERMEDIATE MINOR
RANGE
INDICATIONS INTERVALS GRADUATIONS GRADUATIONS INTERVALS GRADUATIONS GRADUATIONS
15 1 0.5 0.1 30-0-15 5 3 1 1 0.5 0.2
30 5 1 0.2 30-0-30 10 5 5 1 1 0.5
60 5 1 0.5 30-0-60 10 10 5 5 1 1
100 10 5 1 30-0-100 30 10 10 5 2 1
160 20 5 1 30-0-150 30 25 10 5 5 2
200 20 10 2 30-0-200 30 20 10 5 2
300 30 10 2 30-0-300 30 30 10 5 2
400 50 25 5 30-0 5 1 0.2
600 50 25 5
800 100 50 10
1,000 100 50 10
1,500 300 50 10
2,000 2,000 100 20
BOURDON ASSEMBLIES
2,300 500 100 20
3,000 500 100 20 Bourdon and connection assemblies are stamped with the
3,500 500 100 50 following codes plus the bourdon tube pressure range:
5,000 500 100 50
BOURDON TUBE MATERIAL CONNECTION MATERIAL
6,000 1,000 200 50
MATERIAL CODE MATERIAL CODE
10,000 1,000 500 100
Phosphor Bronze C51000 Brass C36000
11,600 2,000 500 100
316L Stainless Steel S31600 316L Stainless Steel S31600
K MONEL N05500 Alloy Steel G10180
MONEL N04405

MODEL SELECTION CHART


MODEL BOURDON
MOUNTING CASE RING SOCKET CONNECTION*
NUMBER TUBE
1980 Stem/Wall PET Turret Threaded Polypropylene Phosphor Bronze Brass 1/2-14 ANPT LM
1981 Stem/Wall PET Turret Threaded Polypropylene 316L Stainless Steel 316L Stainless Steel 1/2-14 ANPT LM
1981 Advantage Stem/Wall PET Turret Threaded Polypropylene 316L Stainless Steel 316L Stainless Steel 1/2-14 ANPT LM
1982 Stem/Wall PET Turret Threaded Polypropylene 316L Stainless Steel Alloy Steel 1/2-14 ANPT LM
1986 Stem/Wall PET Turret Threaded Polypropylene K-MONEL / MONEL K-MONEL / MONEL 1/2-14 ANPT LM
1901 Stem/Wall Aluminum Back Flange Aluminum Bayonet Phosphor Bronze Brass 1/2-14 ANPT LM
1931 Stem/Wall Aluminum Back Flange Aluminum Bayonet 316L Stainless Steel 316L Stainless Steel 1/2-14 ANPT LM
1911 Stem/Wall Aluminum Back Flange Aluminum Bayonet 316L Stainless Steel Alloy Steel 1/2-14 ANPT LM
1903 Flush Panel Cast Aluminum Hinged Steel Phosphor Bronze Brass 1/2-14 ANPT LBM
1933 Flush Panel Cast Aluminum Hinged Steel 316L Stainless Steel 316L Stainless Steel 1/2-14 ANPT LBM
1913 Flush Panel Cast Aluminum Hinged Steel 316L Stainless Steel Alloy Steel 1/2-14 ANPT LBM

* 1/4-18 ANPT optional

2002, by AMETEK, Inc. All rights reserved. 15M1102A (160126) Specifications are subject to change without notice. Visit our Web sites for the most up-to-date information.

For Gauges/Thermometers: For Electronic Products: For Diaphragm Seals:


U.S. GAUGE PMT PRODUCTS M&G PRODUCTS
820 Pennsylvania Blvd. 820 Pennsylvania Blvd. 8600 Somerset Drive
Feasterville, PA 19053 U.S.A. Feasterville, PA 19053 U.S.A. Largo, FL 33773 U.S.A.
Tel: (215) 355-6900 Tel: (215) 355-6900 Tel: (727) 536-7831
Fax: (215) 354-1802 Fax: (215) 354-1800 Fax: (727) 539-6882
www.ametekusg.com www.ametekusg.com www.ametek.com/tci
Customer Service Tel: (863) 534-1504
Customer Service Fax: (863) 533-7465
A12 Return To Contents

Process Gauges
SOLFRUNT 4-1/2
Metric and Dual Scale Dial Part Numbers
The metric and dual scale dials listed below can be used on any of the following SOLFRUNT
4-1/2 Gauges: Models 1981, 1981 Advantage, 1980, 1982, 1986, 1901, 1931, 1911, 1903, 1933, and
1913. Please call Customer Service at (863) 534-1504 for questions about metric or dual scale dials.

kPa Scales Bar Scales


Single Scale Dual Scale Single Scale Dual Scale
Range Part No. Range Part No. Range Part No. Range Part No.
(vac)-100 Kpa D110421 (vac) 30" hg / -100 Kpa D166661M -1 bar D216580 30" Hg / -1 bar D132181
-100-0-100 Kpa D131401M 30"-0-15 psi / -100-0-100 Kpa D124381M -1-0-1 bar D220400 30"-0-15 psi / -1-0-1 bar D132161
-100-0-150 Kpa D245360 -1-0-1.5 bar D220780
-100-0- 200 Kpa D110721M 30"-0-30 psi / -100-0-200 Kpa D124141M -1-0-2 bar D916200 30"-0-30 psi / -1-0-2 bar D127983
-100-0-400 Kpa D110741M 30"-0-60 psi / -10-0-400 Kpa D193760M -1-0-3 bar D220760
-100-0-700 Kpa D110761 30"-0-100 psi / -100-0-700 Kpa D128063M -1-0-4 bar D896621 30"-0-60 psi /-1-0-4 bar D130441M
-100-0-900 Kpa D216340 30"-0-100 psi / -1-0-7 bar D149240
-100-0-1000 Kpa D110781 30"-0-150 psi / -100-0-1000 Kpa D193840M 30"-0-150 psi / -1-0-10 bar D129740
-100-0-2000 Kpa D110821 0-1 bar D165160 0-15 psi / 0-1 bar D128181M
0-100 Kpa D131261M 0-15 psi / 0-100 Kpa D131281M 0-2 bar D154360 0-30 psi / 0-2 bar D124121M
0-200 Kpa D110441M 0-30 psi / 0-200 Kpa D124181M 0-2.5 bar D214780
0-250 Kpa D187920M 0-4 bar D137782 0-60 psi / 0-4 bar D124261M
0-400 Kpa D110462M 0-60 psi / 0-400 Kpa D124201M 0-6 bar D214800M
0-600 Kpa D108941M 0-7 bar D137802 0-100 psi / 0-7 bar D128023
0-700 Kpa D108841M 0-100 psi / 0-700 Kpa D124221M 0-8 bar D187980
0-800 Kpa D101680M 0-10 bar D188000
0-1000 Kpa D099701 0-11 bar D134982 0-160 psi / 0-11 bar D124101
0-1100 Kpa D110481M 0-160 psi / 0-1100 Kpa D124241M 0-14 bar D115902 0-200 psi / 0-14 bar D128241
0-1400 Kpa D110502M 0-200 psi / 0-1400 Kpa D129201M 0-16 bar D188020M
0-1600 Kpa D101700M 0-21 bar D154380M 0-300 psi / 0-21 bar D128281M
0-2100 Kpa D110522M 0-300 psi / 0-2100 Kpa D131441M 0-25 bar D188040
0-2500 Kpa D107960M 0-28 bar D165200 0-400 psi / 0-28 bar D128201
0-2800 Kpa D110541M 0-400 psi / 0-2800 Kpa D129221M 0-40 bar D214840
0-4000 Kpa D110561M 0-600 psi / 0-4000 Kpa D126801M 0-42 bar D165240 0-600 psi / 0-42 bar D128161
0-5500 Kpa D110581M 0-800 psi / 0-5500 Kpa D129241M 0-55 bar D237340M 0-800 psi / 0-56 bar D106302
0-6000 Kpa D189120M 0-60 bar D214860
0-7000 Kpa D110601M 0-1000 psi / 0-7000 Kpa D131421M 0-70 bar D154400 0-1000 psi / 0-70 bar D128221
0-8000 Kpa D187940M 0-105 bar D154420M 0-1500 psi / 0-105 bar D128141
0-10000 Kpa D131321M 0-1500 psi / 0-10000 Kpa D131341M 0-140 bar D246360
0-2000 psi / 0-14000 Kpa D226280M 0-160 bar D154440 0-2300 psi / 0-160 bar D083380
0-16000 Kpa D110621M 0-2300 psi / 0-16000 Kpa D165440M 0-210 bar D246380
0-20000 Kpa D245980 0-3000 psi / 0-21000 Kpa D226300M 0-240 bar D154460 0-3500 psi / 0-240 bar D128261
0-25000 Kpa D110641M 0-3500 psi / 0-25000 Kpa D165460M 0-420 bar D154480 0-6000 psi / 0-420 bar D145521
0-5000 psi / 0-35000 Kpa D215220M 0-11600 psi / 0-800 bar D129720
0-40000 Kpa D110661M 0-6000 psi / 0-40000 Kpa D190260
0-60000 Kpa D108000
0-10000 psi / 0-70000 kpa D239400
0-80000 Kpa D101740 0-11600 psi / 0-80000 kpa D220740
0-100000 Kpa D108801

2002, by AMETEK, Inc. All rights reserved. 15M1102A (160126) Specifications are subject to change without notice. Visit our Web sites for the most up-to-date information.

For Gauges/Thermometers: For Electronic Products: For Diaphragm Seals:


U.S. GAUGE PMT PRODUCTS M&G PRODUCTS
820 Pennsylvania Blvd. 820 Pennsylvania Blvd. 8600 Somerset Drive
Feasterville, PA 19053 U.S.A. Feasterville, PA 19053 U.S.A. Largo, FL 33773 U.S.A.
Tel: (215) 355-6900 Tel: (215) 355-6900 Tel: (727) 536-7831
Fax: (215) 354-1802 Fax: (215) 354-1800 Fax: (727) 539-6882
www.ametekusg.com www.ametekusg.com www.ametek.com/tci
Customer Service Tel: (863) 534-1504
Customer Service Fax: (863) 533-7465
Return To Contents A13

Process Gauges
SOLFRUNT 4-1/2
Metric and Dual Scale Dial Part Numbers
The metric and dual scale dials listed below can be used on any of the following SOLFRUNT
4-1/2 Gauges: Models 1981, 1981 Advantage, 1980, 1982, 1986, 1901, 1931, 1911, 1903, 1933, and
1913. Please call Customer Service at (863) 534-1504 for questions about metric or dual scale dials.

kgcm2 Scales
Single Scale Dual Scale
Range Part No. Range Part No.
-1 kgcm2 D216680
760 mm Hg (Vac) D150420 30" Hg / 760 mm Hg (Vac) D211580
30" Hg / 76 cm Hg (Vac) D167940
-1-0-1 kg/cm2 D188860 30"-0-15 psi / -1-0-1 kgcm2 D137921
760 mm-0-1 kgcm2 D208580
-1-0-1.5 kgcm2 D228100
760 mm-0-2 kgcm2 D849302 30"-0-30psi / 76 cm-0-2 kgcm2 D128003
-1-0-3 kgcm2 D213440
760 mm-0-4 kgcm2 D188840 30"-0-60 psi / 76 cm-0-4 kgcm2 D192860M
-1-0-4 kgcm2 D215740
-1-0-5 kgcm2 D212380
76 cm-0-7 kgcm2 D189480 30"-0-100 psi / 76 cm-0-7 kgcm2 D127923M
760 mm-0-7 kgcm2 D209420
-1-0-7 kgcm2 D215760
-1-0-9 kg/cm2 D212400
76 cm-0-10 kgcm2 D190820 30"-0-150 psi / 76 cm-0-10 kgcm2 D128861
-1-0-10 kgcm2 D215780
0-1 kgcm2 D154221 0-15 psi / 0-1 kgcm2 D127960
0-2 kgcm2 D127441M 0-30 psi / 0-2 kgcm2 D124281
0-2.5 kgcm2 D212420
0-4 kgcm2 D111501M 0-60 psi / 0-4 kgcm2 D124301M
0-6 kgcm2 D212440 0-85 psi / 0-6 kgcm2 D236740
0-7 kgcm2 D139221 0-100 psi / 0-7 kgcm2 D124321M
0-10 kgcm2 D192480
0-11 kgcm2 D111521 0-160 psi / 0-11 kgcm2 D127943M
0-14 kgcm2 D134181M 0-200 psi / 0-14 kgcm2 D128841M
0-16 kgcm2 D212480
0-20 kgcm2 D192500
0-21 kgcm2 D132041M 0-300 psi / 0-21 kgcm2 D135541M
0-25 kgcm2 D212500
0-28 kgcm2 D153421 0-400 psi / 0-28 kgcm2 D131241M
0-40 kgcm2 D212520
0-42 kgcm2 D146820 0-600 psi / 0-42 kgcm2 D124161M
0-60 kgcm2 D216620 0-800 psi / 0-56 kgcm2 D192840M
0-70 kgcm2 D146840 0-1000 psi / 0-70 kgcm2 D167440
0-100 kgcm2 D213700
0-105 kgcm2 D140820 0-1500 psi / 0-105 kgcm2 D137901M
0-2000 psi /0-140 kgcm2 D192880M
0-160 kgcm2 D216640 0-2300 psi / 0-160 kgcm2 D167460M
0-3000 psi / 0-210 kgcm2 D192900
0-250 kgcm2 D215100 0-3500 psi / 0-250 kgcm2 D166541
0-350 kgcm2 D242420 0-5000 psi / 0-350 kgcm2 D192920
0-400 kgcm2 D215120 0-6000 psi / 0-400 kgcm2 D167480M
0-10000 psi / 0-700 kgcm2 D218140
0-800 kgcm2 D208600

2002, by AMETEK, Inc. All rights reserved. 15M1102A (160126) Specifications are subject to change without notice. Visit our Web sites for the most up-to-date information.

For Gauges/Thermometers: For Electronic Products: For Diaphragm Seals:


U.S. GAUGE PMT PRODUCTS M&G PRODUCTS
820 Pennsylvania Blvd. 820 Pennsylvania Blvd. 8600 Somerset Drive
Feasterville, PA 19053 U.S.A. Feasterville, PA 19053 U.S.A. Largo, FL 33773 U.S.A.
Tel: (215) 355-6900 Tel: (215) 355-6900 Tel: (727) 536-7831
Fax: (215) 354-1802 Fax: (215) 354-1800 Fax: (727) 539-6882
www.ametekusg.com www.ametekusg.com www.ametek.com/tci
Customer Service Tel: (863) 534-1504
Customer Service Fax: (863) 533-7465
V-SERIES VALVES

V-SERIES
VALVES
Standard Standard Stainless Steel Handwheel Handwheel
with Screw with Flange with Screw with Screw with Flange
Connections Connections Connections Connections Connections

APPLICATION Widely used in a variety of applications, the V


series valves are ideally suited in hydraulic and
The Fulflo V Series range in size from 1/4 lubricating systems for load regulation and
through 2 and operate efficiently with liquids of system protection. Special trim or packings are
any viscosity at pressures from 2 to 1000 P.S.I. available for use with fire resisting fluids and
The V series valves are available in flange or other liquids of this type. Unusual applications
screw type...cartridge or handwheel in a choice and special requirements should be referred to
of brass, cast iron, steel and stainless steel. our engineering staff for recommendation.

INSTALLATION should be piped back to the tank. Care must be


taken to have the discharge well below the oil
Fulflo valves can be mounted in any position. A level in the tank to prevent air entrainment and
tee may be inserted in the pump discharge line erratic operation.
to mount the valve. The correct size of valve
should be installed, preferably matching the Only if the valve is used as safety or overload
pump discharge line. Screw the valve into the relief and operates infrequently may its
nipple in the tee, or in the case of the flange discharge be piped back into the pump suction
style, bolt the valve to the companion flange line. Frequent or continuous operation under
screwed into the nipple. When the valve is used these conditions will cause excessive heating of
for frequent bypassing of oil pressure, its outlet the oil and possible damage.

11
V-SERIES
SETTING VALVES having a flow meter in the pump discharge line must
be available. With a valve adjusted for cracking
Valves may be set with a hydraulic hand pump for pressure as above, continue closing bypass until the
cracking pressure. If a test stand is available, valve required flow registers on the flow meter and observe
should be connected to the discharge header with the pressure. Readjust pressure, if necessary, to obtain
pump bypass open, and the bypass gradually closed desired pressure at desired flow.
until the desired pressure registers on the gauge.
Adjust valve adjusting screw until valve slightly bleeds
at the set bypass pressure and lock adjusting screw. MAINTENANCE
Fulflo valves are not designed to be positive shut-off, Fulflo valves provide reliable chatter-free operation
and will pass a minimal amount of leakage before the when the system is free of abrasives and foreign
V-SERIES
VALVES

set pressure. If a valve is required to bypass a given matter. Continuous filtration of the liquid used is
amount of fluid at a given pressure, a test stand strongly recommended.

TYPICAL DISASSEMBLY OF STANDARD TYPE VALVE

To dismantle valve for inspection or cleaning:


G 1. Remove cap B
2. Remove O-Ring E
3. Remove lock nut F
B
I 4. Remove adjusting screw C
5. Remove retainer D
E H 6. Remove spring G
7. Remove piston I
F 8. Remove stop ring H (Not Recommended)
A (Special tooling is required to install new stop ring.)

C Inspect valve bore and piston for wear and scoring. Replace
broken or damaged parts. Clean all parts thoroughly and
re-assemble by reversing the above procedure.
D

TYPICAL DISASSEMBLY OF HANDWHEEL TYPE VALVE


To dismantle the valve for inspection or cleaning:
1. Release spring tension by backing off handwheel as far as it
will go.
2. Remove lock nut A or set screw and take off handwheel B
3. Remove lock nut D
4. Unscrew and remove gland E
5. Unscrew and remove bonnet F
J 6. Remove O-Ring H
A
F 7. Remove adjusting screw C (turn clockwise and pull out from
B bottom of bonnet F)
D K 8. Remove O-ring packing G
9. Remove spring J
E H 10. Remove piston K
11. Remove stop ring L (Not Recommended)
G L (Special tooling is required to install new stop ring.)

Inspect valve bore and piston for wear or scoring. Replace broken
C or damaged parts. Clean all parts thoroughly and re-assemble by
reversing the above procedure.
I

12
V-SERIES
ASSEMBLY NUMBER IDENTIFICATION CHART
Symbol No. Designation Code Description
1 Style None Standard Model
H Handwheel Model
2 Series V
3 Material J Cast iron
B Brass
S Steel
SS 316 Stainless Steel
4 Connections None Screw Connections
F Flange Connections 300# Flange Class Standard (250# Flange Class - Cast Iron Standard)

V-SERIES
VALVES
5 Size -1 1/4
-2 3/8
-3 1/2
-4 3/4
-5 1
-6 11/4
-7 11/2
-8 2
6,7,8 ASA None 300# Flange Standard (no designation required)
Flange -150
Rating -600
9 Flange A Raised Face, Staggered Bolt Centers (standard on all Flange rating)
Style B Smooth Face, Staggered Bolt Centers
150# & 600# C Raised Face, Bolts on Valve Centerline
Only D Smooth Face, Bolts on Valve Centerlne
10 O-Ring R Buna O-Ring Cap Seal (standard)
Material RV Viton O-Ring Cap Seal
RS Silicone O-Ring Cap Seal
RT Teflon O-Ring Cap Seal (standard on VSS Series)
RA Aflas O-Ring Cap Seal
11 Options SP Steel Parts (used on cast iron only)
P Panel Mount on Handwheel Series
12 Piston /HS Hardened Steel
Material /SS 416 Stainless Steel
/3SS 303 Stainless Steel
13 Spring AS
US
WS
XS
YS
ZS
14 Setting Desired Pressure Setting

EXAMPLES:
VJ-1RVSP/HS/WS VJF-5R/HS/WS VJF-5-150AR/HS/WS
V J -1 RV SP /HS WS V J F -5 R /HS WS V J F -5 -150 A R /HS WS
Series Cast Iron 1/4 Viton O-Ring Steel Parts H.S. Piston WS Spring Series Cast Iron Flanged 1 Buna O-Ring H.S. Piston WS Spring Series Cast Iron Flanged 1 Rating Style Buna O-Ring H.S. Piston WS Spring

NOTE: Stainless steel pistons are supplied on brass valves, unless hardened steel is specified. Hardened steel pistons are supplied on cast iron or steel unless stainless steel is
specified. Buna O-Rings are supplied as standard unless other material is specified.

STANDARD PRESSURE RANGE CHART


Valve Valve SPRING PRESSURE AND IDENTIFICATION NO.
Pipe Flange BLACK-AS RED-US GREEN-WS YELLOW-XS WHITE-YS BLUE-ZS PURPLE-TS BROWN-RS
Size Size
Low High Low High Low High Low High Low High Low High Low High Low High
1/4 3 15 7 35 30 100 60 175 150 350 300 500 400 600 550 750
3/8 3 15 7 35 30 100 60 175 150 350 300 500 400 600 550 750
1/2 3 15 7 35 30 100 60 175 150 350 300 500 400 600 550 750
3/4 3 15 7 35 30 100 60 175 150 350 300 500
1 1 3 15 7 35 30 100 60 175 150 350 300 500
11/4 11/4 3 15 7 35 30 100 60 175 150 350 300 500
11/2 11/2 3 15 7 35 30 100 60 175 150 350 300 500
2 2 3 15 7 35 30 100 60 175 150 350 250 600

13
VJ VB Brass
V-SERIES VS
Cast Iron
Steel VSS Stainless Steel VJ-SP Cast Iron with Steel Parts

DIMENSIONS Valve
Size
DIMENSIONS IN INCHES
AA BB CC DD
1/4 5 / 11
32 1 /
11
32 1 /
11
32 13/8

J B 3/8 511/32 111/32 111/32 13/8

C 1/2 6 /163
1 /16
11
1 /16
7
17/16
F 3/4 615/16 115/16 113/16 111/16
1 87/32 29/32 29/32 21/16
K E
D 11/4 99/16 29/16 29/16 21/2

FULFLO
V-SERIES

AA REF.
G 1 /2 1
11 /16 1
2 /16
11
2 /16
11
27/8
VALVES

CAP A 2 13 3 3 31/4
(GASKET SEAL) I

PIPE SIZE

OUT

DD
REF
BB
H IN

CC
PIPE SIZE
DD
REF

PARTS LIST
SYM. NAME MODEL VALVE SIZE
1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 11/4 11/2 2
VJ, VJ-SP 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800
VB 100-B 200-B 300-B 400-B 500-B 600-B 700-B 800-B
A BODY VS 100-S 200-S 300-S 400-S 500-S 600-S 700-S 800-S
VSS 100-SS 200-SS 300-SS 400-SS 500-SS 600-SS 700-SS 800-SS
VJ, VJ-SP 201-SR 201-SR 301-SR 401-R 501-R 601-R 701-R 801-R
CAP VB 201-BR 201-BR 301-BR 401-BR 501-BR 601-BR 701-BR 801-BR
B (O-RING SEAL) VS 201-SR 201-SR 301-SR 401-SR 501-SR 601-SR 701-SR 801-SR
VSS 201-SSR 201-SSR 301-SSR 401-SSR 501-SSR 601-SSR 701-SSR 801-SSR
VJ, VB 202-B 202-B 302-B 402-B 502-B 602-B 702-B 802-B
C ADJUSTING VS, VJ-SP 202-S 202-S 302-S 402-S 502-S 602-S 702-S 802-S
SCREW VSS 202-SS 202-SS 302-SS 402-SS 502-SS 602-SS 702-SS 802-SS
VJ, VB 203-B 203-B 303-B 403-B 503-B 603-B 703-B 803-B
D RETAINER VS, VJ-SP 203-S 203-S 303-S 403-S 503-S 603-S 703-S 803-S
VSS 203-SS 203-SS 303-SS 403-SS 503-SS 603-SS 703-SS 803-SS
VJ, VJ-SP, VB, VS 204-* 204-* 304-* 404-* 504-* 604-* 704-* 804-*
E O-RING VSS 204-RT 204-RT 304-RT 404-RT 504-RT 604-RT 704-RT 804-RT
VJ, VJ-SP, VB, VS 205-S 205-S 305-S 405-S 505-S 605-S 705-S 805-S
F LOCK NUT VSS 205-SS 205-SS 305-SS 405-SS 505-SS 605-SS 705-SS 805-SS
G SPRING ALL MODELS 207-** 207-** 307-** 407-** 507-** 607-** 707-** 807-**
VJ, VB 208-B 208-B 308-B 408-B 508-B 608-B 708-B 808-B
H STOP RING VS, VJ-SP 208-S 208-S 308-S 408-S 508-S 608-S 708-S 808-S
VSS 208-SS 208-SS 308-SS 408-SS 508-SS 608-SS 708-SS 808-SS
HARDENED STEEL 206 206 306 406 506 606 706 806
I PISTON 416 STAINLESS STEEL 206-A 206-A 306-A 406-A 506-A 606-A 706-A 806-A
303 STAINLESS STEEL 206-SS 206-SS 306-SS 406-SS 506-SS 606-SS 706-SS 806-SS
CAP VJ, VJ-SP 201-S 201-S 301-S 401 501 601 701 801
J VB 201-B 201-B 301-B 401-B 501-B 601-B 701-B 801-B
(GASKET SEAL)
VS 201-S 201-S 301-S 401-S 501-S 601-S 701-S 801-S
VJ, VB 204 204 304 404 504 604 704 804
K GASKET 204-S 204-S 304-S 404-S 504-S 604-S 704-S 804-S
VS, VJ-SP

* See o-ring selection chart


** See spring pressure chart
Recommended spare parts

14
VJF Cast Iron VSF Steel
V-SERIES VBF Brass VSSF Stainless Steel VJF-SP Cast Iron with Steel Parts

DIMENSIONS DIMENSIONS IN INCHES

Valve
Size AA BB
J B
C 1 91/2 31/2
F
11/4 1013/16 33/4
K E
11/2 127/16 41/16
D
2 149/16 49/16

V-SERIES
G

VALVES
Note: Dimensions reflect
CAP 150# and 300# only
A

AA REF.
(GASKET SEAL) 45
I

45
221/2
PIPE SIZE
45
H
221/2

BB

-------

-------

-------

-------
FOR 2 VALVE ONLY
PIPE SIZE

BB

PARTS LIST
SYM. NAME MODEL VALVE SIZE
1 11/4 11/2 2
VJF, VJF-SP 500-F 600-F 700-F 800-F
VBF 500-BF 600-BF 700-BF 800-BF
A BODY VSF 500-SF 600-SF 700-SF 800-SF
VSSF 500-SSF 600-SSF 700-SSF 800-SSF
VJF, VJF-SP 501-R 601-R 701-R 801-R
CAP VBF 501-BR 601-BR 701-BR 801-BR
B (O-RING SEAL) VSF 501-SR 601-SR 701-SR 801-SR
VSSF 501-SSR 601-SSR 701-SSR 801-SSR
VJF, VBF 502-B 602-B 702-B 802-B
C ADJUSTING VSF, VJF-SP 502-S 602-S 702-S 802-S
SCREW VSSF 502-SS 602-SS 702-SS 802-SS
VJF, VBF 503-B 603-B 703-B 803-B
D RETAINER VSF, VJF-SP 503-S 603-S 703-S 803-S
VSSF 503-SS 603-SS 703-SS 803-SS
VJF, VJF-SP 504* 604* 704* 804*
E O-RING VBF, VSF 504-* 604-* 704-* 804-*
VSSF 504-RT 604-RT 704-RT 804-RT
VJF, VJF-SP 505-S 605-S 705-S 805-S
F LOCK NUT VBF, VSF 505-S 605-S 705-S 805-S
VSSF 505-SS 605-SS 705-SS 805-SS
G SPRING ALL MODELS 507-** 607-** 707-** 807-**
VJF, VBF 508-B 608-B 708-B 808-B
H STOP RING VJF-SP, VSF 508-S 608-S 708-S 808-S
VSSF 508-SS 608-SS 708-SS 808-SS
HARDENED STEEL 506 606 706 806
I PISTON 416 STAINLESS STEEL 506-A 606-A 706-A 806-A
303 STAINLESS STEEL 506-SS 606-SS 706-SS 806-SS
VJF, VJF-SP 501 601 701 801
J CAP VBF 501-B 601-B 701-B 801-B
(GASKET SEAL)
VSF 501-S 601-S 701-S 801-S
VJF, VBF 504 604 704 804
K GASKET VJF-SP, VSF 504-S 604-S 704-S 804-S
* See o-ring selection chart
** See spring pressure chart
Recommended spare parts

15
HVJ Cast Iron HVS Steel HVJ-P Cast Iron HVS-P Steel
V-SERIES HVB BRASS HVSS Stainless Steel HVB-P Brass HVSS-P Stainless Steel

DIMENSIONS Valve
Size
DIMENSIONS IN INCHES

A AA BB CC DD EE
1/4 8/
1
8 1 /
11
32 1/3
16 1/3
8 7/8
B
C 3/8 81/8 111/32 13/16 13/8 7/8
D
E 1/2 9 /8
5
1 /16
11
1 /16
7
1 /16
7
11/8

F 3/4 93/16 115/16 111/16 113/16 13/8

AA MAXIMUM REF.
G 1 127/16 29/32 21/16 29/32 13/8
EE 11/4 137/16 29/16 21/2 29/16 15/8
THD. DIA. H
V-SERIES

1 /2
1
17 /16
1
2 /16
11
2 /8
7
2 /16
11
21/4
VALVES

M I

FULFLO
J 2 171/16 3 33/8 3 21/4
K

F
PIPE SIZE

REF
OUT

CC
BB
L
PANEL MOUNT IN
PIPE SIZE DD
CC

REF.
PARTS LIST
SYM. NAME MODEL VALVE SIZE
1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 11/4 11/2 2
A LOCK NUT OR 1/4-20 1/4-20 1/4-20 205-S 205-S 1/4-20 1/4-20 1/4-20
SET SCREW ALL MODELS
COMM. COMM. COMM. COMM. COMM. COMM.
B HANDWHEEL ALL MODELS 229 229 229 429 429 629 629 629
ADJUSTING HVJ(P), HVS(P) 222-S 222-S 322-S 422-S 522-S 622-S 722-S 822-S
C HVB(P) 222-B 222-B 322-B 422-B 522-B 622-B 722-B 822-B
SCREW HVSS(P) 222-SS 222-SS 322-SS 422-SS 522-SS 622-SS 722-SS 822-SS
HVJ(P), HVS(P) 205-S 205-S 205-S 305-S 305-S 655-S 655-S 655-S
D LOCK NUT HVB(P) 205-S 205-S 205-S 305-S 305-S 655-S 655-S 655-S
HVSS(P) only 205-SS 205-SS 205-SS 305-SS 305-SS 655-SS 655-SS 655-SS
HVJ(P), HVS(P) 225-S 225-S 325-S 525-S 525-S 625-S 725-S 825-S
E GLAND HVB(P) 225-B 225-B 325-B 525-B 525-B 625-B 725-B 825-B
HVSS(P) 225-SS 225-SS 325-SS 525-SS 525-SS 625-SS 725-SS 825-SS
HVJ, HVS 223-SR 223-SR 323-SR 423-SR 523-SR 623-SR 723-SR 823-SR
HVB 223-BR 223-BR 323-BR 423-BR 523-BR 623-BR 723-BR 823-BR
HVSS 223-SSR 223-SSR 323-SSR 423-SSR 523-SSR 623-SSR 723-SSR 823-SSR
F BONNET 228-SR 228-SR 328-SR 428-SR 528-SR 628-SR 728-SR 828-SR
HVJP, HVSP
HVBP 228-BR 228-BR 328-BR 428-BR 528-BR 628-BR 728-BR 828-BR
HVSSP 228-SSR 228-SSR 328-SSR 428-SSR 528-SSR 628-SSR 728-SSR 828-SSR
HVJ(P), HVS(P) 224* 224* 224* 424* 424* 624* 624* 624*
G O-RING HVB(P) 224-* 224-* 224-* 424-* 424-* 624-* 624-* 624-*
HVSS(P) only 224-RT 224-RT 224-RT 424-RT 424-RT 624-RT 624-RT 624-RT
HVJ(P), HVS(P) 204* 204* 304* 404* 504* 604* 704* 804*
H O-RING HVB(P) 204-* 204-* 304-* 404-* 504-* 604-* 704-* 804-*
HVSS(P) only 204-RT 204-RT 304-RT 404-RT 504-RT 604-RT 704-RT 804-RT
HVJ(P) 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800
HVB(P) 100-B 200-B 300-B 400-B 500-B 600-B 700-B 800-B
I BODY HVS(P) 100-S 200-S 300-S 400-S 500-S 600-S 700-S 800-S
HVSS(P) 100-SS 200-SS 300-SS 400-SS 500-SS 600-SS 700-SS 800-SS
J SPRING ALL MODELS 207-** 207-** 307-** 407-** 507-** 607-** 707-** 807-**
HARDENED STEEL 206 206 306 406 506 606 706 806
K PISTON 416 STAINLESS STEEL 206-A 206-A 306-A 406-A 506-A 606-A 706-A 806-A
303 STAINLESS STEEL 206-SS 206-SS 306-SS 406-SS 506-SS 606-SS 706-SS 806-SS
HVJ(P), HVS(P) 208-S 208-S 308-S 408-S 508-S 608-S 708-S 808-S
L STOP RING HVB(P) 208-B 208-B 308-B 408-B 508-B 608-B 708-B 808-B
HVSS(P) 208-SS 208-SS 308-SS 408-SS 508-SS 608-SS 708-SS 808-SS
HVJP, HVSP, 505-S 505-S 605-S 705-S 705-S 805-S 745-S 745-S
M LOCK NUTS 505-S 505-S 605-S 705-S 705-S 805-S 745-S 745-S
HVBP
2 REQD HVSSP 505-SS 505-SS 605-SS 705-SS 705-SS 805-SS 745-SS 745-SS
* See o-ring selection chart
** See spring pressure chart
Recommended spare parts

16
V-SERIES HVJF
HVBF
Cast Iron
Brass
HVSF Steel HVJF-P Cast Iron HVSF-P Steel
HVSSF Stainless Steel HVBF-P Brass HVSSF-P Stainless Steel

DIMENSIONS A DIMENSIONS IN INCHES

B Valve
Size AA BB EE
C
D 13 /16 31/2 13/8
11
1
E
11/4 1411/16 33/4 15/8
F
G 11/2 187/16 41/16 21/4

AA MAXIMUM REF.
2 185/8 49/16 21/4
H
EE Note: Dimensions reflect
THD. DIA. 150# and 300# only
I

V-SERIES
M

VALVES
J 221/2
K 45
45

45
PIPE SIZE
F
221/2
L

BB
PANEL MOUNT
PIPE SIZE

-------

-------

-------

-------
BB FOR 2 VALVE ONLY

PARTS LIST
SYM. NAME MODEL DIMENSIONS IN INCHES
1 11/4 11/2 2
A LOCK NUT OR ALL MODELS 1/4-20 1/4-20 1/4-20
SET SCREW 205-S COMM. COMM. COMM.
B HANDWHEEL ALL MODELS 429 629 629 629
HVJF(P) HVSF(P) 522-S 622-S 722-S 822-S
ADJUSTING HVBF(P) 522-B 622-B 722-B 822-B
C
SCREW HVSSF(P) 522-SS 622-SS 722-SS 822-SS
HVJF(P), HVSF(P) 305-S 655-S 655-S 655-S
D LOCK NUT HVBF(P) 305-S 655-S 655-S 655-S
HVSSF(P) only 305-SS 655-SS 655-SS 655-SS
HVJF(P), HVSF(P) 525-S 625-S 725-S 825-S
E GLAND HVBF(P) 525-B 625-B 725-B 825-B
HVSSF(P) 525-SS 625-SS 725-SS 825-SS
HVJF, HVSF 523-SR 623-SR 723-SR 823-SR
HVBF 523-BR 623-BR 723-BR 823-BR
HVSSF 523-SSR 623-SSR 723-SSR 823-SSR
F BONNET HVJPF, HVSPF 528-SR 628-SR 728-SR 828-SR
HVBPF 528-BR 628-BR 728-BR 828-BR
HVSSFP 528-SSR 628-SSR 728-SSR 828-SSR
HVJF(P), HVSF(P) 424* 624* 624* 624*
G O-RING HVBF(P) 424-* 624-* 624-* 624-*
HVSSF(P) only 424-RT 624-RT 624-RT 624-RT
HVJF(P), HVSF(P) 504* 604* 704* 804*
H O-RING HVBF(P) 504-* 604-* 704-* 804-*
HVSSF(P) only 504-RT 604-RT 704-RT 804-RT
HVJF(P) 500-F 600-F 700-F 800-F
HVBF(P) 500-BF 600-BF 700-BF 800-BF
I BODY HVSF(P) 500-SF 600-SF 700-SF 800-SF
HVSSF(P) 500-SSF 600-SSF 700-SSF 800-SSF
J SPRING ALL MODELS 507-** 607-** 707-** 807-**
HARDENED STEEL 506 606 706 806
K PISTON 416 STAINLESS STEEL 506-A 606-A 706-A 806-A
303 STAINLESS STEEL 506-SS 606-SS 706-SS 806-SS
HVJF(P), HVSF(P) 508-S 608-S 708-S 808-S
L STOP RING HVBF(P) 508-B 608-B 708-B 808-B
HVSSF(P) 508-SS 608-SS 708-SS 808-SS
LOCK NUTS HVJFP, HVSFP, 705-S 805-S 745-S 745-S
M HVBFP 705-S 805-S 745-S 745-S
2 REQD HVSSFP 705-SS 805-SS 745-SS 745-SS
* See o-ring selection chart
** See spring pressure chart
Recommended spare parts

17
V-SERIES PERFORMANCE CHARTS

All valve tests 110F. to 120F. Oil Viscosity 150 S.S.U. at 100F.
(Charts good from 30 to 500 S.S.U.)
1/4 VALVE TESTS 3/8 VALVE TESTS
V-SERIES

6
VALVES

5 XS
4 Rated Capacity WS 10 XS
3 G.P.M.
3 Rated Capacity
5 G.P.M.
WS
2 US 5
GALLONS PER MINUTE

RS

GALLONS PER MINUTE


AS 4 US RS
TS
3
1 ZS AS TS
.8 2 ZS
YS PRESSURE RANGE IN P.S.I. PRESSURE RANGE IN P.S.I.
.6 207-AS = 3-15 207-AS = 3-15
207-US = 7-35 YS 207-US = 7-35
207-WS = 30-100 207-WS = 30-100
.4 207-XS = 60-175 1 207-XS = 60-175
207-YS = 150-350 207-YS = 150-350
207-ZS = 300-500 207-ZS = 300-500
207-TS = 400-600 207-TS = 400-600
207-RS = 600-750 207-RS = 600-750
.2 .5
1 2 4 6 8 10 20 40 60 80 100 150 1 2 4 6 8 10 20 40 60 80 100 150
OVERPRESSURE IN P.S.I. OVERPRESSURE IN P.S.I.

1/2 VALVE TESTS 3/4 VALVE TESTS

PRESSURE RANGE IN P.S.I.


307-AS = 3-15
307-US = 7-35
307-WS = 30-100
307-XS = 60-175 40
307-YS = 150-350
307-ZS = 300-500 30
307-TS = 400-600
25 307-RS = 600-750
20 Rated Capacity
20 16 G.P.M.
15 15
Rated Capacity
11 G.P.M. WS ZS
GALLONS PER MINUTE
GALLONS PER MINUTE

10 10 US
XS YS
AS
RS
5 WS XS
5
4 US TS 4
PRESSURE RANGE IN P.S.I.
3 AS ZS 3 407-AS = 3-15
407-US = 7-35
407-WS = 30-100
2 YS 2 407-XS = 60-175
407-YS = 150-350
407-ZS = 300-500

1 1
1 2 4 6 8 10 20 40 60 80 100 150 1 2 4 6 8 10 20 40 60 80 100 150
OVERPRESSURE IN P.S.I. OVERPRESSURE IN P.S.I.

18
V-SERIES PERFORMANCE CHARTS

All valve tests 110F. to 120F. Oil Viscosity 150 S.S.U. at 100F.
(Charts good from 30 to 500 S.S.U.)

1 VALVE TESTS 11/4 VALVE TESTS

PRESSURE RANGE IN P.S.I. PRESSURE RANGE IN P.S.I.


507-AS = 3-15 607-AS = 3-15
507-US = 7-35 607-US = 7-35
507-WS = 30-100 607-WS = 30-100
507-XS = 60-175 607-XS = 60-175

V-SERIES
507-YS = 150-350 607-YS = 150-350

VALVES
507-ZS = 300-500 120 607-ZS = 300-500
60 507-R = 500-900 607-R = 500-800
50 100
40 80
Rated Capacity Rated Capacity
30 25 G.P.M.
60 50 G.P.M.

20 ZS
GALLONS PER MINUTE

GALLONS PER MINUTE


WS 40 WS
ZS
US US YS
YS
10 AS R 20 XS
8 XS 16 AS
6 12
R
4 8

21 2 4 6 8 10 20 40 60 80 100 150 41 2 4 6 8 10 20 40 60 80 100 150


OVERPRESSURE IN P.S.I. OVERPRESSURE IN P.S.I.

11/2 VALVE TESTS 2 VALVE TESTS

PRESSURE RANGE IN P.S.I. PRESSURE RANGE IN P.S.I.


707-AS = 3-15 807-AS = 3-15
707-US = 7-35 807-US = 7-35
707-WS = 30-100 807-WS = 30-100
707-XS = 60-175 807-XS = 60-175
707-YS = 150-350 807-YS = 150-350
707-ZS = 300-500 807-ZS = 250-600
707-R = 500-900
200
160 200 Rated Capacity
150 G.P.M.
120 Rated Capacity 150
80 G.P.M.
80 100
GALLONS PER MINUTE

GALLONS PER MINUTE

R
WS ZS
40 AS
50
32 US YS ZS 40
WS XS
24 AS 30 US
16 XS 20 YS

8 10
1 2 4 6 8 10 20 40 60 80 100 150 1 2 4 6 8 10 20 40 60 80 100 150
OVERPRESSURE IN P.S.I. OVERPRESSURE IN P.S.I.

19
SERVICE MANUAL

~
HEAT EXCHA AND TRANSF

('
500 Superior S
. . C~rneglt,p,
(412) 276-3388 FAX:(412) 276-3397 SM-102A

~ Email: sales@heat-inc.com
WEB:www.heat-inc.com February, 2001

OCH - OPEN COIL HEATERS


A
C B

A = OVERALL LENGTH D = CERAMIC DIAMETER


B = HEATED LENGTH E = END PLATE DIAMETER
C = COLD LENGTH F = TAB EXTENSION

General Description Installation

H.E.A.T.'s Open Coil Heaters (OCH) are designed and con- NOTE: High heating efficiency, low element temperatures
structed for long life. When properly installed, operated and and longer heater life result when the OCH's are installed
maintained, they give dependable, trouble free service. properly.

The OCH's are available in 2" and 3" nominal sizes. They are 1. To avoid chipping or cracking the ceramic insulators,
intended for installation inside a horizontally mounted metal carefully unpack, handle and install the heater
(\ pipe or tube and are available in lengths from 2' to 40' or
longer. 2. Remove crating materials and inspect for possible dam-
age during transport. If any, contact the carrier. Notify
The use of temperature regulating and limiting controls is Heat Exchange and Transfer, Inc. before repairing any
recommended, since excessive temperature can permanently damages.
damage the heater and cause premature failure.
3. Heater mounting must allow for linear expansion. A mini-
CAUTION: Install adequate temperature regulating con- mum allowable length for this expansion is 1/3" per foot
trols, fusing and back-up safety devices with electric of heater length. Provide at least 1/8" clearance between
heating equipment. Back-up protective devices are the ceramic insulators and the wall of the pipe for ease of
essential, when the consequences of control failure may installation when mounting the heater assembly inside a
be severe. Although the safety of the installation is the metal pipe.
responsibility of the user, H.E.A.T.will make equipment
recommendations upon request. 4. The OCH elements are flexible for easy installation in
cramped areas, but, only bend the element in a vertical
plane. The minimum bending radius is 18". A shorter
Model Number Code radius may result in electrical problems causing prema-
MODEL OCH -- -- ture heater failure. Do not bend heating elements in a
Nominal Size ~ horizontal plane unless they have been specially designed
2 = 2"
3 = 3"
-=r for this application.

5. When mounting inside a metal pipe or tube, clean the


kW Rating of Heater inside surface of any foreign materials that might contam-
inate the ceramic insulators.
Overall Length in inches
NOTE: H.E.AT. cannot be responsible for failures or damage
Voltage Code caused by contamination on the ceramic insulators. Do ~:
First Two Digits of Voltage not expose the heaters to contaminants.
20 = 208V 41 = 415V
n 24 = 240V
38 = 380V
48 = 480V
57 = 575V

Phase
1 = Single
3 = Three

r- J-
6. DANGER- Hazard of fire. Since the basic OCH ele- 1. Do not operate heaters at voltages higher than that
ment is capable of developing high temperatures, take
precautions to:
stamped on the heater since excess voltage will shorten
heater life. n
A. Avoid mounting or exposing elements to an atmos- 2. Do not operate heaters in environments with factors that
phere containing combustible gases and vapors. can destroy the electrical insulating characteristics of the
ceramic insulators. Foreign contaminants can create leak-
B. Avoid contact between the heating elements and age (shock) hazards, cause permanent heater damage or
combustible materials. result in heater failure.

C. Ensure that the inside surface of the pipe or tube is


clean of all foreign materials, especially combustible
ones, when the heating element is mounted in a pipe
or tube. CAUTION: Hazard of severe shock. Disconnect all
power to the heater before servicing or replacing the
7. Do not mount the OCH element in the vertical position as heater.
the resistance wire could sag and cause uneven heating
or a short circuit. 1. Verify that the terminals and the ceramic insulators are
free from contact with oil, liquid or other foreign matter.

2. Check electrical connections at heater terminals and


lighten if necessary. This helps avoid hot terminals which
CAUTION: Hazard of electrical shock. OCH elements may destroy wire insulation or heater terminals.
contain exposed electrical terminals and must be
properly guarded to prevent electrical shock. Any 3. Monitor overheat operation to ensure heater protection.
installation involving electric heaters must be grounded.

1. Size and install electrical wiring to the heating elements in


accordance with the National Electric Code and applica-
ble local codes.

2. Temperatures at the heater terminals require the use of


high temperature lead wire.
n

L~

n
HEAT EXCHANGE AND TRANSFER, INC.
500 Superior St., Carnegie, PA 15106. (412) 276-3388. FAX: (412) 276-3397
BACK MOUNT WITH NEEDLE VALVES,
LIQUID LEVEL GAGE - PIPE ADAPTERS
LUBE DEVICES series G608 closed circuit liquid level gages are furnished with shut-off valves between
the tank wall and gage. The gage body can be removed from the valves without loss of fluid. Configured
with pipe adapters. Bottom closure cap may be used as a drain. An exclusive construction feature provides a
.06 (1.52mm) lateral adjustment at each mounting bolt to facilitate mounting. All metal parts are precision
machined from solid bar stock with the sight opening recessed into the gage body for maximum protection.
Aluminum valves are optional. Please specify when ordering.
STANDARD MATERIALS: OPERATING CONDITIONS:
! Aluminum construction ! Maximum working temperature with standard
! Brass valves seals up to 250F (121.1C)
! Buna N seals ! Maximum working pressure as noted in table
! Borosilicate glass with redline on white below at 150F (65.6C), no corrosion
background for distinct level reading and
maximum fluid compatibility
MODIFICATIONS AVAILABLE - MADE TO ORDER - CONSULT OUR FACTORY
(MINIMUM ORDER MAY BE REQUIRED)
HOW TO ORDER: G608 PATENTED
WHEN ORDERING, SPECIFY THE FOLLOWING,
AFTER THE SERIES NUMBER SEPARATING EACH
WITH A DASH (-):
-A- Aluminum gage body (standard)
-B- Brass gage body (optional)
-1- Buna N seals (standard)
-2- Butyl seals (optional)
-3- Viton A seals (optional)
-4- Ethylene propylene seals (optional)
-5- Silicone seals (optional)
- SPECIFY PIPE THREAD SIZE:
-2- 1/4 male pipe thread
-3- 3/8 male pipe thread
-4- 1/2 male pipe thread
-5- 3/4 male pipe thread
EXAMPLE: G608-10-A-1-4 1/2 Pipe thread
Buna N seals
Aluminum gage body
10.00 (254.00mm) Centers
Series G608

SERIES A - CENTER B - SIGHT C - LENGTH MAX. WORK. E F


NUMBER INCHES (mm) INCHES (mm) INCHES (mm) PSI (kPa) D INCHES INCHES
(mm) (mm)
10 (254.00) 8.50 (215.90) 11.62 (295.15) 275 (1896)
12 (304.80) 10.50 (266.70) 13.62 (345.95) 270 (1862) 1/4-18 .56 2.06
15 (381.00) 13.50 (342.90) 16.62 (422.15) 260 (1793) 3/8-18 (14.22) (52.32)
G608
18 (457.20) 16.50 (419.10) 19.62 (498.35) 240 (1655)
1/2-14 .75 2.25
24 (609.60) 22.50 (571.50) 25.62 (650.75) 210 (1448)
3/4-14 (19.05) (57.15)
30 (762.00) 28.50 (723.90) 31.62 (803.15) 185 (1276)

LIQUID LEVEL GAGE - BACK MOUNT


WITH NEEDLE VALVES, PIPE ADAPTERS
LUBE DEVICES, INC.
1864 NAGLE AVE., P.O. BOX 1810, MANITOWOC, WI 54221-1810
10/03 BULLETIN F327-8 PHONE: (920) 682-6877
E-MAIL: sales@lubedevices.com
FAX: (920) 684-7210
WEBSITE: www.lubedevices.com
Drexelbrook Page 1 of 1

Drexelbrook > On/Off Level Switch

RELIABLE, LOW COST ON/OFF LEVEL SWITCH, Z-TRON III OFFERS COTE-SHIELD CIRCUITRY

With no moving parts to wear, break or fail, the economical Z-tron III level switch offers a maintenance-
free alternative to electromechanical switches.The compact, one-piece unit installs through a standard
3/4-inch NPT fitting located at the desired high- or low-level position. Sensing element wetted parts are
Type 316 SS or PEEK (polyether-ether-ketone) high-temperature thermoplastic, with Cote-Shield
circuitry that allows the Z-tron III to ignore coatings or build-up on the sensing element, while
preventing false signals from dust or tunneling. The unit can operate on 230Vac, 120Vac or 24Vdc
input, with output signal provided by a DPDT relay.

http://www.alliancecontrols.com/DREXELBROOK/On_Off_Level_Switch.html 11/8/2005
DREXELBROOK

A Leader In Level Measurement Solutions

Z-tron III Z02X-Series


Easy-Installation
One-piece unit is easily installed through a single
3/4-inch vessel opening. Calibration is quick and
simple.
Z-tron III Point Level Switch, a reliable
low-cost, on/off level switch
The low-cost, Drexelbrook Z-tron III level switch is
unaffected by sticky coatings and impervious to
corrosive liquids. The all-electronic design means
no moving parts to wear, break or fail. Based
on field-proven RF technology, the Z-tron III is a
simple and reliable on/off level switch.

The compact one-piece unit is inserted through


a standard 3/4-inch NPT opening into the vessel
so that the sensing element is positioned at the
desired high or low level. (Other connection
types and sizes are also available.) When the
material level reaches a predetermined point on
the sensing element, it causes a change in status
at the electronic unit, resulting in actuation of the
Economical DPDT relay. The relay can be used to operate
Effective, low-cost material level detection in alarms, annunciators, valves, or other control or
a wide variety of applications, and a desirable indication devices.
alternative to electromechanical level switches.
No expendable parts to buy and stock. No Drexelbrook's exclusive Cote-ShieldTM
expensive, extra-cost options. circuitry enables the Z-tron III to ignore
dust pileups, coatings, and sticky
Maintenance-Free buildups on the sensing element.
Unlike paddle wheels, vibrating tines or other
mechanical instruments, there are no components Suspended dust particles are also no problem as
to jam, break or wear out. No need for routine the Z-tron III reacts only to actual high or low level
maintenance, cleaning or replacing of worn parts. conditions.

Reliable Operation
Cote-Shield circuitry allows the Z-tron III to ignore
coatings or build up on the sensing element.
There are no false signals from dust or tunneling.
Z-tron III Z02X-Series
Specifications Dimensions Wiring
Power requirement 4 1/2
120 25 Vac, 50/60 Hz (std.) (114)

230 25 Vac, 50/60 Hz (optional) 2 9/16


(65)
15-30 Vdc (optional) LED ALARM
WHEN OUT
(1 Watt maximum)
3 5/8
NEMA 4X
Output ALUMINUM
(92) TIME DELAY
DPDT relay HOUSING ADJUSTMENT
ASSEMBLY SET POINT
ADJUSTMENT FAIL SAFE SELECTOR
Contact Rating 3/4 NPT
FWD/REVERSE TIME
WIRE ENTRY
Non-inductive 5A @ 120 Vac or 700-0206-SERIES 4 3/16 DELAY SELECTOR
2A @ 230 Vac 3-TERMINAL (106)
SENSING ELEMENT NOTE: FAIL SAFE AND TIME DELAY
Min. Rating 100mA/12VDC SELECTED WITH DIP SWITCHES

Spark Tolerance 3/4" NPT MOUNTING POWER RELAY CONNECTIONS


100 A (std) A
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
7/8 DIA
CSL
(22)
Fail Safe C
GND L1 L2 NC C NO NC C NO
High (HLFS) or I.L.
Low (LLFS) field adjustable

Response Time
Approx. 0.2 sec.
Adjustable 0-60 seconds 3/8 (9.5)

Sensitivity Model Number


0.3 pF
Technology
Differential Z RF Admittance
Worst case with horizontal sensing Reserved for future use
element, 1/64"(.4mm) or less 0
Input
Recommended Ambient 0 120Vac
Electronics Temperature 1 24Vdc
3 230Vac
-40F to 145F*
(-40oC to 63oC) Output
2 Double pole Double Throw Relay
*Unit will operate above 145F Sensing Element
but with reduced component life. Application Sensing Element Pressure/Temperature Wetted Parts
05 General 700-0206-201 14bar@121C 316SS
Temperature Effect Purpose (200psi@250F) & PEEK
0.5 pF/50F(10oC) Cote-Shield Length
A 10 inch/254mm
Line Voltage Effect B 3.5 inch/88.9mm
0.2 pF/20V C 2 inch/51mm
Insertion Length (IL)
Sensing Element Connection A 6 inch/152mm
3/4" NPT (Optional Flange Mount) B 12 inch/305mm
C 18 inch/457mm
Sensing Element Wetted Parts D 36 inch/914mm
316SS & PEEK (2) E 48 inch/1219mm
F 60 inch/1524mm
Process Pressure & Temperature H 72 inch/1829mm
200 psi at 250F Z Other
14 BAR at 121C

Approvals
UL/CUL/508 General Purpose
CE Mark (1) Private label/OEM optimization available. Contact your Drexelbrook representative or factory for more
detailed information.
Housing (2) PEEK (Polyether-Ether-Ketone) is a special, high-temperature thermoplastic similar to TFE but with
better abrasion resistance.
NEMA 1through 5 & 12

U.S.A. Sales: 800-553-9092 24-Hour Service: 800-527-6297 International Support: 215-674-1234 Fax: 215-674-2731
AMETEK Nihon Drexelbrook AMETEK Singapore Pte. Ltd. AMETEK Precision Instruments Europe
2 Chome 12-7 Minami Gyotoku 10 Ang Mo Kio Street 65 Rudolf-Diesel-Strasse 16
Ichikawa City Chiba 27201 Japan #05-12 Techpoint 569059 Singapore D-40670 Meerbusch Germany
DREXELBROOK Phone: 81-473-56-6513 Phone: 65-6484-2388 Phone: 49-2159-9136-0
205 Keith Valley Road Fax: 81-473-56-6535 Fax: 65-6481-6588 Fax: 49-2159-9136-39
Horsham PA 19044 U.S.A. E-mail: nd@nihon-drexelbrook.co.jp E-mail: aspl@ametek.com.sg Web: www.ametek.de
E-mail - drexelbrook.info@ametek.com
Web - www.drexelbrook.com 2003, by AMETEK, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in the U.S.A. Z0X-A EDO#3-03-251
Leader in
Level Measurement

For Assistance Call 1-800-527-6297


Outside North America + 215-674-1234

Installation and
Operating Instructions
Series Z0X-2
Z-tron IIITM Level Control

+ 215-674-1234 Outside North America


1-800-553-9092 US and Canada
www.drexelbrook.com
drexelbrook.service@ametek.com
AMETEK Drexelbrook makes no warranty of any kind with regard to the material contained
in this manual, including, but not limited to, implied warranties or fitness for a particular
purpose. Drexelbrook shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or
consequential damages in connection with the performance or use of material.

Copyright 2002 AMETEK Drexelbrook


EDO #10-03-243
Z0X-2-LM

Series Z0X-2
Z-tron IIITM Level Control

205 Keith Valley Road, Horsham, PA 19044


US and Canada: 1-800-553-9092
International: +1 215-674-1234
24-Hour Service: +1 215-527-6297
Fax: +1 215-674-2731
An ISO 9001 Certified Company E-mail: drexelbrook.info@ametek.com
Website: www.drexelbrook.com
EDO #10-03-243
Z0X-2-LM

Table of Contents
Section 1: Introduction ................................................................................................ 1
1.1 System Description ...................................................................................... 1
1.2 Technology ................................................................................................... 1
1.3 Model Number ............................................................................................. 2

Section 2: Installation .................................................................................................. 3


2.1 Unpacking .................................................................................................... 3
2.2 Mounting the Level Control ......................................................................... 3
2.3 Mounting Dimensions .................................................................................. 5
2.4 Power Wiring ................................................................................................ 6
2.5 Relay Wiring................................................................................................. 8

Section 3: Operation .................................................................................................... 9


3.1 Setpoint Control ........................................................................................... 9
3.2 Time Delay Control ...................................................................................... 9
3.3 Time Delay Action ........................................................................................ 10
3.4 Failsafe ........................................................................................................ 10
3.5 Start-up ........................................................................................................ 10

Section 4: Calibration .................................................................................................. 11


4.1 Calibration in Conducting Material ............................................................... 11
4.2 Calibration in Insulating Material [Horizontal Mount].................................... 11
4.3 Calibration in Insulating Material [Vertical Mount] ........................................ 12

Section 5: Troubleshooting ......................................................................................... 13


5.1 Introduction .................................................................................................. 13
5.2 Testing Electronic Unit.................................................................................. 13
5.3 Testing Sensing Element.............................................................................. 13
5.4 Testing Relay Circuits................................................................................... 15
5.5 Possible Problems and Causes ................................................................... 16
5.6 Factory Assistance....................................................................................... 17
5.7 Field Service ................................................................................................ 17
5.8 Customer Training ........................................................................................ 17
5.9 Equipment Return........................................................................................ 18

Section 6: Specifications............................................................................................. 19

Appendix A: Shortening or Lengthening the Sensing Element.................................. A-1


Introduction

Section 1: Introduction
These instructions are for the AMETEK Drexelbrook
Z-tron III Series Point Level Control.

The label on top of the electronic unit identifies the model number of the
Z-tron III level control.

If the model number on the electronic unit is a 402-3000, the


instructions are included in the 502-3000-LM Instruction Manual.
Both of these manuals can be downloaded from our resource library at
www.Drexelbrook.com

1.1 System Description


Cote-Shield action is designed into all Z-tron III level controls and
enables the instrument to ignore the effect of buildup or material coating
on the sensing element.

The electronic unit:


k air
Provides double-pole double-throw dry relay contact closure when
d d material reaches a specific point on the sensor. The relay contacts
C
A
k air C
A
k media may be used to operate alarms, solenoid valves, or other low power
devices.
k media Provides a 0-60 second time delay for agitated vessels.
kA kA The 700-series sensing element:
C= d C = d
Figure 1-1 Is mounted on the tank or in the process.
Capacitance Probe Provides a change in radio frequency (RF) admittance indicating
(Insulating Media) presence or absence of material.

1.2 Technology
In a simple capacitance probe type sensing element, when the level rises
and material covers the probe, the capacitance within the circuit between
the probe and the medium (conductive applications) or the probe and the
vessel wall (insulating applications) increases. This is due to the dielectric
constant (k) of the material, which causes a bridge misbalance. The signal
is demodulated (rectified), amplified and the output is increased. There
are drawbacks, however, especially when there is coating of the probe.
An RF Admittance level transmitter is the next generation. Although
similar to the capacitance concept, The Z-tron employs a radio frequency
signal and adds the Cote-Shield circuitry within the Electronics Unit.
This patented Cote-Shield circuitry is designed into Z-tron series and
enables the instrument to ignore the effect of buildup or material coating
Figure 1-2
on the sensing element. The sensing element is mounted in the vessel
RF Admittance Probe
and provides a change in RF admittance indicating presence or absence of
with Cote-Shield
material.
The Cote-Shield element of the sensor prevents the transmission of
RF current through the coating on the sensing element. The only path
to ground available for the RF current is through the material being
measured.
The result is an accurate measurement regardless of the amount of
coating on the probe, making it by far the most versatile technology, good
for very wide range conditions from cryogenics to high temperature, from
vacuum to 10,000 psi pressure, and works with all types of materials.

1
Z0X-2 Series Z-tron IIITM Point Level Control

1.3 Model Number

Technology
Z RF Admittance

Reserved for future use


0

Input
0 120Vac
1 24Vdc
3 230Vac

Output
2 Double Pole Double Throw Relay

Sensing Element
Application Sensing Element Pressure/Temperature Wetted Parts
05 General 700-0206-201 14bar@121C 316SS
Purpose (200psi@250F) & PEEK

Cote-ShieldTM Length
A 10 inch/254mm
B 3.5 inch/88.9mm
C 2 inch/51mm

Insertion Length (IL)


A 6 inch/152mm
B 12 inch/305mm
C 18 inch/457mm
D 36 inch/914mm
E 48 inch/1219mm
F 60 inch/1524mm
H 72 inch/1829mm
Z Other
{

2
Installation

Section 2: Installation
2.1 Unpacking
Carefully remove the contents of the shipping carton and
check each item against the packing list before destroying
any packing materials. If there is any shortage or damage,
report it to the factory at 1-800-527-6297 (US and Canada)
or + 215-674-1234 (International).

2.2 Mounting the Level Control


The Z-tron III Level Control is available with the
electronic unit and sensing element as a single integral
assembly. Extended sensing element lengths and special
mountings can be provided to fit specific applications.

The Z-tron III Level Control is designed for industrial


applications, but it should be mounted in a location as
free as possible from vibration, corrosive atmospheres,
or any possibility of mechanical damage.

For convenience when adjusting, place the electronic


unit in a reasonably accessible location. Ambient
temperature should be between -40F and 145F (-40C
to 63C).

It may be mounted either vertically or horizontally. See


Figures 2-1 and 2-2.

Avoid mounting closer than 1 inch to any tank


structure. Material bridging from structure to sensing
element can cause false alarms. Close proximity to tank
structure also increases the sensing elements standing
capacitance.

The actual mounting location often depends on the


placement of nozzles or openings into the vessel. Do not
mount the instrument through a nozzle which exceeds
the Cote-Shield element on the sensing element. See
Figure 2-1.

Protect the insulation on the sensing element against


cuts and scrapes during installation.

Figure 2-3 provides typical mounting dimensions.

3
Z0X-2 Series Z-tron IIITM Point Level Control

2.2 Mounting the Level Control (continued)


Best

Cote-shield must
All Connections Sealed Wall build-up extend through
and Gaskets In Place nozzle and wall
does not extend
past first build-up by 2".
insulator.

Best
No Nozzle

Wrong
WRONG CORRECT
Nozzle too long;
Cote-shield too short.
NOZZLE

Conduit
Breather
Good Drain NOZZLE
Long Nozzle

Factory-supplied Cote-shield
extends through nozzle and
wall build-up.

Figure 2-1
Z-tron III Level Control Mounting Recommendations

All Connections Sealed


and Gaskets In Place

WRONG CORRECT

CONDULET

Packing WRONG CORRECT


Gland Hold here when
tightening Conduit
Assembly
Breather
Do Not Condulet
Drain
Disturb!

Hold here to install


or remove Sensing
Element from
Vessel

WRONG CORRECT
Figure 2-2
Z-tron III Level Control Installation Guidelines
CONDULET

Packing
Gland Hold here when
Assembly tightening
4 Do Not Condulet
Disturb!
Introduction

2.3 Mounting Dimensions


4 1/2
(114) 4 1/2"
(114)
2 9/16
(65)

3 5/8
NEMA 4X (92)
ALUMINUM 3 3/4
HOUSING
(95)
ASSEMBLY
3/4 NPT
WIRE ENTRY
700-0206-SERIES 4 3/16
3-TERMINAL (106)
SENSING ELEMENT

3/4" NPT MOUNTING

A
7/8 DIA
CSL
(22)
C

I.L.

3/8 (9.5)
Figure 2-3
Mounting Dimensions, Integral Z-tron III Level Control

5
Z0X-2 Series Z-tron IIITM Point Level Control

2.4 Power Wiring


CAUTION

Do not open enclosure cover or make/break any


electrical connections without first
disconnecting electrical power at the source. Ensure
that area is non-hazardous. Ensure that wiring,
electrical fittings and conduit connections conform to
electrical codes for the specific location and hazard
level.

The Z-tron III level control is a general purpose device


and is not agency approved for use in hazardous
locations. If agency approval is required, contact your
local AMETEK Drexelbrook representative or call 1-
800-553-9092.

Refer to Figures 2-5 through 2-7 for the appropriate power


wiring and use the following procedure to wire the Z-tron III
level control:

1. Ensure that all power to the wiring is off.

2. Remove the cover.

3. The power connections are made to terminals 1, 2, and


3 on the electronic chassis as shown in Figures 2-5
through 2-7, using 12-28 gauge wire. The Z-tron III
level control requires at least 1 watt of power.

4. The alarm relays are wired as shown in Figure 2-8.

5. Review Checklist:

a. Wiring correct.

b. Input voltage matches instrument label.

c. Proper output connections.

6. Replace the cover prior to restoring power if in a


hazardous area.

7. Turn power on.

6
Installation

2.4 Power Wiring (continued)

Use 12-28 gauge wire.

Relay Connections

}
HOT (L2)
Neutral (L1) Power Connections
Ground (GND) (120Vac)
Figure 2-5
Wiring the (120 VAC) Electronic Unit

24 VAC
GND +

Use 12-28 gauge wire.

Relay Connections

}
+
Power Connections
(24Vdc)
Figure 2-6
Wiring the (24 VDC) Electronic Unit

240 VAC

Use 12-28 gauge wire.

Relay Connections

}
HOT (L2)
Neutral (L1) Power Connections
Ground (GND) (240Vac)
Figure 2-7
Wiring the (240 VAC) Electronic Unit

7
Z0X-2 Series Z-tron IIITM Point Level Control

2.5 Relay Wiring


Refer to Figure 2-8 for the relay contact wiring. The Z-tron
III relay has double-pole, double-throw (DPDT) dry contacts.
The relay serves as a switch and does not provide the power
to operate an annunciator or other equipment. All relay
connections are made to the terminal strip on the electronic
unit.

HIGH LEVEL
HIGH LEVEL
FAIL-SAFE FAIL-SAFE

Switch 1 RIGHT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
ON
= High Level Fail Safe 1
2

LED ON
(NORMAL) Level Below Sensing Element
TANK EMPTY

HIGH LEVEL HIGH LEVEL


FAIL-SAFE FAIL-SAFE

Switch 1 RIGHT ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
= High Level Fail Safe 1
2
LED OFF
(ALARM)
Level Above Sensing Element
TANK FULL

N.C. =
Normally Closed

N.O. = LOW LEVEL LOW LEVEL


Normally Open FAIL-SAFE FAIL-SAFE

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Switch 1 LEFT ON
= Low Level Fail Safe 1
2
LED OFF
(ALARM) Level Below Sensing Element
TANK EMPTY

LOW LEVEL LOW LEVEL


FAIL-SAFE FAIL-SAFE

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Switch 1 LEFT ON
1
= Low Level Fail Safe 2

LED ON
(NORMAL) Level Above Sensing Element
TANK FULL

Figure 2-8
Wiring the Relays

8
Operation

Section 3: Operation
This section describes the operating switches of the Z-tron
III level control. Remove the dome lid and use a small
screwdriver to set the operating controls.
3.1 Setpoint Control
There is a single operating point adjustment used to control
the level at which the relay operates. See Figures 2-8 & 3-1.

This adjustment is an 20-turn potentiometer and does


not have a mechanical stop. When in High Level Fail
Safe condition, if light (LED) is ON - turn CCW to find
SP (relay changes state w/click & light turns OFF)...
turn CW if light is initially OFF. Opposite is true in
Low Level Fail Safe.
Turning the setpoint adjustment clockwise (CW) raises
the level at which the relay operates.
Turning the setpoint counterclockwise (CCW) lowers the
level at which the relay operates.
The LED (on) indicates that the relay is energized.
Hold-down Screws

LED
(Alarm when
Setpoint NOT illuminated)
Adjustment
Time Delay
Adjustment
Switch 1 LEFT = Low Level Fail Safe
Switch 1 RIGHT = High Level Fail Safe ON
1
2
Switch 2 LEFT = Reverse Time Delay
Switch 2 RIGHT = Forward Time Delay

Figure 3-1
Z-tron III Operating Controls and LED

3.2 Time Delay Control


The time delay adjustment is located on top of the
instrument, as shown in Figure 3-1. It is used to help stop
an oscillating relay output due to agitation or waves in the
vessel.

CAUTION:
THIS adjustment is a 270 (34 turn) potentiometer. Do
not turn it beyond its mechanical stops or damage to
unit may occur.

The unit is shipped with the Time Delay set to zero (0)
seconds. Using a small screwdriver, turn the adjustment
clockwise to set anywhere from 0 to 60 seconds.

9
Z0X-2 Series Z-tron IIITM Point Level Control

3.3 Time Delay Action


Time delay action describes whether the relay contacts are
delayed from going into the alarm state or recovering from an
alarm state.
FWD: Forward delays the system from coming OUT of
alarm.
REV: Reverse delays the system from going INTO
alarm.
The instrument is supplied with the time delay action
set in the forward mode position.
The time delay action may be selected in the field using
the slide switch #2 located on the top of the instrument.
See Figure 3-1.
Selecting Time Delay with Slide Switch #2:
Forward Acting - Switch #2 is ON, or to the RIGHT.
Reverse Acting - Switch #2 is OFF, or to the LEFT.
3.4 Failsafe
Failsafe describes the level condition which causes the
output relay to de-energize, and determines the condition
of the relay upon loss of power or upon the failure of most
components.
The failsafe mode may be selected in the field by
changing the position of slide switch #1 located on the
top of the instrument. See Figure 3-1.
High Level Failsafe (HLFS) means the relay will de-
energize when level is high, indicating high level upon
loss of power. (N.O. contacts open/N.C. contacts closed)
Low Level Failsafe (LLFS) means the relay will de-
energize when level is low, indicating low level upon loss
of power. (N.O. contacts open/N.C. contacts closed)
The instrument is supplied in the failsafe mode that is
requested when the order is placed. If none specified, it
will be shipped as High Level Failsafe (HLFS).

Selecting Failsafe with Slide Switch #1:


High Level Failsafe (HLFS) - Switch #1 is ON, or to the
RIGHT.
Low Level Failsafe (LLFS) - Switch #1 is OFF, or to the
LEFT.

3.5 Start-up
Before applying power to the instrument, be sure that the
power wiring is correct. See Section 2.3.

10
Calibration

Section 4: Calibration
This section contains the calibration information for the
Z-tron III Level Control.

CAUTION:
Do not open enclosure cover or make/break any
electrical connections without first disconnecting
electrical power at the source. Ensure that area is
non-hazardous. Ensure that wiring, electrical fittings
and conduit connections conform to the electrical
codes for the specific location.
The Z-tron III level control is a general purpose device
and is not agency approved for use in hazardous
locations. If agency approval is required, contact your
local AMETEK Drexelbrook representative or call
1-800-553-909
4.1 Calibration in Conducting Material
All Z-tron III controls are factory set to switch in water-
based conducting materials [setpoint adjustment is set to
full clockwise (CW) position]. No calibration adjustment is
necessary.
If this instrument had been previously adjusted for use in a
insulating materials, and is now intended for use in a
conducting material, use a small screwdriver to turn the
setpoint adjustment to the full clockwise (CW) position. No
other adjustment is necessary.

4.2 Calibration in Insulating Material [Horizontal Mount]


Use the following procedure:
1. Be sure the material level is well below the sensing
element. See Figure 4-1.
2.. Turn the setpoint adjustment to the full
counterclockwise (CCW) position.
This 20-turn potentiometer does not have a
mechanical stop. Turn 20 times to assure that you are
at the extreme end. No damage will occur.
The LED (on) indicates that the relay is energized or
in normal condition (not alarm).
3. Turn setpoint adjustment slowly clockwise (CW) until
the relay just operates. (LED changes state).
4. Increase the material level until it is well above the
sensing element. See Figure 4-2. (LED changes state).
5. Mentally note the position of the screwdriver.
6. Counting the number of turns, turn the setpoint
adjustment slowly clockwise (CW) until the relay once
again just operates.

11
Z0X-2 Series Z-tron IIITM Point Level Control

4.2 Calibration in Insulating Material [Horizontal Mount]- (Continued)


If less than one turn of the adjustment was observed
between the sensing element covered and uncovered,
the sensor is not generating enough signal. Consult
the factory for further options.
7. Turn the adjustment back counterclockwise (CCW) one
half the number of turns that were counted.
8. Record number of turns and save for future calibration
reference
Calibration is now complete.

4.3 Calibration in Insulating Material [Vertical Mount]


This 20-turn potentiometer does not have a
mechanical stop. Turn 20 times to assure that you are
at the extreme end. No damage will occur.
The LED (on) indicates that the relay is energized or in
normal condition (not alarm).
1. Set the level to a point on the active section of the
sensing element where control is desired (3 inches [76.2
mm] of coverage minimum). See Figure 4-3.
2. Start from the full counterclockwise (CCW) position.
Turn the setpoint adjustment clockwise (CW) until the
relay just operates (LED changes states).
If dielectric constant or conductivity of material
changes, point of operation may change. Consult
factory.
Calibration is now complete.

DESIRED
CONTROL
POINT

Figure 4-1 Figure 4-2 Figure 4-3


Level Below Horizontal Level Above Horizontal Level Covering Vertical
Sensing Element Sensing Element Sensing Element

12
Troubleshooting

Section 5: Troubleshooting
5.1 Introduction
The Z-tron III Level Control is a solid-state device with
no moving parts other than its relays, and requires no
maintenance or adjustments. The units are designed to give
years of unattended service.

A spare electronic chassis is recommended for every 10 units


so that, in case of a failed unit, a critical application will not
be delayed while the unit is returned to the factory for repair.

Use the following troubleshooting procedures to check out the


Z-tron III Level Control. If attempts to locate the difficulty
fail, notify your local Drexelbrook representative, or call the
factory direct at 1-800-527-6297 (US and Canada) or
+1 215-674-1234 (International).
5.2 Testing Electronic Unit
It is recommended to begin with Electronic Unit:

1. Verify that voltage is reaching unit.

2. Change fail-safe selector switch (Fig 3-1). If LED does


not change state along with relays, Electronic Unit has
failed.

3. Remove power from unit, loosen hold-down screws , then


remove unit, and SAFELY reapply power.

4. As in Section 3.1, start with setpoint adjustment


in extreme counterclockwise (CCW) position, turn
screwdriver clockwise (CW) until relay just operates.

5. Rotate setpoint adjustment back and forth about this


point, observing travel of screwdriver between relay
pull-in and relay drop-out. If properly operating,
screwdriver should travel less than 14 turn to operate
the relay. If not, Electric Unit has failed.

5.3 Testing Sensing Element


Be sure to first test Electronic Unit. Then:

1. Remove Electric Unit, as above, but do not apply power.

2. Use an analog ohmmeter1 that is set to the R x 1K ohm


scale. Measure the resistances between each pair of
sensing element connections. See Figure 5-1.

Center spring to housing __________ohms


Center spring to outer spring __________ohms
Outer spring to housing __________ohms

13
Z0X-2 Series Z-tron IIITM Point Level Control

5.3 Testing Sensing Element (continued)


3. A new sensing element that is clean and not coated
or wet should look like an open circuit on all sensing
element tests.
4. If the sensing element is clean and dry, and shows
resistance between terminals of less than 10K ohms, it
is possible that moisture has soaked into the packing
gland of the sensing element. In this case, the sensing
element may need to be dried until the resistance
increases to its maximum value.
5. If the process material is conductive, you may read some
resistance between sensing element connections. The
lowest permissible resistance values are:

Center spring to housing 1000 ohms.


Center spring to outer spring 600 ohms.
Outer spring to housing 300 ohms.
6. Resistance values lower than this could mean:
Extremely conductive coating on probe, which is an
application problem. You may wish to call the factory for
suggestions for another technique.
Probe is damaged and needs to be replaced.
Probe is touching vessel.
7. A resistance reading of less than 10 ohms on any
sensing element terminal is usually due to a metal-to-
metal short circuit. Check that the sensing element is
not touching any vessel structure.
1
An analog ohmmeter has a lower ohms/volt rating and
provides more current to measure the resistance than a
digital ohmmeter.
ANALOG ANALOG
OHMMETER OHMMETER

TO CENTER TO OUTER
CONDUCTOR GROUNDED CONDUCTOR GROUNDED
SPRING TO SPRING TO
HOUSING HOUSING

PACKING PACKING
GLAND GLAND
DO NOT DISTURB DO NOT DISTURB

Figure 5-1
Checking the Sensing Element
Center Spring = Probe
Outer Spring = Shield
Housing = Ground

PROBE MEASUREMENT SHIELD MEASUREMENT

14
Troubleshooting

5.4 Testing Relay Circuits


Using an ohmmeter, perform the following steps to check out
the relay circuits:

1. The relay circuits consist of double-pole double-throw


relay contacts brought out to terminal strips. When
the relays are operating properly, one pair of contacts
will be open with high or low level, and one pair will be
closed with high or low level. Refer to Figures 2-10 and
5-2.

2. Relay operation may generally be heard as an audible


click when the background noise is not too high. Use
one of the methods shown in Figure 5-3 to determine if
the relay contacts are switching.

3. Difficulty in calibration can often be traced to improper


wiring of the relay terminals to an annunciator or other
panel device. Check the wiring against the relay chart in
Figure 2-10.

Figure 5-2
Relay Circuit Operation

OHMMETER

OR

115Vac LAMP

115Vac

Figure 5-3
Relay Circuit Troubleshooting

15
Z0X-2 Series Z-tron IIITM Point Level Control

5.5 Possible Problems and Causes

Problem Possible Cause Solution


1. Instrument indicates a. Severe coating build upon a. Need longer Cote-Shield.
alarm at all times. sensing element (HLFS). Consult factory.
b. Sensing element not b. Need longer insertion
seeing material (LLFS) length. Consult factory.
due to fill angle. c. See Section 5.3.
c. Defect in sensing element. d. Check power wiring.
d. Loss of power. See Figure 2-4.
e. Improper relay wiring. e. See Section 2.5.
f. Improper calibration. f. See Section 4.
g. Electronic unit g. See Section 5.2.
malfunction. h. See Section 5.3.
h. Shorted sensor. i. Consult factory.
i. Water in housing or
conduit.

2. Instrument never a. Severe coating build-up on a. Need longer Cote-Shield.


indicates alarm. sensing element (LLFS). Consult factory.
b. Sensing element not b. Need longer insertion
seeing material (HLFS) length. Consult factory.
due to fill angle. c. See Section 2.
c. Improper wiring. d. See Section 4.
d. Improper calibration. e. See Section 5.2.
e. Electronic unit
malfunction.

3. Instrument cant be a. Improper wiring. a. See Section 2.


calibrated. b. Insufficient signal from b. Need longer insertion
sensing element. length. Consult factory.
c. Setpoint is beyond the c. Consult factory.
tuning range of the e. See Section 5.2.
electronics.
d. Electronic unit
malfunction
e. Sensor covered with
conducting material.

4. Instrument gives a false a. Improper calibration. a. See Section 4.


alarm. b. Loose wiring. b. See Section 2.
c. Electronic unit c. See Section 5.2.
malfunction. d. Consult factory.
d. Time delay required. e. See Section 5.3.
e. Intermittent short of
sensor.

5. Instrument operates a. Improper calibration. a. See Section 4.


intermittently. b. Loose wiring. b. See Section 2.
c. Electronic unit c. See Section 5.2.
malfunction. d. Need high sensitivity unit.
d. Dielectric (k) of material Consult factory.
is too low.

16
Troubleshooting

5.6 Factory Assistance


AMETEK Drexelbrook can answer any questions about The
Z-tron III series instrument. Call Customer Service at
1-800-553-9092 (US and Canada) or
+1 215 674-1234 (International).

If you require assistance and attempts to locate the problem


have failed:

Contact your local Drexelbrook representative,

Telephone the Service department toll-free:


1-800-527-6297 (US and Canada)
+1 215 674-1234 (International)

FAX: Service Department + 215-443-5117


E-Mail: drexelbrook.service@ametek.com

Please provide the following information:

Instrument Model Number


Sensing Element Model Number and Length
Original Purchase Order Number
Material being measured
Temperature
Pressure
Agitation
Brief description of the problem
Checkout procedures that have failed

5.7 Field Service


Trained field servicemen are available on a time-plus-
expense basis to assist in start-ups, diagnosing difficult
application problems, or in-plant training of personnel.
Contact the service department for further details.

5.8 Customer Training


Periodically, AMETEK Drexelbrook instrument training
seminars for customers are held at the factory. These
sessions are guided by Drexelbrook engineers and specialists,
and provide detailed information on all aspects of level
measurement, including theory and practice of instrument
operation. For more information write to:
AMETEK Drexelbrook, Communications/ Training Group
or call 215-674-1234.

17
Z0X-2 Series Z-tron IIITM Point Level Control

5.9 Equipment Return


In order to provide the best service, any equipment being
returned for repair or credit must be pre-approved by the
factory.

In many applications, sensing elements are exposed to


hazardous materials.
OSHA mandates that our employees be informed and
protected from hazardous chemicals.

Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) listing the


hazardous materials to which the sensing element has
been exposed MUST accompany any repair.

It is your responsibility to fully disclose all chemicals


and decontaminate the sensing element.

To obtain a return authorization (RA#), contact the


Service department at 1-800-527-6297 (US and Canada) or
+ 215-674-1234 (International).

Please provide the following information:

Model Number of Return Equipment

Serial Number

Original Purchase Order Number

Process Materials to which the equipment has been


exposed.

MSDS sheets for any hazardous materials

Billing Address

Shipping Address

Purchase Order Number for Repairs

Please include a purchase order even if the repair is


under warranty. If repair is covered under warranty,
you will not be charged.

Ship equipment freight prepaid to:

AMETEK-DREXELBROOK.
205 KEITH VALLEY ROAD
HORSHAM, PA 19044-1499
COD shipments will not be accepted.

18
Specifications

Section 6: Specifications
Power Requirements:
AC Units:
95-145 Vac, 50/60 Hz, 1 Watt
215-265 Vac, 50/60 Hz, 1 Watt

DC Units:
24 Vdc Unit: 19-29 Vdc input, 1 Watt

Sensitivity:
0.3pF or less

Load Resistance:
Center to Ground, 1500 ohms
Center to Shield, 750 ohms
Shield to Ground, 750 ohms

Failsafe:
Field adjustable to either High-Level Fail-Safe (HLFS)
or
Low-Level Fail-Safe (LLFS)

Output:
DPDT relay closure

Contact Rating:
5A @ 120 Vac non-inductive
2A @ 230 Vac non-inductive

Ambient Temperature:
-40F to 145F (-40C to 60C)

Temperature Effect:
0.5pF/50F

Line Voltage Effect:


0.2pF/20V @ 120 Vac

Stability:
0.15pF/6 mo. maximum shift

Spark Protection:
100 Amp

Mounting:
34-inch NPT standard

19
Z0X-2 Series Z-tron IIITM Point Level Control

Section 6: Specifications (Continued)


Housing:
The standard explosionproof housing meets the following
classifications:

Nema 1 General-Purpose
Nema 2 Drip-Tight
Nema 3 Weather-Resistant
Nema 4 Waterproof
Nema 5 Dust-Tight
Nema 12 Industrial Use

FM approved for Class I, Groups A, B, C, and D (Div. 1


or 2) and Class II, Groups E, F, and G, (Div. 1 or 2). FM
approval on housing only. If agency approval is required,
use the Drexelbrook 506-6000 LCS instrument for point
level control.

Time Delay:
0-60 seconds

Sensing Element:

Sensing Process Process Center


Element Temperature Wetted Rod
Model and Pressure Parts O.D.
Number

700-206-201 250F @ 200 psi 316 SS and Peek 3/8 inch

20
Appendix

Appendix A:Shortening or Lengthening the Sensing Element

The Need
Sometimes your application calls for probe lengths
CAUTION: other than the standard 18-inch or longer insertion
The insulation length of
lengths supplied. Shortening the sensing element is
either Flush Sensing
quite simple and can be done in the field. Lengthening
Elements or Insulated
Sensing Elements can the sensing element, however, is more difficult because
NOT be changed. Cable the metal rod, typically 304 SS or 316 SS, must be
Sensing Elements welded.
can only be shortened.
Instructions are included Before making any Adjustments:
with each unit. 1) Read the following instructions thoroughly.
2) Remove power.
3) Disconnect the electronics.
4) Protect electronics from any static discharge.
5) Protect electronics from any heat.

Shortening
The bare metal center rod of the sensing element can
NOTE: be shortened with a hacksaw. Be careful not to cut
Insulators Cote-Shield either of the two insulators. See Figure on this page.
element must
NEVER be
modified. In applications using conductive or water-based
materials, shortening is not a problem. Leave a
minimum bare metal center rod length of two (2)
inches.

For dry granular materials, such as powder, sand,


Insertion Length corn, clinker, etc., you must leave a minimum bare
(18" or 36" std.) metal center rod length of eight (8) inches. Consult the
factory before shortening beyond this point.

Center Rod Lengthening


To lengthen the sensing element, an extension rod can
be welded onto the end of the bare metal center rod.
Make sure that the extension rod is the same metal as
Note: the sensing element.
Any changes to probe
length after calibration An alternate option is to add a pipe coupling and a
requires re calibration to section of metal pipe after threading the tip of the
ensure proper operation. sensing element. In this case, the metal pipe need not
be identical to the metal of the sensing element.

A-1
205 Keith Valley Road, Horsham, PA 19044
US and Canada: 1-800-553-9092
International: +1 215-674-1234
24-Hour Service: +1 215-527-6297
Fax: +1 215-674-2731
An ISO 9001 Certified Company E-mail: drexelbrook.info@ametek.com
Website: www.drexelbrook.com
Product Data Sheet
00813-0100-2654, Rev DA
September 2003 Volume 1

Temperature Sensors and Accessories


(Volume 1)

Content
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2
Threaded Mount Sensors and Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9
Ordering Tables
Series 68 RTD Sensor Assemblies WITHOUT Thermowell. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 12
Series 68 RTD Sensor Assemblies WITH Thermowell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 14
Series 78 RTD Sensor Assemblies WITHOUT Thermowell. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 19
Series 78 RTD Sensor Assemblies WITH Thermowell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 21
Series 68Q Sanitary Platinum RTD Sensor Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 26
Series 58C Cut-to-Fit RTD Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 28
Series 58C Spare Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 28
Series 183 Thermocouple Sensor Assemblies WITHOUT Thermowell . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 30
Series 183 Thermocouple Sensor Assemblies WITH Thermowell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 32
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 36
Mounting Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 48
Ordering Tables
Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 48
Connection Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 49
Compression Fittings, 316 SST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 50
Series 91 Thermowells. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 55
Hazardous Area Approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 64
Configuration Data Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 69

www.rosemount.com
Product Data Sheet
00813-0100-2654, Rev DA
Volume 1 September 2003

Introduction
OVERVIEW Hazardous Area Approvals

Emerson Process Management offers a wide variety Includes descriptions of the FM, CSA, and
of RTD and thermocouple sensors that are available CENELEC approvals for sensors and
connection heads.
alone or as complete assemblies including
connection heads, thermowells, and extension Configuration Data Sheet
fittings. In addition to complete assemblies, Emerson Provides a form used for thermowell
Process Management offers heads, coupling/nipple application calculations.
and union/nipple extensions, compression fittings,
and thermowells. Series 58C, 68, 68Q, and 78 platinum RTD
temperature sensors are primarily used when high
Using this Product Data Sheet (PDS) accuracy, durability, and long-term stability are
required. These sensors conform to international
Use this PDS to order complete temperature sensor standards: IEC-751, EN 60751, and BS EN 60751.(1)
assemblies, which include sensors, thermowells,
extensions, and connection heads. These options Series 58C platinum RTD temperature sensors:
can also be ordered separately. For example, you Combine an economical thin-film design with a
can order a thermowell, extension, or connection sheath that can be shortened to any length
head for use with an existing sensor. In each case it with tubing cutter.
is important to know and understand the sections of
Series 68Q Quick Response Sanitary RTD sensors:
this PDS when specifying the items.
Conform to 3A Sanitary Standards and
Threaded Sensors and Assemblies feature product contact surfaces designed for
Includes descriptions, specifications, and CIP cleaning.
ordering information for Series 58C, 68, 68Q, Series 68 platinum RTD temperature sensors:
and 78 RTDs, and the Series 183
thermocouples. Provide high performance in an economical
thin-film design.
Includes information for ordering sensors,
connection heads, extensions, and Series 78 platinum RTDs temperature sensors:
thermowells as complete assemblies. Use a wire-wound element which allows for a
broader measurement range.
Calibration
Includes characterization schedules and Thermocouples
information for ordering calibrated Series 68,
68Q, and 78 RTD Sensors. Series 183 thermocouple temperature sensors
conform to ASTM E-230, and are available in types
Includes information regarding the use of
J, K, E, and T.
Callendar-Van Dusen constants to match
specific Series 68, 68Q, and 78 RTDs to Series 183 thermocouple temperature sensors are
Rosemount Smart Temperature Transmitters. available:
Mounting Accessories grounded or ungrounded
Includes descriptions, specifications, and isolated or unisolated
ordering information for temperature with immersion lengths from 2 to 48 inches.
accessories such as thermowells, extensions,
connection heads, mounting adapters, lead
wire extensions, connectors, seals, and
thermowells.

(1) 100 ohms at 0 C,  = 0.00385 ohms/ohm/C

-2
Product Data Sheet
00813-0100-2654, Rev DA
September 2003 Volume 1

The Use of 2-, 3-, and 4- wire RTDs

To help you attain the highest possible temperature measurement accuracy, Rosemount provides 4-wire sensors
for all single element RTDs. You can use these RTDs in 2-, 3-, or 4-wire configurations by simply securing the
unneeded leads with tape. To properly wire the 4-wire RTD for use in a 2-, 3-, or 4-wire configuration, refer to the
following wiring diagrams:

2-wire Configuration
2-wire RTDs provide one connection to each end of the sensor. In a 2-wire
configuration, lead wires add resistance to the circuit which cannot be compensated.
The 2-wire configuration is rarely used because the added lead wire resistance can
cause substantial errors in the temperature reading.

3-wire Configuration
3-wire RTDs provide one connection to one end of the sensor, and two connections to
the other end. The 3-wire approach does not eliminate all lead wire effects. However,
for sensors with lead wires of the same length, lead wire effects are slight, and the
approach provides reasonable accuracy.

4-wire Configuration
The most effective way to eliminate lead wire effects is with two connections at each
end of the sensor. 4-wire RTDs fully compensate for lead wire effects.

Benefits and Limitations of RTDs when compared to Thermocouples


Benefits:
Higher accuracy
Better linearity and long-term stability
Cold junction compensation not required
Special extension lead wire not required
Less susceptible to noise
Can be matched to a Rosemount transmitter with transmitter sensor matching
Limitations
Lower maximum temperature limit
Slower response time in applications without a thermowell

-3
Product Data Sheet
00813-0100-2654, Rev DA
Volume 1 September 2003

HOW TO DECIDE WHAT TO ORDER

Start
(Select One)

Is a sensor for an Is a thermowell for an


Is a sensor with a existing thermowell existing sensor
thermowell needed? needed? needed?

Yes Yes Yes

Refer to Table 1. Do any Select a sensor without a Select a thermowell


standard lagging thermowell
length/immersion length
combinations meet the
requirements?

Yes No

Select a sensor with 1. Select a sensor


a thermowell without a thermowell
combination combination

2. Select a thermowell
Finish

-4
Product Data Sheet
00813-0100-2654, Rev DA
September 2003 Volume 1

SPRING-LOADED SENSOR DIMENSIONS


When a spring-loaded sensor is used properly, the spring should be compressed approximately 1/2-inch. Therefore, all measurements of
spring-loaded sensors are made with the spring compressed. If you measure an existing spring-loaded sensor while it is in a relaxed state, you
must subtract 1/2-inch to arrive at the installed length (X) that must be ordered. See Figure 1.

FIGURE 1. Spring Loaded Sensors Dimensions

Compressed Spring Loaded Sensor

3.45 (88) Installed (X) Length


Max. [Spring Compressed

Sensors-0005C
0.5 (13) nominal]

Spring loaded sensor in a compressed state: The actual sensor length is measured when the spring is compressed approximately 1/2-in.
shorter than the relaxed sensor.
Relaxed Spring Loaded Sensor

2.95 (88) Max.


Installed (X) Length + 0.5 in.

Sensors-0005D
Spring loaded sensor in a relaxed state: Normally, when a spring loaded sensor is measured, it is in a relaxed state. You must subtract 1/2-in.
from your measurement to order a replacement sensor. Rosemount Inc. assumes that the sensor length you specify is that of a compressed
sensor.

Determining the Length (L) of a spring-loaded sensor to be used with an existing non-Rosemount Thermowell
See Figure 1, Figure 3, and Figure 4.

1. Remove the existing generic sensor from the installed thermowell. Length Code Key
2. Measure the sensor length with the spring in the relaxed state (as shown in L Thermowell length minus 0.25 in.
Figure 1). Measure from the tip of the sensor to the maximum thread engagement U Immersion length into process
point (0.53 in. into the threads). T Lagging length
3. Subtract 0.5 inches from your measurement. The resulting length is (X). E Extension fitting length
4. If the sensor is installed with an extension, measure the extension length (E), as X Sensor length
shown in Figure 4. If the sensor is not installed with an extension, let (E) = 0. Use the following equations to determine
5. Since (X) = (E) + (L), subtract (E) from (X) to find (L). all lengths
Use the resulting length (L) in the Section 2 ordering tables to choose the correct length
L = U + T + 1.5
of sensor. X=E+L
X = E + U + T + 1.5

-5
Product Data Sheet
00813-0100-2654, Rev DA
Volume 1 September 2003

FIGURE 2. Thermowell Dimensions (use with Table 1)

Sensor with Thermowell (no extensions)

0.25-in.
L

Sensors-0007B
T U
1.75-in.

TABLE 1. Dimensions for thermowells when ordered with sensors (U), (L), and (T). Use with Figure 2.

Dimensions (in.)(1)
Code (U) (L) (T) Code (U) (L) (T) Code (U) (L) (T)
020 2.0 4.0 0.5 090 9.0 12.0 1.5 160 16.0 18.0 0.5
025 2.5 4.0 0.0 095 9.5 12.0 1.0 165 16.5 18.0 0.0
030 3.0 6.0 1.5 100 10.0 12.0 0.5 170 17.0 21.0 2.5
035 3.5 6.0 1.0 105 10.5 12.0 0.0 175 17.5 21.0 2.0
040 4.0 6.0 0.5 110 11.0 15.0 2.5 180 18.0 21.0 1.5
045 4.5 6.0 0.0 115 11.5 15.0 2.0 185 18.5 21.0 1.0
050 5.0 9.0 2.5 120 12.0 15.0 1.5 190 19.0 21.0 0.5
055 5.5 9.0 2.0 125 12.5 15.0 1.0 195 19.5 21.0 0.0
060 6.0 9.0 1.5 130 13.0 15 0.5 200 20.0 24.0 2.5
065 6.5 9.0 1.0 135 13.5 15.0 0.0 205 20.5 24.0 2.0
070 7.0 9.0 0.5 140 14.0 18.0 2.5 210 21.0 24.0 1.5
075 7.5 9.0 0.0 145 14.5 18.0 2.0 215 21.5 24.0 1.0
080 8.0 12.0 2.5 150 15.0 18.0 1.5 220 22.0 24.0 0.5
085 8.5 12.0 2.0 155 15.5 18.0 1.0 225 22.5 24.0 0.0

(1) L = U + T + 1.5

Ordering a Sensor and a Thermowell


See Figure 2 and Table 1 and Figure 3 and Figure 4. Use the following Procedure to determine if a standard lagging length can be use with the
sensor and thermowell.

1. Determine the (U), (T), and (E) lengths necessary for your installation. Length Code Key
If you do not need an extension, (E) = 0 (zero). L Thermowell length minus 0.25 in.
Note: If your existing sensor/thermowell combination is different than Figure 3, refer to U Immersion length into process
the drawings on the following pages. T Lagging length
2. Find your immersion length (U) on Table 1 above and compare the corresponding E Extension fitting length
lagging length (T) to the lagging length that you previously determined. X Sensor length
3. If your lengths match the values on the line that corresponds to your required
immersion length, order your sensor and thermowell together.
Use the following equations to determine
all lengths
If your lengths do not match the values on the line that corresponds to your measured
immersion length, order your sensor and thermowell separately. Solve for (L) using the L = U + T + 1.5
equation (L) = (U) + (T) + 1.5 (since (L) is required when ordering the sensor separately X = E + L
from the thermowell). X = E + U + T + 1.5

-6
Product Data Sheet
00813-0100-2654, Rev DA
September 2003 Volume 1
FIGURE 3. Series 68, 78, and 183 Sensor Assembly Dimensional Drawings

Capsule Sensor Only

1.75 (44) Nominal (X) Length


Lead Wires (see Table 2)

Sensors-0007A
0.25 (6)
1.25 (32)

Housing Diameter (see Table 2)


0.6 (15) Max. Sensing Element*
* Maximum sensing element length for Series 78 dual-element = 1-in. (25 mm)
General Purpose Sensor Assembly

3.2 (81) Max. Nominal (X) Length**


Lead Wires (see Table 2)
Weld 360 0.25 (6)

Sensors-0008A
0.25 (6)

Fixed-Position Process Mounting 0.6 (15) Max. Sensing Element*


Connection (1/214 ANPT, both sides) 0.53 (13) Max. Thread Engagement

* Maximum sensing element length for Series 78 dual-element = 1-in. (25 mm)
** Actual length is 0.25 (6) less to avoid bottoming in thermowell
Spring Loaded Sensor Assembly

Installed (X) Length **


Lead Wires (see Table 2) 3.45 (88)
Max.

Sensors-0000B06A
0.25 (6)

0.6 (15) Max. Sensing Element*


Spring-Positioned Process Mounting 0.53 (13) Max. Thread Engagement
Connection (1/214 ANPT, both sides)
* Maximum sensing element length for Series 78 dual-element = 1-in. (25 mm)
** Spring Compressed 0.5 (13)
Bayonet Spring Loaded Sensor Assembly

4.75 (121) Installed (X)


Max. Length **
2.5 (64) 0.6 (15) Max. Sensing Element*
Max.

0.25 (6)

Sensors-3144-07A
Bayonet Adapter Mounting Connection 0.53 (13) Max. Thread Engagement
(1/214 ANPT, both sides)

Spring is shown compressed 0.5 -in.(13 mm.) Do not adjust the equations in Table 2 when calculating X, L, U, and T lengths. The equation
already accounts for spring compression.
* Maximum sensing element length for Series 78 dual-element = 1-in. (25 mm)
** Spring Compressed 0.5 (13)
Dimensions are in inches (millimeters)

TABLE 2. Sensor Series and Dimensions


Series Housing Diameter Lead Wires Lead Wire Length Series Housing Diameter Lead Wires Lead Wire Length
in mm in mm in mm in mm
68 0.350 8.0 4 6.0 152.4 183 single 0.375 9.53 2 6.0 152.4
78 single 0.350 8.0 4 6.0 152.4 183 dual 0.375 9.53 4 12.0 304.8
78 dual 0.350 8.0 6 6.0 152.4

-7
Product Data Sheet
00813-0100-2654, Rev DA
Volume 1 September 2003

FIGURE 4. Series 68, 78, and 183 Sensor Assembly Length Code Drawings

Sensor with Thermowell (No Extension)

X 0.25 (6)
Sensor Mounting Connection
L

Sensors-0007A
T + 1.75 (44) U

Sensor with Extension (No Thermowell)

Nipple
Coupling
1
/214 ANPT Thread
Sensor Mounting Connection

Sensors-0008A
E L

Sensor Installed in Connection Head (Flat Cover) with Union and Nipple Extensions and Thermowell

0.25 (6)
X

5.5 (140)
Extended Cover
3.5 (89) E L
Flat
Cover Union
Nipple

Sensor Mounting Thermowell


Connection
Sensors-000B06A

T + 1.75 (44) U
3/414 ANPT

Chain
Dimensions are in inches (millimeters)

-8
Product Data Sheet
00813-0100-2654, Rev DA
September 2003 Volume 1

Threaded Sensors and Assemblies


Series 68, 68Q, and 78 RTD and Series 183 Thermocouple One assembly model number, derived from one ordering table,
Sensors may be ordered as complete assemblies. These completely defines the type of sensing element, as well as the
assemblies provide a complete, yet simple means of specifying material, length, and style of both the extension fittings and
the proper industrial hardware for most temperature thermowells. All sensor assemblies are sized and inspected by
measurements. Rosemount Inc. to ensure complete component compatibility and
performance.

FIGURE 5. Individual Components of a Complete Temperature Assembly

Standard Adapter Sensor Assembly


X
Optional Identification Tag
0.5 (13) Nominal Engagement

Extensions
Coupling-Nipple

E L

0.5 (13) Nominal


Engagement
Lead Wire Extensions and Seals
Union-Nipple

Threaded

Welded

Thermowells
Flanged
Flat or Extended Cover Aluminum Connection Heads

Threaded

Welded

Sensors-0009A04A
Flanged
Polypropylene Connection Head

Dimensions are in inches (millimeters)

-9
Product Data Sheet
00813-0100-2654, Rev DA
Volume 1 September 2003

MOUNTING CONFIGURATIONS SERIES 68 PLATINUM RTD


Rosemount Series 68 RTD temperature sensors measure from
Capsule 50 to 400 C (58 to 752 F). Series 68 sensors are available in
Capsules are designed for direct immersion without mounting capsule, general purpose, and spring-loaded designs in sensor
fittings. Accessory compression fittings are available for adjustable lengths from 1 to 48 inches.
mounting into a thermowell. See Mounting Adapters for Series 58, Table 3 shows the interchangeability of the Series 68 RTD. As an
68, 78, and 183. option, for maximum system accuracy, Rosemount Inc. can
provide sensor calibration. See Sensor Characterization
General-Purpose Sensor Assemblies (Calibration) Schedules Option Code V. In addition, Rosemount
Designed with a welded, fixed-position 1/214 ANPT process Inc. offers optional sensor-to-transmitter matching capability
connection fitting for direct immersion or thermowell applications, obtainable through the use of Callendar-Van Dusen Constants.
this sensor design provides a moisture-proof and vapor-tight seal. See Option Code V Callendar-van Dusen Constants.
The maximum static working pressure at 20 C (68 F) with no
TABLE 3. Series 68 Interchangeability
vibration or flow condition is 31.59 MPa (3,500 psig). The use of a
thermowell is recommended for process pressure containment. 0.55 C (0.99 F) at -50 C (-58 F)
Note that standard lengths are 1/4 inch less than nominal 0.30 C (0.54 F) at 0 C (32 F)
dimension to prevent bottoming of the sensor in a thermowell.
0.80 C (1.44 F) at 100 C (-212 F)
Spring-Loaded Sensor Assemblies 1.30 C (2.34 F) at 200 C (392 F)
Spring-loaded sensors have a spring-positioned, 1.60 C (2.88 F) at 260 C (500 F)
1
/214 ANPT process connection fitting that ensures good surface
contact in thermowells for faster time response and vibration 2.30 C (4.14 F) at 400 C (752 F)
resistance. Spring-loaded sensors are not intended to provide a
process seal. They must be used in conjunction with a thermowell Construction
for this purpose.
FIGURE 7. Construction of a Platinum Thin Film RTD
NOTE
When a spring-loaded sensor is used properly, the spring should
be compressed approximately 1/2-inch. Connection Seal
Connection Leads

Connection Pads
Bayonet Spring-Loaded Sensor Assemblies
Bayonet assemblies have the same advantages as the Passivation with

Sensors-3144_05A
Glass Layers
spring-loaded sensor. However, the bayonet connector permits the
Photolithography
sensor to be easily removed from the process without tools. Structured Platinum
Thin Film
FIGURE 6. Series 68, 68Q, 78, and 58C
Al2 O3 Substrate
Lead Wire Configurations

Single Element Dual-element(1)


Design and construction of the Series 68 Platinum Sensors
Red Red provides the optimum combination of accuracy and durability
Red available for temperature measurements. The construction of the
Sensors-0002A, C

White sensor allows for direct immersion in non-corrosive fluids at


White
reasonable static pressures. For corrosive environments or many
Black industrial applications, these sensors are widely used with
White standard thermowell assemblies.
Green
White Green
Platinum Element and Lead Wire Configurations
(1) Dual-element sensors are only available on Series 68Q and 78 Single-element temperature sensors have four lead wires and may
sensors. be used in 2-, 3-, and 4-wire signal conditioning systems.

-10
Product Data Sheet
00813-0100-2654, Rev DA
September 2003 Volume 1

Specifications Lead Wire


Teflon insulated, nickel-coated, 22-gauge stranded copper wire.
Performance
Identification Data
Temperature Range The model, serial numbers, and up to six lines of permanent
50 to 400 C (58 to 752 F) tagging information are etched on each sensor. Stainless steel
tags are available upon request.
Effect of Temperature Cycling
0.05% (0.13 C or 0.23 F) maximum ice-point resistance shift Weight
following 10 cycles over the specified temperature range. Capsule sensors: 5 oz
General-purpose and spring-loaded sensors: 9 oz
Stability
0.11% maximum ice-point resistance shift following 1,000 hours Environmental
at maximum specified temperature (400 C). Humidity Limits
Lead seal can withstanding 100% relative humidity.
Maximum Hysteresis Vibration Limits
0.1% of operating temperature range. 0.05% maximum ice-point resistance shift due to 30 minutes
of 14 g peak vibration from 5 to 350 Hz at 20 C (68 F) for
Time Constant unsupported stem length of less than 6 inches.
12 seconds maximum required to reach 63.2% sensor response in Quality Assurance
water flowing at 3 ft/s (0.91 m/s). Each sensor is subjected to a resistance accuracy test at 0 C
and a insulation resistance test.
Self Heating Enclosure Ratings
16 mW minimum power dissipation required to cause a 1 C (1.8 When installed properly, Rosemount Series 68 sensors are
F) temperature measurement error in water flowing at 3 ft/s. suitable for indoor and outdoor NEMA 4X and CSA Enclosure
Type 4X installations. See Hazardous Area Approvals for
Physical Specifications complete installation information.

Sheath Material Insulation Resistance


316 SST. 500  106 ohms minimum insulation resistance when measured at
500 Vdc at room temperature.

-11
Product Data Sheet
00813-0100-2654, Rev DA
Volume 1 September 2003

ORDERING INFORMATION
TABLE 4. Series 68 RTD Sensor Assemblies WITHOUT Thermowell

Model Product Description


0068 Platinum Thin-Film Temperature Sensors and Sensor Assemblies
Code Sensor Lead Wire Termination
R Aluminum Connection Head, Six Terminals, Flat Cover, Unpainted
T Aluminum Connection Head, Six Terminals, Extended Cover, Unpainted
P Aluminum Connection Head, Six Terminals, Flat Cover, Painted
L Aluminum Connection Head, Six Terminals, Extended Cover, Painted
W(1) Polypropylene Connection Head
N Sensor only with 6-in. Teflon -insulated, 22-gauge lead wires
Code Sensor Type (single element -50 to 400 C (-58 to 752 F))
(2)(3)
01 Capsule Style
11(4) General-purpose style
21(5) Spring-loaded style
31(6) Bayonet spring-loaded style (available in 1-in. increments from 1 to 21 inches)
Code Extension Type Material
A Nipple Coupling SST
C Nipple Union SST
N None (Use with extension length option code 00)
Code Extension Length (E)
00 0.0 in.
30 3.0 in. (X) sensor length = (E) extension length + (L) thermowell length minus 0.25 in. (see Figure 4.)
60 6.0 in.
Code Thermowell Material
N No thermowell required
Code Sensor Immersion Length (L) Code Sensor Immersion Length (L) Code Sensor Immersion Length (L)
010(2)(7) 1.0-in. 130 13.0-in. 250 25.0-in.
015 1.5-in. 135 13.5-in. 260 26.0-in.
020 2.0-in. 140 14.0-in. 270 27.0-in.
025 2.5-in. 145 14.5-in. 280 28.0-in.
030 3.0-in. 150(8) 15.0-in. 290 29.0-in.
035 3.5-in. 155 15.5-in. 300 30.0-in.
040(8) 4.0-in. 160 16.0-in. 310 31.0-in.
045 4.5-in. 165 16.5-in. 320 32.0-in.
050 5.0-in. 170 17.0-in. 330 33.0-in.
055 5.5-in. 175 17.5-in. 340 34.0-in.
060(8) 6.0-in. 180(8) 18.0-in. 350 35.0-in.
065 6.5-in. 185 18.5-in. 360 36.0-in.
070 7.0-in. 190 19.0-in. 370 37.0-in.
075 7.5-in. 195 19.5-in. 380 38.0-in.
080 8.0-in. 200 20.0-in. 390 39.0-in.
085 8.5-in. 205 20.5-in. 400 40.0-in.
090(8) 9.0-in. 210 21.0-in. 410 41.0-in.
095 9.5-in. 210 21.5-in. 420 42.0-in.
100 10.0-in. 220 22.0-in. 430 43.0-in.
105 10.5-in. 225 22.5-in. 440 44.0-in.
110 11.0-in. 230 23.0-in. 450 45.0-in.
115 11.5-in. 235 23.5-in. 460 46.0-in.
120(8) 12.0-in. 240 24.0-in. 470 47.0-in.
125 12.5-in. 245 15.5-in. 480 48.0-in.

-12
Product Data Sheet
00813-0100-2654, Rev DA
September 2003 Volume 1

Code Options
Product Certifications
E5 FM Explosion-proof approval (See Figure 26)
E6 CSA Explosion-proof approval (See Figure 27)
E7(9) SAA Flameproof approval (See Figure 29)
E1(10) CENELEC / ATEX Flameproof approval (See Figure 28)
Calibration
V1-V7 Choose from option code VCallendar-van Dusen Constants. See Option Code V Callendar-van Dusen Constants.
Option code V4 is not available with Series 68 sensors.
X8Q4 Calibrate to customer-specified temperature range (See Option X8Q4: Sensor Calibrated to a Customer-Specified Temperature Range)
X9Q4 Calibrate to customer-specified single temperature point (See Option X9Q4: Sensor Calibrated to a Customer-Specified Single Point)
Mounting Adapters, Lead Wire Extensions, Connectors, and Seals
M5-M7 Mounting adapters
A1-A8 Twisted lead wire extensions
B1-B8(11) Shielded cable lead wire extensions
C1-C8(11) Armored cable lead wire extensions
D1-D8(11) Armored cable lead wire extensions with electrical plugs
L1-L8 Armored cable mating plugs with lead wire extensions
F1 4-pin bayonet connector
H1-H8 4-pin connector mating plugs with lead wire extensions
J1 Moisture-proof seal assembly for armored cables
XA(12) Assemble connection head or transmitter to a sensor assembly (Teflon (PTFE) paste where appropriate, fully wired.)

(1) FM, CSA, SAA, and CENELEC approvals are not available with the polypropylene connection head.

(2) Capsule style available in 1-in. increments only, starting at 1-in. (i.e. 1, 2, 3-inches, etc.) See See Mounting Adapters for Series 58, 68, 78, and 183 on
page 50.

(3) This option must be used with Sensor Lead Wire Termination code N and is not available with assembly code XA or with Approval codes E1, E5, E6, and E7.

(4) General-purpose sensors are only available in (L) lengths of 2.5-in. or greater.

(5) Spring loaded sensors must be installed in a thermowell assembly to meet the requirements of explosion-proof approvals code E6.

(6) Not available with Sensor Lead Wire Termination codes R, P, or W or with approval codes E1, E5, E6, or E7.

(7) 1-in. length without extension is only available in capsule style.

(8) Standard configuration with best delivery.

(9) SAA Flame-proof Approval is only applicable if installed with Rosemount 244E, 248, 644, 3144P, or 3244MV transmitters.

(10) CENELEC / ATEX Flame-proof approval is only applicable if installed with Rosemount 144, 244E, 248, 644, 3144P, or 3244MV transmitters.

(11) These options are not available with Sensor Lead Wire Termination codes R, P, or W.

(12) If ordering code XA with a transmitter, specify the same option on the transmitter model code.

Ordering Example
Typical Lead Wire Extension Extension Thermowell Immersion Additional
Model Model Termination Sensor Type Type Length Material Length Options
Number
0068 N 11 N 00 N 045 E5

-13
Product Data Sheet
00813-0100-2654, Rev DA
Volume 1 September 2003

TABLE 5. Series 68 RTD Sensor Assemblies WITH Thermowell

Model Product Description


0068 Platinum Thin Film Temperature Sensors and Sensor Assemblies
Code Sensor Lead Wire Termination
R Aluminum Connection Head, Six Terminals, Flat Cover, Unpainted
T Aluminum Connection Head, Six Terminals, Extended Cover, Unpainted
P Aluminum Connection Head, Six Terminals, Flat Cover, Painted
L Aluminum Connection Head, Six Terminals, Extended Cover, Painted
W(1) Polypropylene Connection Head
N Sensor only with 6-in. Teflon -insulated, 22-gauge lead wires
Code Sensor Type (single element -50 to 400 C (-58 to 752 F))
Single Element Temperature Sensors
11 General-purpose style
21 Spring-loaded style
31(2)(3) Bayonet spring-loaded style (available in (X) lengths of 1 to 21-in., increments of 1-in.)
Code Extension Type Material
A(4) Nipple Coupling SST
C(4) Nipple Union SST
N None (Use with extension length option code 00)
Code Extension Length (E)
00 0.0 in.
30 3.0 in. (X) sensor length = (E) extension length + (L) thermowell length minus 0.25 in. (see Figure 4.)
60 6.0 in.
Code Thermowell Material Code Thermowell Material
A Type 316 SST(5) J Hastelloy C (with 304 SST flange, if flange style is ordered)
B Type 304 SST L Hastelloy B (with 304 SST flange, if flange style is ordered)
C Carbon Steel M 304 SST with Teflon (PTFE) coating
D 316L SST P Chrome Molybdenum F22
E 304L SST R Nickel 200
F Alloy 20 T Titanium
G Monel U(6) 316 SST with Tantalum Sheath
H Inconel 600 W 321 SST
Z Chrome Molybdenum F11
Code Length Code Length Code Length
U(7) L T(8) U(7) L T(8) U(7) L T(8)
015 1.5-in. 4.0-in. 1.0-in. 130 13.0-in. 15.0-in. 0.5-in. 260 26.0-in. 30.0-in. 2.5-in.
020 2.0-in. 4.0-in. 0.5-in. 135 13.5-in. 15.0-in. 0.0-in. 270 27.0-in. 30.0-in. 1.5-in.
025 2.5-in. 4.0-in. 0.0-in. 140 14.0-in. 18.0-in. 2.5-in. 280 28.0-in. 30.0-in. 0.5-in.
030 3.0-in. 6.0-in. 1.5-in. 145 14.5-in. 18.0-in. 2.0-in. 290 29.0-in. 33.0-in. 2.5-in.
035 3.5-in. 6.0-in. 1.0-in. 150(5) 15.0-in. 18.0-in. 1.5-in. 300 30.0-in. 33.0-in. 1.5-in.
040 4.0-in. 6.0-in. 0.5-in. 155 15.5-in. 18.0-in. 1.0-in. 310 31.0-in. 33.0-in. 0.5-in.
045(5) 4.5-in. 6.0-in. 0.0-in. 160 16.0-in. 18.0-in. 0.5-in. 320 32.0-in. 36.0-in. 2.5-in.
050 5.0-in. 9.0-in. 2.5-in. 165 16.5-in. 18.0-in. 0.0-in. 330 33.0-in. 36.0-in. 1.5-in.
055 5.5-in. 9.0-in. 2.0-in. 170 17.0-in. 21.0-in. 2.5-in. 340 34.0-in. 36.0-in. 0.5-in.
060 6.0-in. 9.0-in. 1.5-in. 175 17.5-in. 21.0-in. 2.0-in. 350 35.0-in. 39.0-in. 2.5-in.
065 6.5-in. 9.0-in. 1.0-in. 180(5) 18.0-in. 21.0-in. 1.5-in. 360 36.0-in. 39.0-in. 1.5-in.
070 7.0-in. 9.0-in. 0.5-in. 185 18.5-in. 21.0-in. 1.0-in. 370 37.0-in. 39.0-in. 0.5-in.
075(5) 7.5-in. 9.0-in. 0.0-in. 190 19.0-in. 21.0-in. 0.5-in. 380 38.0-in. 42.0-in. 2.5-in.
080 8.0-in. 12.0-in. 2.5-in. 195 19.5-in. 21.0-in. 0.0-in. 390 39.0-in. 42.0-in. 1.5-in.
085 8.5-in. 12.0-in. 2.0-in. 200(9) 20.0-in. 24.0-in. 2.5-in. 400 40.0-in. 42.0-in. 0.5-in.
090 9.0-in. 12.0 1.5-in. 205(9) 20.5-in. 24.0-in. 2.0-in. 410 41.0-in. 45.0-in. 2.5-in.
095 9.5-in. 12.0-in. 1.0-in. 210(9) 21.0-in. 24.0-in. 1.5-in. 420 42.0-in. 45.0-in. 1.5-in.
100 10.0-in. 12.0-in. 0.5-in. 215(9) 21.5-in. 24.0-in. 1.0-in. 430 43.0-in. 45.0-in. 0.5-in.
105(5) 10.5-in. 12.0-in. 0.0-in. 220(9) 22.0-in. 24.0-in. 0.5-in. 440 44.0-in. 48.0-in. 2.5-in.
110 11.0-in. 15.0-in. 2.5-in. 225(9) 22.5-in. 24.0-in. 0.0-in. 450 45.0-in. 48.0-in. 1.5-in.
115 11.5-in. 15.0-in. 2.0-in. 230 23.0-in. 27.0-in. 2.5-in. 460 46.0-in. 48.0-in. 0.5-in.
120 12.0-in. 15.0-in. 1.5-in. 240 24.0-in. 27.0-in. 1.5-in. 470 47.0-in. 51.0-in. 2.5-in.
125 12.5-in. 15.0-in. 1.0-in. 250 25.0-in. 27.0-in. 0.5-in. 480 48.0-in. 51.0-in. 1.5-in.

-14
Product Data Sheet
00813-0100-2654, Rev DA
September 2003 Volume 1

Code Thermowell Mounting Stem


1
T20(5) Threaded /2-14 ANPT Stepped
3
T22(5) Threaded /4-14 ANPT Stepped
T24(5) Threaded 1-11.5 ANPT Stepped
3
T26 Threaded /4-14 ANPT Tapered
T28 Threaded 1-11.5 ANPT Tapered
T30 Threaded 11/2-11 ANPT Tapered
1
T32(10) Threaded /2-14 ANPT Straight
3
T34(10) Threaded /4-14 ANPT Straight
T36(10) Threaded 1-11.5 ANPT Straight
3
T38(10) Threaded /4-14 ANPT Straight
1
T44 Threaded /2-14 ANPT Tapered
3
W38 Welded /4-in. pipe Stepped
W40 Welded 1-in. pipe Stepped
3
W42 Welded /4-in. pipe Tapered
W44 Welded 1-in. pipe Tapered
W46 Welded 11/4-in. pipe Tapered
3
W48(10) Welded /4-in. pipe Straight
W50(10) Welded 1-in. pipe Straight
F10(10) Flanged 2-in., Class 150 Straight
F12(10) Flanged 3-in., Class 150 Straight
F52 Flanged 1-in., Class 150 Stepped
F54 Flanged 11/2-in., Class 150 Stepped
F56 Flanged 2-in., Class 150 Stepped
F58 Flanged 1-in., Class 150 Tapered
F60 Flanged 11/2-in., Class 150 Tapered
F62 Flanged 1-11.5 ANPT Stepped
F64(10) Flanged 1-in., Class 150 Straight
F66(10) Flanged 11/2-in., Class 150 Straight
F70 Flanged 1-in., Class 300 Stepped
F72 Flanged 11/2-in., Class 300 Stepped
F74 Flanged 2-in., Class 300 Stepped
F76 Flanged 1-in., Class 300 Tapered
F78 Flanged 11/2-in., Class 300 Tapered
F80 Flanged 2-in., Class 300 Tapered
F82(10) Flanged 1-in., Class 300 Straight
F84(10) Flanged 11/2-in., Class 300 Straight
F86(10) Flanged 2-in., Class 300 Straight
F88(11) Flanged 1-in., Class 600 Stepped
F90(11) Flanged 11/2-in., Class 600 Stepped
F92(11) Flanged 2-in., Class 600 Stepped
F94(11) Flanged 1-in., Class 600 Tapered
F96(11) Flanged 11/2-in., Class 600 Tapered
F98(11) Flanged 2-in., Class 600 Tapered
F02(10)(11) Flanged 1-in., Class 600 Straight
F04(10)(11) Flanged 11/2-in., Class 600 Straight
F06(10)(11) Flanged 2-in., Class 600 Straight
F16(11) Flanged 11/2-in., Class 900 Tapered
F34(11) Flanged 11/2-in., Class 1500 Tapered
F24(11) Flanged 2-in., Class 1500 Tapered
F08(11) Flanged 11/2-in., Class 2500 Tapered
Q02 Sanitary, Tri-Clamp 1-in., Tri-Clamp Stepped
Q04 Sanitary, Tri-Clamp 11/2-in., Tri-Clamp Stepped
Q06 Sanitary, Tri-Clamp 2-in., Tri-Clamp Stepped
Q08 Sanitary, Tri-Clamp 3-in., Tri-Clamp Stepped
3
Q20 Sanitary, Tri-Clamp /4-in., Tri-Clamp Straight
Q22 Sanitary, Tri-Clamp 1-in., Tri-Clamp Straight
Q24 Sanitary, Tri-Clamp 11/2-in., Tri-Clamp Straight
Q26 Sanitary, Tri-Clamp 2-in., Tri-Clamp Straight
Q28 Sanitary, Tri-Clamp 3-in., Tri-Clamp Straight
Code Options
Product Certifications
E5 FM Explosion-proof approval (See Figure 26)
E6 CSA Explosion-proof approval (See Figure 27)
E7(12) SAA Flameproof approval (See Figure 29)
E1(13) CENELEC / ATEX Flameproof approval (See Figure 28)

-15
Product Data Sheet
00813-0100-2654, Rev DA
Volume 1 September 2003

Calibration
V1-V7 Choose from option code VCallendar-van Dusen Constants. See Option Code V Callendar-van Dusen Constants.
Option code V4 is not available with Series 68 sensors.
X8Q4 Calibrate to customer-specified temperature range (See Option X8Q4: Sensor Calibrated to a Customer-Specified Temperature Range)
X9Q4 Calibrate to customer-specified single temperature point (See Option X9Q4: Sensor Calibrated to a Customer-Specified Single Point)
Thermowell Options
Q8 Thermowell material certificate
R01 Thermowell special external pressure testing
R03 Thermowell dye penetration testing
R04 Special cleaning for oxygen service
R05 Thermowell NACE approval
R06 Stainless steel plug and chain
R07(14) Full penetration weld
R09(14)(15) Concentric serrations of thermowell flange face
R10 (14)(15) Thermowell flat faced flange
R11 Thermowell vent hole
R14 Thermowell special surface finish (12 Ra Max) (Maximum (U) length = 22.5 in.)
R16(14)(15) Ring joint flange (Not available with 0-in. (T) length)
R20 Electropolishing
R21 Thermowell Wake Frequency Calculation (Configuration Data Sheet required)
R22 Internal pressure testing
R23 Brass plug and chain
Mounting Adapters, Lead Wire Extensions, Connectors, and Seals
M5-M7 Mounting adapters
A1-A8 Twisted lead wire extensions
B1-B8(2) Shielded cable lead wire extensions
C1-C8(2) Armored cable lead wire extensions
D1-D8(2) Armored cable lead wire extensions with electrical plugs
L1-L8 Armored cable mating plugs with lead wire extensions
F1(2) 4-pin bayonet connector
H1-H8 4-pin connector mating plugs with lead wire extensions
J1 Moisture-proof seal assembly for armored cables
XA(16) Assemble connection head or transmitter to a sensor assembly (Teflon (PTFE) paste where appropriate, fully wired.)

(1) FM, CSA, SAA, and CENELEC / ATEX approvals are not available with the polypropylene connection head.

(2) Not available with Sensor Lead Wire Termination codes R, P, or W.

(3) Not available with option codes E1, E5, E6, and E7.

(4) Codes A and C must be used with an extension length. Additional non-standard (E) lengths are available in 1/2-in. increments from 2.5 to 9-in.

(5) Standard configuration with best delivery.

(6) Available only with straight stem thermowells.

(7) Thermowells with an overall length (U + T = 1.75-in.) of 42-in. or less are machined from solid barstock. Thermowells with an overall length larger than
42-in. will be constructed using a welded 3-piece design and are available only with a stepped stem style.

(8) For additional (T) lengths, see Table 23 on page -47.

(9) Straight or tapered stem only

(10) Straight thermowells are not recommended for (U) lengths greater than 6-in.

(11) F88 to F08 cannot be used with 0-in. (T) length. F08 cannot be used with 0- or 1/2-in. (T) length)

(12) SAA flame-proof approval is only applicable if installed with a Rosemount 248, 244E, 644, 3144P, or 3244MV transmitter.

(13) CENELEC / ATEX flame-proof approval is only applicable if installed with a Rosemount 144, 248, 244E, 644, 3144P, or 3244MV transmitter.

(14) Available on flanged thermowells only.

(15) Only one flange face option allowed.

(16) If ordering option code XA with a transmitter, specify the same option on the transmitter model code.

TABLE 6. Ordering Example


Typical Lead Wire Extension Extension Immersion Mounting Additional
Model Model Termination Sensor Type Type Length Material Code Length Style Options
Number
0068 N 21 A 30 A 075 T22 E5

-16
Product Data Sheet
00813-0100-2654, Rev DA
September 2003 Volume 1

SERIES 78 PLATINUM RTD FIGURE 8. Wiring Configuration of a


Dual-Element Sensor to Function as a Single
Series 78 sensors are intended for applications that require high
accuracy, dual-elements, and/or are subjected to high
Element Sensor with a Compensation Loop
temperatures. Rosemount Series 78 RTD temperature sensors
measure from 200 to 600 C (328 to 1112 F). These sensors Red
are available in capsule, general-purpose, spring-loaded, and Measurement points

Sensors-0002A, C
bayonet spring-loaded designs in sensor (X) lengths from 1 to 68 White
inches. White (extra leave disconnected)

Table 7 shows the interchangeability of the Series 78 sensors. The Black (extra leave disconnected)
performance of the standard Series 78 sensor conforms to the
standard set by IEC 751 Class B. Additionally, IEC-751 Class A Green Lead wire compensation
accuracy is available as an option. For maximum system Green
points
accuracy, Rosemount Inc. can provide sensor calibration. See
Sensor Characterization (Calibration) Schedules Option Code
Note: Isolate the two extra leads with electrical tape to ensure
V. Rosemount Inc. also offers optional sensor-to-transmitter
that they do not contact the terminals.
matching capability obtainable through the use of Callendar-Van
Dusen Constants. See Option Code V Callendar-van Dusen
Constantsand Option X8Q4: Sensor Calibrated to a Construction
Customer-Specified Temperature Range.
The wire-wound design and construction of the General-Purpose
FIGURE 9. Construction of a Platinum Wire-wound RTD
Series 78 sensor allows direct immersion in non-corrosive fluids at
reasonable static pressures. For corrosive environments and in Lead Wires
many industrial applications, these sensors are commonly used
with standard thermowell assemblies.
Seal

Sensors-3144_06A
Platinum Element and Lead Wire Configurations High Purity Insulator
Single-element high-temperature sensors have four lead wires
Platinum Resistance
and may be used in 2-, 3-, and 4-wire signal conditioning systems. Element
Dual-element sensors have redundant elements to provide
separate readout and control signals from a single measurement
point. Dual-element sensors have three lead wires for each
element and may be used with 2- or 3-wire systems. Dual-element
sensors can also be wired to be used as compensation loop
sensors (see Figure 8).

-17
Product Data Sheet
00813-0100-2654, Rev DA
Volume 1 September 2003

Specifications Vibration Limits


Standard single- and dual-element sensors:
Performance 0.03% maximum ice-point resistance shift due to 30 minutes
of 21 g peak vibration from 5 to 350 Hz continuous sweep at
Temperature Range 20 C (68 F) for unsupported stem length of less than 5.5
Series 78 single- and dual-element sensors may be used in inches (140 mm).
temperatures from 200 to 500 C (328 to 932 F). Series 78 Single-element high-temperature sensors:
single-element high-temperature sensors are provided for Meet ASTM E 1137-95. Cycling time is 3 hours per
high-temperature service over the range of 0 to 600 C (32 to 1112 longitudinal axis, less the time spent at resonant dwells at the
F). axis, from 5 to 500 Hz. The test level is 1.27 mm (0.05 in.)
double amplitude displacement or peak g-level of 3, whichever
Effect of Temperature Cycling is less.
0.04% (0.10 C or 0.18 F) maximum ice-point resistance shift
following 10 cycles between 200 and 500 C (328 to 932 F). Quality Assurance
Each sensor is subjected to a resistance accuracy test at 0 C and
Stability an insulation resistance test.
0.05% maximum ice-point resistance shift following 1,000 hours
at 400 C (752 F). Enclosure Ratings
When installed properly, Rosemount Series 78 sensors are
Accuracy suitable for indoor and outdoor NEMA 4X and CSA Enclosure
Type 4X installations. See Hazardous Area Approvals for
TABLE 7. Series 78 Interchangeability complete installation information.
Standard Series 78 IEC-751 Class B Temperature
0.80 C (1.44 F) -100 C (-148 F) Physical Specifications
0.30 C (0.54 F) 0 C (32 F)
0.80 C (1.44 F) 100 C (212 F) Sheath Material
1.80 C (3.24 F) 300 C (572 F)
2.30 C (4.14 F) 400 C (752 F)
316 SST
Series 78 with IEC-751 Class A Option Temperature
Lead Wires
0.35 C (0.63 F) -100 C (-148 F)
0.15 C (0.27 F) 0 C (32 F) Teflon-insulated, nickel-coated, 22-gauge stranded copper wire.
0.35 C (0.63 F) 100 C (212 F)
0.75 C (1.35 F) 300 C (572 F) Identification Data
0.95 C (1.71 F) 400 C (752 F) The model and serial numbers and up to six lines of permanent
tagging information are etched on each sensor. Stainless steel
Maximum Hysteresis tags are available upon request.
Single- and dual-element, standard: 0.04% of range.
Single-element, high temperature: 0.1% of range. Weight
Capsule sensors: 5 oz
Time Constant General purpose and spring-loaded sensors: 9 oz
4 seconds maximum required to reach 63.2% sensor response in
water flowing at 3 ft/s (0.91 m/s), 9.5 seconds for single-element
high-temperature sensors.

Self Heating
18 mW minimum power dissipation required to cause a 1 C (1.8
F) temperature measurement error in water flowing at 3 ft/s, 25
mW for single-element high temperature sensors.

Insulation Resistance
500  106 ohms minimum insulation resistance when measured at
500 V dc at room temperature [20 C (68 F)]. Single element
high-temperature sensors are measured at 100V dc.

Environmental

Humidity Limits
Lead seal is capable of withstanding 100%
relative humidity.

-18
Product Data Sheet
00813-0100-2654, Rev DA
September 2003 Volume 1

Ordering Information
TABLE 8. Series 78 RTD Sensor Assemblies WITHOUT Thermowell

Model Product Description


0078 Platinum Wire-Wound Temperature Sensors and Sensor Assemblies
Code Sensor Lead Wire Termination
R Aluminum Connection Head, Six Terminals, Flat Cover, Unpainted
T Aluminum Connection Head, Six Terminals, Extended Cover, Unpainted
P Aluminum Connection Head, Six Terminals, Flat Cover, Painted
L Aluminum Connection Head, Six Terminals, Extended Cover, Painted
W(1) Polypropylene Connection Head
N Sensor only with 6-in. Teflon -insulated, 22-gauge lead wires
Code Sensor Type Temperature
Single Element Temperature Sensors -200 to 500 C (-328 to 932 F)
01(2)(3) Capsule style
11 General-purpose style
21(4) Spring-loaded style
31(5) Bayonet spring-loaded style (available in (X) lengths of 1 to 21-in, increments of 1-in.)
Single Element High Temperature Sensors 0 to 600 C (32 to 1112 F)
03(2) Capsule style (available in (X) lengths of 3 to 24-in, increments of 1-in.)
13 General-purpose style (available in (X) lengths of 3 to 24-in, increments of 1/2-in.)
23(4) Spring-loaded style (available in (X) lengths of 3 to 24-in, increments of 1/2-in.)
33(5) Bayonet spring-loaded style (available in (X) lengths of 3 to 21-in, increments of 1-in.)
Dual-element Temperature Sensors -200 to 500 C (-328 to 932 F)
05(2) Capsule style
15 General-purpose style
25(4) Spring-loaded style
35(5) Bayonet spring-loaded style (available in (X) lengths of 1 to 21-in, increments of 1-in.)
Code Extension Type Material
A(6) Nipple Coupling SST
C(6) Nipple Union SST
N None (Use with extension length option code 00)
Code Extension Length (E)
00 0.0 in.
30 3.0 in. (X) sensor length = (E) extension length + (L) thermowell length minus 0.25 in. (see Figure 4.)
60 6.0 in.
Code Thermowell Material
N No thermowell required
Code Sensor Immersion Length (L) Code Sensor Immersion Length (L) Code Sensor Immersion Length (L)
010 1.0-in. 130 13.0-in. 250 25.0-in.
015 1.5-in. 135 13.5-in. 260 26.0-in.
020 2.0-in. 140 14.0-in. 270 27.0-in.
025 2.5-in. 145 14.5-in. 280 28.0-in.
030 3.0-in. 150 15.0-in. 290 29.0-in.
035 3.5-in. 155 15.5-in. 300 30.0-in.
040(7) 4.0-in. 160 16.0-in. 310 31.0-in.
045 4.5-in. 165 16.5-in. 320 32.0-in.
050 5.0-in. 170 17.0-in. 330 33.0-in.
055 5.5-in. 175 17.5-in. 340 34.0-in.
060(7) 6.0-in. 180 18.0-in. 350 35.0-in.
065 6.5-in. 185 18.5-in. 360 36.0-in.
070 7.0-in. 190 19.0-in. 370 37.0-in.
075 7.5-in. 195 19.5-in. 380 38.0-in.
080 8.0-in. 200 20.0-in. 390 39.0-in.
085 8.5-in. 205 20.5-in. 400 40.0-in.
090(7) 9.0-in. 210 21.0-in. 410 41.0-in.
095 9.5-in. 215 21.5-in. 420 42.0-in.
100 10.0-in. 220 22.0-in. 430 43.0-in.
105 10.5-in. 225 22.5-in. 440 44.0-in.
110 11.0-in. 230 23.0-in. 450 45.0-in.
115 11.5-in. 235 23.5-in. 460 46.0-in.
120 12.0-in. 240 24.0-in. 470 47.0-in.
125 12.5-in. 245 24.5-in. 480(8) 48.0-in.

-19
Product Data Sheet
00813-0100-2654, Rev DA
Volume 1 September 2003

Code Options
Sensor
A(9) IEC 751 Class A Sensor
Product Certifications
E5 FM Explosion-proof approval (See Figure 26)
E6 CSA Explosion-proof approval (See Figure 27)
E7(10) SAA Flameproof approval (See Figure 29)
E1(11) CENELEC / ATEX Flameproof approval (See Figure 28)
Calibration
V1-V7 Choose from option code VCallendar-van Dusen Constants. See Option Code V Callendar-van Dusen Constants.
Option code V4 is not available with Series 68 sensors.
X8Q4 Calibrate to customer-specified temperature range (See Option X8Q4: Sensor Calibrated to a Customer-Specified Temperature Range)
X9Q4 Calibrate to customer-specified single temperature point (See Option X9Q4: Sensor Calibrated to a Customer-Specified Single Point)
Mounting Adapters, Lead Wire Extensions, Connectors, and Seals
M5-M7 Mounting adapters
A1-A8 Twisted lead wire extensions
B1-B8(12) Shielded cable lead wire extensions
C1-C8(12) Armored cable lead wire extensions
D1-D8(12) Armored cable lead wire extensions with electrical plugs
L1-L8 Armored cable mating plugs with lead wire extensions
F1(12) 4-pin bayonet connector
H1-H8 4-pin connector mating plugs with lead wire extensions
J1 Moisture-proof seal assembly for armored cables
XA(13) Assemble connection head or transmitter to a sensor assembly (Teflon (PTFE) paste where appropriate, fully wired.)

(1) FM, CSA, SAA, and CENELEC / ATEX approvals are not available with the polypropylene connection head.

(2) Capsule style available in 1-in. increments only. See Mounting Adapters for Series 58, 68, 78, and 183 on page -50.

(3) Must be used with Sensor Lead Wire Termination code N and is not available with assembly option XA or with approval option codes E1, E5, E6, or E7.

(4) Spring loaded sensors must be installed in a thermowell assembly to meet the requirements of explosion-proof approval option code E6.

(5) This option is not available with Sensor Lead Wire Termination codes R, P or W or approval code E1, E6, and E7.

(6) Codes A and C must be used with an extension length. Additional non-standard (E) lengths are available in 1/2-in. increments from 2.5 to 9-in.

(7) Standard configuration with best delivery

(8) Additional lengths are available up to 68-in., increments of 1-in.

(9) The IEC 751 Class A option is not available with high-temperature sensors.

(10) SAA Flameproof approvals only applicable if installed with a Rosemount 248, 244E, 644, 3144P or 3244MV transmitter.

(11) CENELEC / ATEX Flameproof approvals only applicable if installed with a Rosemount 144, 248, 244E, 644, 3144P or 3244MV transmitter.

(12) These options are not available with Sensor Lead Wire Termination codes R, P, or W.

(13) If ordering option code XA with a transmitter, specify the same option on the transmitter model code.

TABLE 9. Ordering Example


Typical Lead Wire Extension Extension Thermowell Immersion Additional
Model Model Termination Sensor Type Type Length Material Length Options
Number
0078 N 21 N 00 N 045 E5

-20
Product Data Sheet
00813-0100-2654, Rev DA
September 2003 Volume 1
TABLE 10. Series 78 RTD Sensor Assemblies WITH Thermowell
Model Product Description
0078 Platinum Wire-Wound Temperature Sensors and Sensor Assemblies
Code Sensor Lead Wire Termination
R Aluminum Connection Head, Six Terminals, Flat Cover, Unpainted
T Aluminum Connection Head, Six Terminals, Extended Cover, Unpainted
P Aluminum Connection Head, Six Terminals, Flat Cover, Painted
L Aluminum Connection Head, Six Terminals, Extended Cover, Painted
W(1) Polypropylene Connection Head
N Sensor only with 6-in. Teflon -insulated, 22-gauge lead wires
Code Sensor Type Temperature
Single Element Temperature Sensors -200 to 500 C (-328 to 932 F)
11 General-purpose style
21 Spring-loaded style
31(2)(3) Bayonet spring-loaded style (available in (X) lengths of 1 to 21-in., increments of 1-in.)
Single Element High Temperature Sensors 0 to 600 C (32 to 1112 F)
13 General-purpose style (available in (X) lengths of 3 to 24-in., increments of 1/2-in.)
23 Spring-loaded style (available in (X) lengths of 3 to 24-in., increments of 1/2-in.)
33(2)(3) Bayonet spring-loaded style (available in (X) lengths of 3 to 21-in., increments of 1-in.)
Dual-element Temperature Sensors -200 to 500 C (-328 to 932 F)
15 General-purpose style
25 Spring-loaded style
35(2)(3) Bayonet spring-loaded style (available in (X) lengths of 1 to 21-in., increments of 1-in.)
Code Extension Type Material
A(4) Nipple Coupling SST
C(4) Nipple Union SST
N None (Use with extension length option code 00)
Code Extension Length (E)
00 0.0 in.
30 3.0 in. (X) sensor length = (E) extension length + (L) thermowell length minus 0.25 in. (see Figure 4.)
60 6.0 in.
Code Thermowell Material Code Thermowell Material
A Type 316 SST(5) J Hastelloy C (with 304 SST Flange, if flange style is ordered)
B Type 304 SST L Hastelloy B (with 304 SST Flange, if flange style is ordered)
C Carbon Steel M 304 SST with Teflon (PTFE) coating
D 316L SST P Chrome Molybdenum F22
E 304L SST R Nickel 200
F Alloy 20 T Titanium
G Monel U(6) 316 SST with Tantalum Sheath
H Inconel 600 W 321 SST
Z Chrome Molybdenum F11
Code Length Code Length Code Length
U(7) L T(8) U(7) L T(8) U(7) L T(8)
015(9) 1.5-in. 4.0-in. 1.0-in. 130 13.0-in. 15.0-in. 0.5-in. 260 26.0-in. 30.0-in. 2.5-in.
020(9) 2.0-in. 4.0-in. 0.5-in. 135 13.5-in. 15.0-in. 0.0-in. 270 27.0-in. 30.0-in. 1.5-in.
025(9) 2.5-in. 4.0-in. 0.0-in. 140 14.0-in. 18.0-in. 2.5-in. 280 28.0-in. 30.0-in. 0.5-in.
030 3.0-in. 6.0-in. 1.5-in. 145 14.5-in. 18.0-in. 2.0-in. 290 29.0-in. 33.0-in. 2.5-in.
035 3.5-in. 6.0-in. 1.0-in. 150 15.0-in. 18.0-in. 1.5-in. 300 30.0-in. 33.0-in. 1.5-in.
040 4.0-in. 6.0-in. 0.5-in. 155 15.5-in. 18.0-in. 1.0-in. 310 31.0-in. 33.0-in. 0.5-in.
045(5) 4.5-in. 6.0-in. 0.0-in. 160 16.0-in. 18.0-in. 0.5-in. 320 32.0-in. 36.0-in. 2.5-in.
050 5.0-in. 9.0-in. 2.5-in. 165 16.5-in. 18.0-in. 0.0-in. 330 33.0-in. 36.0-in. 1.5-in.
055 5.5-in. 9.0-in. 2.0-in. 170 17.0-in. 21.0-in. 2.5-in. 340 34.0-in. 36.0-in. 0.5-in.
060 6.0-in. 9.0-in. 1.5-in. 175 17.5-in. 21.0-in. 2.0-in. 350 35.0-in. 39.0-in. 2.5-in.
065 6.5-in. 9.0-in. 1.0-in. 180 18.0-in. 21.0-in. 1.5-in. 360 36.0-in. 39.0-in. 1.5-in.
070 7.0-in. 9.0-in. 0.5-in. 185 18.5-in. 21.0-in. 1.0-in. 370 37.0-in. 39.0-in. 0.5-in.
075(5) 7.5-in. 9.0-in. 0.0-in. 190 19.0-in. 21.0-in. 0.5-in. 380 38.0-in. 42.0-in. 2.5-in.
080 8.0-in. 12.0-in. 2.5-in. 195 19.5-in. 21.0-in. 0.0-in. 390 39.0-in. 42.0-in. 1.5-in.
085 8.5-in. 12.0-in. 2.0-in. 200 20.0-in. 24.0-in. 2.5-in. 400 40.0-in. 42.0-in. 0.5-in.
090 9.0-in. 12.0-in. 1.5-in. 205 20.5-in. 24.0-in. 2.0-in. 410 41.0-in. 45.0-in. 2.5-in.
095 9.5-in. 12.0-in. 1.0-in. 210 21.0-in. 24.0-in. 1.5-in. 420 42.0-in. 45.0-in. 1.5-in.
100 10.0-in. 12.0-in. 0.5-in. 215 21.5-in. 24.0-in. 1.0-in. 430 43.0-in. 45.0-in. 0.5-in.
105(5) 10.5-in. 12.0-in. 0.0-in. 220 22.0-in. 24.0-in. 0.5-in. 440 44.0-in. 48.0-in. 2.5-in.
110 11.0-in. 15.0-in. 2.5-in. 225 22.5-in. 24.0-in. 0.0-in. 450 45.0-in. 48.0-in. 1.5-in.
115 11.5-in. 15.0-in. 2.0-in. 230 23.0-in. 27.0-in. 2.5-in. 460 46.0-in. 48.0-in. 0.5-in.
120 12.0-in. 15.0-in. 1.5-in. 240 24.0-in. 27.0-in. 1.5-in. 470 47.0-in. 51.0-in. 2.5-in.
125 12.5-in. 15.0-in. 1.0-in. 250 25.0-in. 27.0-in. 0.5-in. 480 48.0-in. 51.0-in. 1.5-in.

-21
Product Data Sheet
00813-0100-2654, Rev DA
Volume 1 September 2003

Code Thermowell Mounting Stem


1
T20(5) Threaded /2-14 ANPT Stepped
3
T22(5) Threaded /4-14 ANPT Stepped
T24(5) Threaded 1-11.5 ANPT Stepped
3
T26 Threaded /4-14 ANPT Tapered
T28 Threaded 1-11.5 ANPT Tapered
T30 Threaded 11/2-11 ANPT Tapered
1
T32 Threaded /2-14 ANPT Straight
3
T34 Threaded /4-14 ANPT Straight
T36 Threaded 1-11.5 ANPT Straight
T38 Threaded 3/4-14 ANPT Straight
1
T44 Threaded /2-14 ANPT Tapered
3
W38 Welded /4-in. pipe Stepped
W40 Welded 1-in. pipe Stepped
3
W42 Welded /4-in. pipe Tapered
W44 Welded 1-in. pipe Tapered
W46 Welded 11/4-in. pipe Tapered
3
W48 Welded /4-in. pipe Straight
W50 Welded 1-in. pipe Straight
F10 Flanged 2-in., Class 150 Straight
F12 Flanged 3-in., Class 150 Straight
F52 Flanged 1-in., Class 150 Stepped
F54 Flanged 11/2-in., Class 150 Stepped
F56 Flanged 2-in., Class 150 Stepped
F58 Flanged 1-in., Class 150 Tapered
F60 Flanged 11/2-in., Class 150 Tapered
F62 Flanged 1-11.5 ANPT Stepped
F64 Flanged 1-in., Class 150 Straight
F66 Flanged 11/2-in., Class 150 Straight
F70 Flanged 1-in., Class 300 Stepped
F72 Flanged 11/2-in., Class 300 Stepped
F74 Flanged 2-in., Class 300 Stepped
F76 Flanged 1-in., Class 300 Tapered
F78 Flanged 11/2-in., Class 300 Tapered
F80 Flanged 2-in., Class 300 Tapered
F82 Flanged 1-in., Class 300 Straight
F84 Flanged 11/2-in., Class 300 Straight
F86 Flanged 2-in., Class 300 Straight
F88(10) Flanged 1-in., Class 600 Stepped
F90(10) Flanged 11/2-in., Class 600 Stepped
F92(10) Flanged 2-in., Class 600 Stepped
F94(10) Flanged 1-in., Class 600 Tapered
F96(10) Flanged 11/2-in., Class 600 Tapered
F98(10) Flanged 2-in., Class 600 Tapered
F02(10) Flanged 1-in., Class 600 Straight
F04(10) Flanged 11/2-in., Class 600 Straight
F06(10) Flanged 2-in., Class 600 Straight
F16(10) Flanged 11/2-in., Class 900 Tapered
F34(10) Flanged 11/2-in., Class 1500 Tapered
F24(10) Flanged 2-in., Class 1500 Tapered
F08(10) Flanged 11/2-in., Class 2500 Tapered
Q02 Sanitary, Tri-Clamp 1-in., Tri-Clamp Stepped
Q04 Sanitary, Tri-Clamp 11/2-in., Tri-Clamp Stepped
Q06 Sanitary, Tri-Clamp 2-in., Tri-Clamp Stepped
Q08 Sanitary, Tri-Clamp 3-in., Tri-Clamp Stepped
3
Q20 Sanitary, Tri-Clamp /4-in., Tri-Clamp Straight
Q22 Sanitary, Tri-Clamp 1-in., Tri-Clamp Straight
Q24 Sanitary, Tri-Clamp 11/2-in., Tri-Clamp Straight
Q26 Sanitary, Tri-Clamp 2-in., Tri-Clamp Straight
Q28 Sanitary, Tri-Clamp 3-in., Tri-Clamp Straight
Code Options
Sensor
A(11) IEC 751 Class A sensor
Product Certifications
E5 FM Explosion-proof approval (See Figure 26)
E6 CSA Explosion-proof approval (See Figure 27)
E7(12) SAA Flameproof approval (See Figure 29)
E1(13) CENELEC / ATEX Flameproof approval (See Figure 28)

-22
Product Data Sheet
00813-0100-2654, Rev DA
September 2003 Volume 1
Calibration
V1-V7 Choose from option code VCallendar-van Dusen Constants. See Option Code V Callendar-van Dusen Constants.
Option code V4 is not available with Series 68 sensors.
X8Q4 Calibrate to customer-specified temperature range (See Option X8Q4: Sensor Calibrated to a Customer-Specified Temperature Range)
X9Q4 Calibrate to customer-specified single temperature point (See Option X9Q4: Sensor Calibrated to a Customer-Specified Single Point)
Thermowell Options
Q8 Thermowell material certificate
R01 Thermowell special external pressure testing
R03 Thermowell dye penetration testing
R04 Special cleaning for oxygen service
R05 Thermowell NACE approval
R06 Stainless steel plug and chain
R07(14) Full penetration weld
R09(14)(15) Concentric serrations of thermowell flange face
R10 (14)(15) Thermowell flat faced flange
R11 Thermowell vent hole
R14 Thermowell special surface finish (12 Ra Max) (Maximum (U) length = 22.5 in.)
R16(14)(15) Ring joint flange (Not available with 0-in. (T) length)
R20 Electropolishing
R21 Thermowell Wake Frequency Calculation (Configuration Data Sheet required)
R22 Internal pressure testing
R23 Brass plug and chain
Mounting Adapters, Lead Wire Extensions, Connectors, and Seals
M5-M7 Mounting adapters
A1-A8 Twisted lead wire extensions
B1-B8(16) Shielded cable lead wire extensions
C1-C8(16) Armored cable lead wire extensions
D1-D8(16) Armored cable lead wire extensions with electrical plugs
L1-L8 Armored cable mating plugs with lead wire extensions
F1(16) 4-pin bayonet connector
H1-H8 4-pin connector mating plugs with lead wire extensions
J1 Moisture-proof seal assembly for armored cables
XA(3)(17) Assemble connection head or transmitter to a sensor assembly (Teflon (PTFE) paste where appropriate, fully wired.)

(1) FM, CSA, SAA, and CENELEC / ATEX approvals are not available with the polypropylene connection head.
(2) Not available with Sensor Lead Wire Termination codes R, P or W.
(3) Not available with Approval codes E1, E6, or E7.
(4) Codes A and C must be used with an extension length. Additional non-standard (E) lengths are available in 1/2-in. increments from 2.5 to 9-in.
(5) Standard configuration with best delivery.
(6) Available only with straight stem flanged thermowells.
(7) Thermowells with an overall length (U + T = 1.75-in.) of 42-in. or less are machined from solid barstock. Thermowells with an overall length larger than
42-in. will be constructed using a welded 3-piece design and are available only with a stepped stem style.

(8) For additional (T) lengths, see Table 23 on page -47.


(9) Straight or Tapered stem only.
(10) F88 to F08 cannot be used with 0-in. (T) length. F08 cannot be used with 0- or 1/2-in. (T) length
(11) The IEC 751 Class A option is not available with high-temperature sensors.
(12) SAA Flameproof approvals only applicable if installed with a Rosemount 248, 244E, 644, 3144 or 3244MV transmitter.
(13) CENELEC / ATEX Flameproof approvals only applicable if installed with a Rosemount 144, 248, 244E, 644, 3144 or 3244MV transmitter.
(14) Available on flanged thermowells only.
(15) Only one flange face option allowed.
(16) These options are not available with Sensor Lead Wire Termination codes R, P, or W.
(17) If ordering option code XA with a transmitter, specify the same option on the transmitter model code.

TABLE 11. Ordering Example


Typical Lead Wire Extension Extension Immersion Mounting Additional
Model Model Termination Sensor Type Type Length Material Code Length Style Options
Number
0078 N 21 A 30 A 075 T22 E5

-23
Product Data Sheet
00813-0100-2654, Rev DA
Volume 1 September 2003

SERIES 68Q SANITARY PLATINUM RTD SPECIFICATIONS


Rosemount Series 68Q sanitary RTD temperature sensors
measure from 50 to 200 C (58 to 392 F). Series 68Q sensors Performance
are available in Tri-Clamp endcap designs in immersion lengths
from 2.5 to 9.5 inches. Table 12 shows the interchangeability of Temperature Range
the Series 68Q sensor. 50 to 200 C (58 to 392 F)

Accuracy Maximum Hysteresis


0.05% of operating temperature range
TABLE 12. Series 68Q Interchangeability (IEC 751 Class B)
0.55 C (0.99 F) at 50 C (58 F)
Stability
0.30 C (0.54 F) at 0 C (32 F)
0.80 C (1.44 F) at 100 C (212 F) 0.04% maximum ice-point resistance shift following 1,000 hours
1.30 C (2.34 F) at 200 C (392 F) at maximum specified temperature 392 F (200 C).

Construction Response Time


Series 68Q sensors conform to 3-A Sanitary Standards and Less than 3.5 seconds required to reach 63.2% sensor response
feature product contact surfaces designed for CIP cleaning. The in water flowing at 3 ft/s (0.91 m/s). Meets PMO specification
response times of Series 68Q sensors meet the
Grade A Pasteurized Milk Ordinance (PMO) specification for Insulation Resistance
thermometric response of an indicating thermometer on a pipeline. 500  106 ohms minimum insulation resistance when measured at
Series 68Q sensors are offered in a Tri-Clamp sanitary endcap 100 V dc at room temperature
configuration. The sensor capsule is welded into the 316 SST
sanitary endcap/stem assembly. The product contact of this Surface Finish
assembly is polished to a finish that exceeds No. 4 minimum finish 32RA standard finish on product contact surfaces. Meets 3-A
as required by the 3A Sanitary Council Standard #74-02. requirements

Platinum Element and Lead Wire Configurations Environmental


Single-element temperature sensors have four lead wires and may
be used in 2-, 3-, and 4-wire signal conditioning systems. Humidity Limits
Dual-element sensors have six lead wires and may be used in 2-
and 3-wire signal conditioning systems. Lead seal is capable of withstanding 100% relative humidity

Quality Assurance
Each sensor is subjected to a resistance accuracy test at 0 C

Physical Specifications

Sheath Material
316 SST

Lead Wire
Teflon insulated, nickel-coated, 24-gauge stranded copper wire

Identification Data
The model and serial numbers and up to six lines of permanent
tagging information are etched on each sensor. Stainless steel
tags are available upon request

Weight
0.6 to 2.0 lb (0.3 to 0.9 kg)

-24
Product Data Sheet
00813-0100-2654, Rev DA
September 2003 Volume 1

Dimensional Drawings
FIGURE 10. 68Q Sanitary Sensor and Polypropylene Connection Head Dimensional Drawings
68Q Sanitary Sensor with Tri-Clamp Endcap

3.00 (76) R 1.5 (6.35)


Tri-Clamp
Endcap
Stem 0.5 (13) 0.250 (6.35)

0.84 (21)

14 ANPT R 0.250 (6.35) R 0.250 (6.35)

Immersion length must be at least 1-in. greater than stem length. U = R + 1.5-in.
Polypropylene Connection Head

14 ANPT 35
2.90 (74)

1.63 (41) 0.80 (20)

1.175 (30)
3/418 ANPT

1.225 (31)
1.05 (27)
Dimensions are in inches (millimeters)

-25
Product Data Sheet
00813-0100-2654, Rev DA
Volume 1 September 2003

TABLE 13. Series 68Q Sanitary Platinum RTD Sensor Assemblies

Model Product Description


0068Q Series 68Q Sanitary RTD Temperature Sensors
Code Sensor Lead Wire Termination
W Polypropylene Connection Head, Six Terminals
P Aluminum Connection Head, Six Terminals, Flat Cover, Painted
L Aluminum Connection Head, Six Terminals, Extended Cover, Painted
N Sensor only with 6-in. Teflon -insulated, 22-gauge lead wires
Code Sensor Type Temperature
11 Single -50 to 200 C (-58 to 392 F)
15 Dual -50 to 200 C (-58 to 392 F)
Code Immersion Length (U) (in.)
U025 2.5
U030 3.0
U035 3.5
U040(1) 4.0
U045 4.5
U050(1) 5.0
U055 5.5
U060 6.0
U065 6.5
U070 7.0
U075 7.5
U080 8.0
U085 8.5
U090 9.0
U095 9.5
Code Endcap Type O.D. Tube Size (inches)
L100 Tri-Clamp 1.00
L150(1) Tri-Clamp 1.50
L200(1) Tri-Clamp 2.00
L250 Tri-Clamp 2.50
L300 Tri-Clamp 3.00
Code Additional Options
Calibration Options
V1-V7 Choose from option code VCallendar-van Dusen Constants. See Option Code V Callendar-van Dusen Constants. Option codes V3, V4, and
V7 are not available with Series 68Q sensors.
X8Q4 Calibrate to customer-specified temperature range (See Option X8Q4: Sensor Calibrated to a Customer-Specified Temperature Range)
X9Q4 Calibrate to customer-specified single temperature point (See Option X9Q4: Sensor Calibrated to a Customer-Specified Single Point)
R20 Electropolishing of wetted surfaces
XA(2) Assemble connection head or transmitter to a sensor assembly (Teflon (PTFE) paste where appropriate, fully wired.)

(1) Standard configuration with best delivery

(2) If ordering option code XA with a transmitter, specify the same option on the transmitter model code.

Ordering Example
Typical Endcap Type, Tube
Model Model Lead Wire Termination Sensor Type Immersion Length Size Additional Options
Number
0068Q N 11 U050 L150 V2

-26
Product Data Sheet
00813-0100-2654, Rev DA
September 2003 Volume 1

SERIES 58C PLATINUM RTD Stability


Rosemount Series 58C sensors are available in 0.035% maximum ice-point resistance shift following 1,000 hours
12-, 24-, 36-, and 48-inch (X) lengths and may be shortened to any at maximum specified temperature (200 C).
desired length with an ordinary tubing cutter. This cut-to-fit feature
eliminates the need to stock a large selection of sensors in many Insulation Resistance
specific lengths. Table 14 shows the interchangeability of the 500  106 ohms minimum insulation resistance when measured at
Series 58C Sensor. 50 V dc at room temperature.

TABLE 14. Series 58C Interchangeability (IEC 751 Class B) Environmental Specifications
0.55 C (0.99 F) at 50 C (58 F)
0.30 C (0.54 F) at 0 C (32 F) Humidity Limits
0.80 C (1.44 F) at 100 C (212 F)
No permanent rear seal is installed
1.30 C (2.34 F) at 200 C (392 F)

Quality Assurance
Specifications Each sensor is subjected to a resistance accuracy test at 0 C and
an insulation resistance test
Performance Specifications
Physical Specifications
Temperature Range
50 to 200 C (58 to 392 F) Sheath Material
316 SST
Maximum Hysteresis
0.09% of operating temperature range. Lead Wires
Teflon-insulated, nickel-coated, 24-gauge stranded copper wire

Dimensional Drawings
Series 58C Sensor
Do not cut all the way through the sensor sheath when cutting the sensor to length. Damage to the sensor wires could result. To prevent damage to the sensor
wires, score the sheath considerably with a tubing cutter and gently break off the excess.

0.25 0.002 (6.35 0.13) Diameter


4 Lead Wires 6 (152) Long
X Length 0.25 (6)

Sensors-0021A
0.6 (15) Max. Sensing Element
Nylon Sleeve

Do Not Cut or Bend Sheath within 2 (51)

Option Code SNN Spring-Loaded Fitting Option Codes C01, C02, Swagelok Compression Fitting
303 SST. 1/214 ANPT 316 SST. 1/214 ANPT

for 0.25 (6)


for 0.25 (6) Diameter Sensors
Diameter Sensors
Sensors-0020A, B

2.51 1.75
(64) Max. (44) Max.

Dimensions are in inches (millimeters)

-27
Product Data Sheet
00813-0100-2654, Rev DA
Volume 1 September 2003

Ordering Information
TABLE 15. Series 58C Cut-to-Fit RTD Sensors

Model Product Description


0058C Platinum Resistance Temperature Sensor (50 to 200 C (58 to 392 F))
Code Sensor Lead Wire Termination
R Aluminum Connection Head, Six Terminals, Flat Cover, Unpainted
T Aluminum Connection Head, Six Terminals, Extended Cover, Unpainted
P Aluminum Connection Head, Six Terminals, Flat Cover, Painted
L Aluminum Connection Head, Six Terminals, Extended Cover, Painted
W Polypropylene Connection Head
N Sensor only with 6-in. Teflon -insulated, 22-gauge lead wires
Code Sensor Length (X) in inches
1200 12
2400 24
3600 36
4800 48
Code Mounting Adapter
NNN None
C01(1) One-compression fitting 1/214 ANPT
C02 (1)
Two-compression fittings 1/214 ANPT
SNN Spring-loaded fitting 1/214 ANPT

(1) The only difference between C01 and C02 is that the C01 includes one fitting while the C02 option includes two fittings.

Ordering Example
Typical Model Lead Wire Mounting
Number Model Termination Sensor Length Adapter
0058C R 1200 SNN

TABLE 16. Series 58C Spare Parts List


(specify spare part number separately when ordering mounting
adapters)

Mounting Adapters Option Code Spare Part Number


1
Compression fitting /214 ANPT C01 and C02 C07961-0008
Spring loaded fitting 1/214 ANPT SNN 00058-0010-0001

-28
Product Data Sheet
00813-0100-2654, Rev DA
September 2003 Volume 1

SERIES 183 THERMOCOUPLE Specifications


Rosemount Series 183 Thermocouple sensors measure from
180 to 1150 C (292 to 2102 F). Performance Specifications
The thermoelectric current relationship in a thermocouple is
Construction standardized and defined by ASTM E-230. All Series 183
The Series 183 Thermocouples are manufactured using ISA Type Thermocouples conform to these standards with special limits of
J, K, E, or T wire with special limits of error accuracy. The error accuracy. The particular characteristics of each ISA type
junction of these wires is fusion-welded to form a pure joint, to thermocouple are outlined in Table 21.
maintain the integrity of the circuit, and to ensure the highest
accuracy. Grounded junctions are available for improved response Physical
time and good thermal contact with protection from the
environment. The ungrounded and isolated junctions provide Sheath Material
electrical isolation from the sensor sheath (see Figure 11). 304 SST for types J, E, and T (used at temperatures up to 871 C).
Rosemount thermocouples are encased in a protective metal Inconel for type K (used at temperatures up to 1150 C).
sheath. The sheath material is 304 SST for types J, E, and T, used
at temperatures up to 871 C and Inconel for type K, used at Lead Wires
temperatures up to 1150 C. Metallic oxide insulation is compacted Thermocouple, internal16 AWG solid wire (max), 18 AWG solid
into the sheath to mechanically support and electrically insulate wire (min.). External lead wires20 AWG wire, Teflon insulated.
the thermocouple wire. See Table 21 for more information on the Color coded per lead wire configuration schematic shown in Figure
different types of thermocouples. 12.

FIGURE 11. Series 183 Junction Configurations Identification Data


The model and serial numbers and up to six lines of permanent
Single, Grounded Dual, Grounded, Unisolated tagging information are etched on each sensor. Stainless steel
tags are available upon request.
+ +
+
Weight
Capsule sensors: 5 ounces. General-purpose and spring-loaded
sensors: 9 ounces.

Single, Ungrounded Dual, Ungrounded, Unisolated


Insulation Resistance
+
100  106 ohms minimum insulation resistance when measured at
+
+ 100 V dc at room temperature.


Enclosure Ratings
When installed properly, Rosemount Series 183 sensors are
Dual, Ungrounded, Isolated
suitable for indoor and outdoor
NEMA 4X and CSA Enclosure Type 4X installations. See
+ Hazardous Area Approvals for complete installation information.
+

FIGURE 12. Series 183 Lead Wire Configurations

Type J Type E

+ White + Purple

Red Red

Type K Type T

+ Yellow + Blue

Red Red

-29
Product Data Sheet
00813-0100-2654, Rev DA
Volume 1 September 2003

Ordering Information
TABLE 17. Series 183 Thermocouple Sensor Assemblies WITHOUT Thermowell

Model Product Description


0183 Thermocouple Temperature Sensors and Sensor Assemblies
Code Sensor Lead Wire Termination
R Aluminum Connection Head, Six Terminals, Flat Cover, Unpainted
T Aluminum Connection Head, Six Terminals, Extended Cover, Unpainted
P Aluminum Connection Head, Six Terminals, Flat Cover, Painted
L Aluminum Connection Head, Six Terminals, Extended Cover, Painted
W(1) Polypropylene Connection Head
N Sensor only with 6-in. Teflon -insulated, 22-gauge lead wires (12-in. lead wires for dual thermocouples)
Code Sensor Type Junction
Capsule Sensor(2)(3)
01(2) Single Grounded
02 Dual Grounded
03 Single Ungrounded
04 Dual, Unisolated Ungrounded
05 Dual, Isolated Ungrounded
General Purpose Sensors
11 Single Grounded
12 Dual Grounded
13 Single Ungrounded
14 Dual, Unisolated Ungrounded
15 Dual, Isolated Ungrounded
Spring-Loaded Sensors(4)
21 Single Grounded
22 Dual Grounded
23 Single Ungrounded
24 Dual, Unisolated Ungrounded
25 Dual, Isolated Ungrounded
Bayonet Spring-Loaded Sensors(5)(6)
31 Single Grounded
32 Dual Grounded
33 Single Ungrounded
34 Dual, Unisolated Ungrounded
35 Dual, Isolated Ungrounded
Code Thermocouple Type Temperature Range
J2 J 0 to 760 C (32 to 1400 F)
K2 K 0 to 1150 C (32 to 2102 F)
E2 E 0 to 871 C (32 to 1600F)
T2 T 180 to 371 C (292 to 700 F)
J2 J 0 to 760 C (32 to 1400 F)
Code Extension Type Material
A(7) Nipple Coupling SST
C(7) Nipple Union SST
N None (Use with extension length option code 00)
Code Extension Length (E)
00 0.0 in.
30 3.0 in. (X) sensor length = (E) extension length + (L) thermowell length minus 0.25 in. (see Figure 4.)
60 6.0 in.
Code Thermowell Material
N No thermowell required

-30
Product Data Sheet
00813-0100-2654, Rev DA
September 2003 Volume 1

Code Sensor Immersion Length (L) Code Sensor Immersion Length (L) Code Sensor Immersion Length (L)
020 2.0-in. 140 14.0-in. 260 26.0-in.
025 2.5-in. 145 14.5-in. 270 27.0-in.
030 3.0-in. 150(8) 15.0-in. 280 28.0-in.
035 3.5-in. 155 15.5-in. 290 29.0-in.
040(8) 4.0-in. 160 16.0-in. 300 30.0-in.
045 4.5-in. 165 16.5-in. 310 31.0-in.
050 5.0-in. 170 17.0-in. 320 32.0-in.
055 5.5-in. 175 17.5-in. 330 33.0-in.
060(8) 6.0-in. 180(8) 18.0-in. 340 34.0-in.
065 6.5-in. 185 18.5-in. 350 35.0-in.
070 7.0-in. 190 19.0-in. 360 36.0-in.
075 7.5-in. 195 19.5-in. 370 37.0-in.
080 8.0-in. 200 20.0-in. 380 38.0-in.
085 8.5-in. 205 20.5-in. 390 39.0-in.
090(8) 9.0-in. 210 21.0-in. 400 40.0-in.
095 9.5-in. 215 21.5-in. 410 41.0-in.
100 10.0-in. 220 22.0-in. 420 42.0-in.
105 10.5-in. 225 22.5-in. 430 43.0-in.
110 11.0-in. 230 23.0-in. 440 44.0-in.
115 11.5-in. 235 23.5-in. 450 45.0-in.
120(8) 12.0-in. 240 24.0-in. 460 46.0-in.
125 12.5-in. 245 15.5-in. 470 47.0-in.
130 13.0-in. 250 25.0-in. 480 48.0-in.
135 13.5-in.
Code Options
Product Certifications
E5 FM Explosion-proof approval (See Figure 26)
E6 CSA Explosion-proof approval (See Figure 27)
E7(9) SAA Flameproof approval (See Figure 29)
E1(10) CENELEC / ATEX Flameproof approval (See Figure 28)
Mounting Adapters, Lead Wire Extensions, Connectors, and Seals
M5-M7 Mounting adapters
Assembly Options
XA(11) Assemble connection head or transmitter to a sensor assembly (hand tight, Teflon (PTFE) paste where appropriate, fully wired.)

(1) FM, CSA, SAA, and CENELEC / ATEX approvals are not available with the polypropylene connection head.

(2) This option must be used with Sensor Lead Wire Termination code N and is not available with assembly options XA.

(3) Cannot be used with approval option codes E1, E5, E6, or E7. See Mounting Adapters for Series 58, 68, 78, and 183 on page -50.

(4) Spring-loaded sensors must be installed in a thermowell assembly to meet the requirement option code E6.

(5) This option is not available with explosion-proof approval option code E6.

(6) Bayonet spring-loaded style is available to 45-inches but is not available with Sensor Lead Wire Termination codes R, P, or W.

(7) Codes A and C must be used with an extension length. Additional non-standard (E) lengths are available in 1/2-in. increments from 2.5 to 9-in.

(8) Standard configuration with best delivery

(9) SAA Flameproof approvals only applicable if installed with a Rosemount 248, 244E, 644, 3144 or 3244MV transmitter.

(10) CENELEC / ATEX Flameproof approvals only applicable if installed with a Rosemount 144, 248, 244E, 644, 3144 or 3244MV transmitter.

(11) If ordering option code XA with a transmitter, specify the same option on the transmitter model code.

TABLE 18. Ordering Example


Typical Lead Wire Extension Extension Thermowell Immersion Additional
Model Model Termination Sensor Type ISA Type Type Length Code Length Options
Number
0183 N 11 J2 N 00 N 045 E5

-31
Product Data Sheet
00813-0100-2654, Rev DA
Volume 1 September 2003

TABLE 19. Series 183 Thermocouple Sensor Assemblies WITH Thermowell


Model Product Description
0183 Thermocouple Temperature Sensors and Sensor Assemblies
Code Sensor Lead Wire Termination
R Aluminum Connection Head, Six Terminals, Flat Cover, Unpainted
T Aluminum Connection Head, Six Terminals, Extended Cover, Unpainted
P Aluminum Connection Head, Six Terminals, Flat Cover, Painted
L Aluminum Connection Head, Six Terminals, Extended Cover, Painted
W(1) Polypropylene Connection Head
N Sensor only with 6-in. Teflon -insulated, 22-gauge lead wires
Code Sensor Type Junction
General-Purpose Sensors
11 Single Grounded
12 Dual Grounded
13 Single Ungrounded
14 Dual, Unisolated Ungrounded
15 Dual, Isolated
Spring-Loaded Sensors
21 Single Grounded
22 Dual Grounded
23 Single Ungrounded
24 Dual, Unisolated Ungrounded
25 Dual, Isolated Ungrounded
Bayonet Spring-Loaded Sensors(2)(3)
31 Single Grounded
32 Dual Grounded
33 Single Ungrounded
34 Dual, Unisolated Ungrounded
35 Dual, Isolated Ungrounded
Code Thermocouple Type Temperature Range
J2 J 0 to 760 C (32 to 1400 F)
K2 K 0 to 1150 C (32 to 2102 F)
E2 E 0 to 871 C (32 to 1600F)
T2 T 180 to 371 C (292 to 700 F)
Code Extension Type Material
A(4) Nipple Coupling SST
C(4) Nipple Union SST
N None (Use with extension length option code 00)
Code Extension Length (E)
00 0.0 in.
30 3.0 in.
60 6.0 in.
Code Thermowell Material Code Thermowell Material
A Type 316 SST(5) J Hastelloy C (with 304 SST Flange, if flange style is ordered)
B Type 304 SST L Hastelloy B (with 304 SST Flange, if flange style is ordered)
C Carbon Steel M 304 SST with Teflon (PTFE) coating
D 316L SST P Chrome Molybdenum F22
E 304L SST R Nickel 200
F Alloy 20 T Titanium
G Monel U(6) 316 SST with Tantalum Sheath
H Inconel 600 W 321 SST
Z Chrome Molybdenum F11

-32
Product Data Sheet
00813-0100-2654, Rev DA
September 2003 Volume 1

Code Length Code Length Code Length


U(7) L T(8) U(7) L T(8) U(7) L T(8)
015(9) 1.5-in. 4.0-in. 1.0-in. 090 9.0-in. 12.0-in. 1.5-in. 165 16.5-in. 18.0-in. 0.0-in.
020(9) 2.0-in. 4.0-in. 0.5-in. 095 9.5-in. 12.0-in. 1.0-in. 170 17.0-in. 21.0-in. 2.5-in.
025(9) 2.5-in. 4.0-in. 0.0-in. 100 10.0-in. 12.0-in. 0.5-in. 175 17.5-in. 21.0-in. 2.0-in.
030 3.0-in. 6.0-in. 1.5-in. 105(5) 10.5-in. 12.0-in. 0.0-in. 180 18.0-in. 21.0-in. 1.5-in.
035 3.5-in. 6.0-in. 1.0-in. 110 11.0-in. 15.0-in. 2.5-in. 160 16.0-in. 18.0-in. 0.5-in.
040 4.0-in. 6.0-in. 0.5-in. 115 11.5-in. 15.0-in. 2.0-in. 185 18.5-in. 21.0-in. 1.0-in.
045(5) 4.5-in. 6.0-in. 0.0-in. 120 12.0-in. 15.0-in. 1.5-in. 190 19.0-in. 21.0-in. 0.5-in.
050 5.0-in. 9.0-in. 2.5-in. 125 12.5-in. 15.0-in. 1.0-in. 195 19.5-in. 21.0-in. 0.0-in.
055 5.5-in. 9.0-in. 2.0-in. 130 13.0-in. 15.0-in. 0.5-in. 200 20.0-in. 24.0-in. 2.5-in.
060 6.0-in. 9.0-in. 1.5-in. 135 13.5-in. 15.0-in. 0.0-in. 205 20.5-in. 24.0-in. 2.0-in.
065 6.5-in. 9.0-in. 1.0-in. 140 14.0-in. 18.0-in. 2.5-in. 210 21.0-in. 24.0-in. 1.5-in.
070 7.0-in. 9.0-in. 0.5-in. 145 14.5-in. 18.0-in. 2.0-in. 215 21.5-in. 24.0-in. 1.0-in.
075(5) 7.5-in. 9.0-in. 0.0-in. 150 15.0-in. 18.0-in. 1.5-in. 220 22.0-in. 24.0-in. 0.5-in.
080 8.0-in. 12.0-in. 2.5-in. 155 15.5-in. 18.0-in. 1.0-in. 225 22.5-in. 24.0-in. 0.0-in.
085 8.5-in. 12.0-in. 2.0-in.
Code Thermowell Mounting Stem
T20(5) Threaded 1/2-14 ANPT Stepped
3/4-14 ANPT
T22(5) Threaded Stepped
T24(5) Threaded 1-11.5 ANPT Stepped
T26 Threaded 3/4-14 ANPT Tapered
T28 Threaded 1-11.5 ANPT Tapered
T30 Threaded 11/2-11 ANPT Tapered
T32 Threaded 1/2-14 ANPT Straight
3/4-14 ANPT
T34 Threaded Straight
T36 Threaded 1-11.5 ANPT Straight
T38 Threaded 3/4-14 ANPT Straight
1/2-14 ANPT
T44 Threaded Tapered
3
W38 Welded /4-in. pipe Stepped
W40 Welded 1-in. pipe Stepped
3/4-in. pipe
W42 Welded Tapered
W44 Welded 1-in. pipe Tapered
W46 Welded 11/4-in. pipe Tapered
3/4-in. pipe
W48 Welded Straight
W50 Welded 1-in. pipe Straight
F10 Flanged 2-in., Class 150 Straight
F12 Flanged 3-in., Class 150 Straight
F52 Flanged 1-in., Class 150 Stepped
F54 Flanged 11/2-in., Class 150 Stepped
F56 Flanged 2-in., Class 150 Stepped
F58 Flanged 1-in., Class 150 Tapered
F60 Flanged 11/2-in., Class 150 Tapered
F62 Flanged 1-11.5 ANPT Stepped
F64 Flanged 1-in., Class 150 Straight
F66 Flanged 11/2-in., Class 150 Straight
F70 Flanged 1-in., Class 300 Stepped
F72 Flanged 11/2-in., Class 300 Stepped
F74 Flanged 2-in., Class 300 Stepped
F76 Flanged 1-in., Class 300 Tapered
F78 Flanged 11/2-in., Class 300 Tapered
F80 Flanged 2-in., Class 300 Tapered
F82 Flanged 1-in., Class 300 Straight
F84 Flanged 11/2-in., Class 300 Straight
F86 Flanged 2-in., Class 300 Straight
F88(10) Flanged 1-in., Class 600 Stepped
F90(10) Flanged 11/2-in., Class 600 Stepped
F92(10) Flanged 2-in., Class 600 Stepped
F94(10) Flanged 1-in., Class 600 Tapered
F96(10) Flanged 11/2-in., Class 600 Tapered
F98(10) Flanged 2-in., Class 600 Tapered
F02(10) Flanged 1-in., Class 600 Straight
F04(10) Flanged 11/2-in., Class 600 Straight
F06(10) Flanged 2-in., Class 600 Straight
F16(10) Flanged 11/2-in., Class 900 Tapered
F34(10) Flanged 11/2-in., Class 1500 Tapered

-33
Product Data Sheet
00813-0100-2654, Rev DA
Volume 1 September 2003

F24(10) Flanged 2-in., Class 1500 Tapered


F08(10) Flanged 11/2-in., Class 2500 Tapered
Q02 Sanitary, Tri-Clamp 1-in., Tri-Clamp Stepped
Q04 Sanitary, Tri-Clamp 11/2-in., Tri-Clamp Stepped
Q06 Sanitary, Tri-Clamp 2-in., Tri-Clamp Stepped
Q08 Sanitary, Tri-Clamp 3-in., Tri-Clamp Stepped
3
Q20 Sanitary, Tri-Clamp /4-in., Tri-Clamp Straight
Q22 Sanitary, Tri-Clamp 1-in., Tri-Clamp Straight
Q24 Sanitary, Tri-Clamp 11/2-in., Tri-Clamp Straight
Q26 Sanitary, Tri-Clamp 2-in., Tri-Clamp Straight
Q28 Sanitary, Tri-Clamp 3-in., Tri-Clamp Straight
Code Options
Product Certifications
E5 FM Explosion-proof approval (See Figure 26)
E6 CSA Explosion-proof approval (See Figure 27)
E7(11) SAA Flameproof approval (See Figure 29)
E1(12) CENELEC / ATEX Flameproof approval (See Figure 28)
Thermowell Options
Q8 Thermowell material certificate
R01 Full penetration weld
R03 Thermowell dye penetration testing
R04 Special cleaning for oxygen service
R05 Thermowell NACE approval
R06 Stainless steel plug and chain
R07(13) Full penetration weld
R09(13)(14) Concentric serrations of thermowell flange face
R10 (13)(14) Thermowell flat faced flange
R11 Thermowell vent hole
R14 Thermowell special surface finish (12 Ra Max) (Maximum (U) length = 22.5 in.)
R16(13)(14) Ring joint flange (Not available with 0-in. (T) length)
R20 Electropolishing
R21 Thermowell Wake Frequency Calculation (Configuration Data Sheet required)
R22 Internal pressure testing
R23 Brass plug and chain
Mounting Adapters, Lead Wire Extensions, Connectors, and Seals
M5-M7 Mounting adapters
Assembly Options
XA(15) Assemble connection head or transmitter to a sensor assembly (Teflon (PTFE) paste where appropriate, fully wired.)

(1) FM, CSA, SAA, and CENELEC / ATEX approvals are not available with the polypropylene connection head.

(2) This option is not available with explosion-proof approval option codes E1, E5, E6, or E7.

(3) Bayonet spring-loaded style available to 45 inches. Codes 31 - 35 are not available with Sensor Lead Wire Termination codes R or P.

(4) Codes A and C must be used with an extension length. Additional non-standard (E) lengths are available in 1/2-in. increments from 2.5 to 9-in.

(5) Standard configuration with best delivery.

(6) Available only with straight stem thermowells.

(7) Thermowells with an overall length (U + T = 1.75-in.) of 42-in. or less are machined from solid barstock. Thermowells with an overall length larger than
42-in. will be constructed using a welded 3-piece design and are available only with a stepped stem style.

(8) For additional (T) lengths, see Table 23 on page -47.


(9) Straight or Tapered stem thermowells only.

(10) Cannot be used with 0-in. (T) length. F08 cannot be used with 0- or 1/2-in. (T) length

(11) SAA Flameproof approvals only applicable if installed with a Rosemount 248, 244E, 644, 3144 or 3244MV transmitter.

(12) CENELEC / ATEX Flameproof approvals only applicable if installed with a Rosemount 144, 248, 244E, 644, 3144 or 3244MV transmitter.

(13) Available on flanged thermowells only.

(14) Only one flange face option allowed.

(15) If ordering option code XA with a transmitter, specify the same option on the transmitter model code.

TABLE 20. Ordering Example


Typical Lead Wire Sensor Extension Extension Material Immersion Mounting Additional
Model Model Termination Type ISA Type Type Length Code Length Style Options
Number
0183 N 21 J2 A 30 A 075 T22 E5

-34
Product Data Sheet
00813-0100-2654, Rev DA
September 2003 Volume 1

Comparison of Thermocouples

80

Type E

60
Type K
Millivolts (approx.)

Type J

40

Type T
20

SENSORS_VOL1_01A
0
32 1000 2000

Degrees Farenheit

Thermocouple Conditions for Use


Type J Maximum operating temperature of 760 C (1400 F). Used with or without protective tubing where deficiency of free oxygen
Iron / Constantan exists. Protective tube not essential, but desirable for cleanliness and longer service.
Type K Suitable for extended use in temperature reaching 1150 C (2102 F). Use of metal or ceramic protective tube desirable,
Chromel / Alumel especially in reducing atmospheres. in oxidizing atmospheres, protective tubing necessary only to promote cleanliness and
longer service.
Type E Suitable for use at temperature p to 900 C (1652 F) in vacuum r inert, mildly oxidizing or reducing atmosphere. Not subject to
Chromel / Constantan corrosion at cryogenic temperatures. Has highest EMF output per degree of all commonly used thermocouples.
Type T Operating temperature range of 180 to 371 C (292 to 700 F). Use in either oxidizing or reducing atmospheres. Protective
Copper /Constantan tubing necessary only to promote cleanliness and longer service. Stable at lower temperature. Superior for a wide variety of uses
in cryogenic temperatures.

TABLE 21. Characteristics of Series 183 Thermocouple Types


ISA Temperature Range
Thermocouple Thermocouple Wire
Types Alloys C F Limits of Error (Interchangeability)
J Iron/Constantan 0 to 760 32 to 1400 1.1 C or 0.4% of measured temperature, whichever is greater
K Chromel/Alumel 0 to 1150 32 to 2102 1.1 C or 0.4% of measured temperature, whichever is greater
E Chromel/Constantan 0 to 871 32 to 1600 1.0 C or 0.4% of measured temperature, whichever is greater
T Copper/Constantan 180 to 0 292 to 32 1.0 C or 1.5% of measured temperature, whichever is greater
0 to 371 32 to 700 0.5 C or 0.4% of measured temperature, whichever is greater

-35
Product Data Sheet
00813-0100-2654, Rev DA
Volume 1 September 2003

Calibration
CALIBRATION OPTIONS Note that this is a modification of the fourth-order CVD equation
where  = 0 for temperatures greater than 0 C. Since this
Sensor calibration may be required for input to quality systems, or modified equation is a second-order degree equation, at least
for control system enhancement. More frequently, it is used to
three distinct temperature values are needed in order to curve fit
improve the overall temperature measurement performance by
the behavior of the RTD. For the temperature range from 0 to 100
matching the sensor to a temperature transmitter. C only these two end points are used, and an approximation is
Transmitter-Sensor matching is available for RTD sensors used
made to render the constants.
with Rosemount 644, 3144P, and 3244MV temperature
Once the sensor-specific constants are entered, the transmitter
transmitters where the inherent stability and repeatability of the
RTD technology is well established. uses them to generate a custom curve to best describe the
relationship between resistance and temperature for the particular
sensor and transmitter system. Matching a Series 68 or 78 RTD
Transmitter-Sensor Matching sensor to a 644, 3144P, and 3244MV transmitter typically results in
Using Callendar-Van Dusen Constants a 3- or 4-fold improvement in temperature measurement accuracy
for the total system. This substantial system accuracy
Significant temperature measurement accuracy improvement can
be attained using a temperature sensor that is matched to a improvement is realized as a result of the transmitters ability to
use the sensors actual resistance-vs.-temperature curve instead
temperature transmitter. This matching process entails teaching
of an ideal curve.
the temperature transmitter the relationship between resistance
and temperature for a specific RTD sensor. This relationship, An example of the benefits of using the sensor matching capability
approximated by the Callendar-Van Dusen equation, described as: of a Rosemount 3144P Temperature transmitter along with a
matched Series 68 RTD sensor are shown in Typical
Rt = Ro + Ro[t (0.01t 1)(0.01t) (0.01t 1)(0.01t)3], Transmitter-Sensor Matching Uncertainty Improvements.
where:
Calibration Uncertainty
Rt = Resistance (ohms) at Temperature t (C)
Calibration uncertainties of the lab are equal to or better than 1/10
Ro = Sensor-Specific Constant (Resistance at t = 0 C)
IEC 751 Class B interchangeability:
=Sensor-Specific Constant
=Sensor-Specific Constant Uncertainty = 0.03 + 0.0005 t
=Sensor-Specific Constant (0 at t > 0 C, 0.11 at t < 0C)
t = absolute value of temperature in C
The exact values for R0, , , , known as Callendar-Van Dusen
(CVD) constants are specific to each RTD sensor, and are
established by testing each individual sensor at various
temperatures.
The calibration temperature values using the CVD equation are
divided into two major temperature areas: above 0 C and below 0
C. The calibration for the temperature range between 0 and 660
C is obtained from the following formula:
t t
R t = R 0 1 +  t  --------- --------- 1
100 100

-36
Product Data Sheet
00813-0100-2654, Rev DA
September 2003 Volume 1

TYPICAL TRANSMITTER-SENSOR MATCHING UNCERTAINTY IMPROVEMENTS


Transmitter: 3144 (has built-in sensor matching Sensor Interchangeability Total Calibrated Sensor
capabilities), span of 1 to 200 C, accuracy = 0.1 C) Temperature Error Uncertainty(1)
Sensor: Series 68 RTD C F C F C F
Callendar van Dusen Option: V2 0 32 0.30 0.54 0.10 0.18
Process Temperature: 150 C 50 122 0.55 0.99 0.17 0.31
100 212 0.80 1.44 0.22 0.40
150 302 1.05 1.89 0.18 0.32
200 392 1.30 2.34 0.16 0.29

(1) Includes calibration uncertainties of the lab, hysteresis, and repeatability.

System Uncertainty Comparison at 150 C:


Standard 68 Sensor
Rosemount 3144: 0.10 C
1.0 C Standard Series 68 RTD: 1.05 C
1.05 C
Total System(1): 1.05 C
0.75 C
68 Sensor with V2 Option
Rosemount 3144: 0.10 C
0.5 C
Standard Series 68 RTD: 0.18 C
Total System(1): 0.21 C
0.22 C
Standard With Sensor
Matching

(1) Calculated using RSS statistical method:

SystemAccuracy = ( TransmitterAccuracy )2 + ( SensorAccuracy ) 2

ORDERING INFORMATION

Sensor Characterization
(Calibration) Schedules Option Code V
Series 68, 68Q, and 78 RTD sensors can be ordered with an For applications requiring the increased accuracy obtainable
option (V1, V2,...V7, see Option Code V Callendar-van Dusen through a matched sensor and transmitter, order the appropriate
Constants), that provides Callendar-Van Dusen constants that are V option (seeOption Code V Callendar-van Dusen Constants).
shipped with the sensor. When you order this option, the values of To ensure optimal performance, select a V option such that the
all four sensor-specific constants are physically attached to each sensors range of actual operation is between the minimum and
sensor with a wire-on tag. Rosemount 644, 3144P, and 3244MV maximum calibration points.
have a unique, built-in sensor matching capability. To use this The accuracy (uncertainty) of different calibration points varies
capability, the four sensor-specific constants are programmed into because each calibration schedule has specific hysteresis and
the 644, 3144P, and 3244MV at the factory by ordering a C2 repeatability characteristics. For example, the accuracy of
option on the transmitter, or easily entered and changed in the calibration points at 100 C for options V1 and V2 differs because
field using a HART Communicator or AMS. When these values are of the two different temperature ranges.
entered into a Rosemount 644, 3144P, and 3244MV, the sensor
and transmitter become matched.
NOTE
Each V option is specific to a particular temperature range for a
An RTD ordered with the V option is shipped with CVD constants
given sensor type (see Option Code V Callendar-van Dusen
only; it does not include calibration tables.
Constants). As with option code X8Q4, the accuracies associated
with each option code represent worst-case conditions when the
sensor is used over the entire temperature range.

-37
Product Data Sheet
00813-0100-2654, Rev DA
Volume 1 September 2003

OPTION CODE V CALLENDAR-VAN DUSEN CONSTANTS

Total Uncertainty(2) of Calibrated Sensor

Option Calibration Uncertainty(1) of Series 78 Series 78 High


Code Temperature Range Points Calibration Lab Series 68 Standard Temperature

C F C F C F C F C F C F
V1(3) 0 to 100 32 to 212 0 32 0.03 0.05 0.06 0.11 0.06 0.11 0.06 0.11
100 212 0.08 0.14 0.10 0.18 0.10 0.18 0.10 0.18
V2(3) 0 to 200 32 to 392 0 32 0.03 0.05 0.10 0.18 0.09 0.16 0.10 0.18
100 212 0.08 0.14 0.22 0.40 0.15 0.27 0.23 0.41
200 392 0.13 0.23 0.16 0.29 0.15 0.27 0.16 0.29
V3(3) 0 to 400 32 to 752 0 32 0.03 0.05 0.20 0.29 0.16 0.29 0.20 0.29
200 392 0.13 0.23 0.42 0.76 0.29 0.52 0.44 0.79
400 752 0.23 0.41 0.30 0.54 0.28 0.50 0.30 0.54
V4(3)(4) 0 to 600 32 to 1112 0 32 0.03 0.05 NA NA NA NA NA NA
200 392 0.13 0.23 NA NA NA NA NA NA
400 752 0.23 0.41 NA NA NA NA NA NA
V5(3) 50 to 100 58 to 212 0 32 0.03 0.05 0.08 0.14 0.06 0.11 0.09 0.16
100 212 0.08 0.14 0.10 0.18 0.10 0.18 0.10 0.18
V6(3) 50 to 100 58 to 392 50 58 0.06 0.10 0.14 0.25 0.11 0.20 0.14 0.25
0 32 0.03 0.05 0.20 0.36 0.14 v0.25 0.21 0.38
100 212 0.08 0.14 0.26 0.47 0.18 0.32 0.27 0.49
200 392 0.13 0.23 0.18 0.32 0.16 0.29 0.17 0.3
V7(3) 50 to 400 58 to 752 50 58 0.06 0.10 0.23 0.41 0.19 0.34 0.23 0.41
0 32 0.03 0.05 0.31 0.56 0.22 0.40 0.32 0.58
200 392 0.13 0.23 0.46 0.83 0.31 0.56 0.48 0.86
400 752 0.23 0.41 0.32 0.58 0.29 0.52 0.32 0.58

(1) Includes only the uncertainly of the lab.

(2) Includes the uncertainty of the lab, hysteresis, and repeatability.

(3) Uncertainties are valid for option code X8Q4 when ordered with the corresponding temperature range. The largest error shown in each temperature range
is the worst case error for all points not shown in that range.

(4) Only available with Series 78 High Temperature Sensors 10-in. or longer.

Ordering Information
Specify Sensor Model Number with V Option Example
Sensor Model 0068 N 11 N 00 N 120 V2

FIGURE 13. Typical Sensor Ordered with Option Code V

Sensors-0004B

-38
Product Data Sheet
00813-0100-2654, Rev DA
September 2003 Volume 1

Option Code X8Q4


The X8Q4 option calibrates the sensor to a customer-specified FIGURE 14. Graph of a Typical Two-point Trim
temperature range. The X8Q4 report includes the Callendar-Van
Dusen (CVD) constants (Ro, , , ), a resistance-versus- A two-point trim
temperature table in one-degree increments, and a graph which shifts the ideal curve

Resistance ()
includes the maximum errors due to the uncertainty of the up or down, and
calibration equipment, hysteresis, and repeatability. The values in changes the slop
the tables are calculated using Callendar-Van Dusen based on the two
methodology. Two of the values on this table could be used to characterized
perform a two-point trim. The X8Q4 option also provides the CVD points.
constants on a stainless steel tag attached to the sensor. Temperature (C)
See Figure 16.

Option X8Q4: Sensor Calibrated to a Customer-Specified Temperature Range


When you order an RTD with the X8Q4 option, you must specify a temperature range over which the sensor is to be calibrated. Before
specifying the range, take careful note of the sensor temperature limits.

Ordering Example:

Typical Lead Wire Sensor Extension Extension Thermowell Immersion Additional


Model Model Termination Type Type Length Material Length Options
Number
0068 N 11 N 00 N 045 X8Q4
X8X9Q4
If X8Q4 and X9Q4 are both required, do not repeat the Q4 code in the model string. Include the following instead:
Calibrate from 10 to 120 C

Option Code X9Q4


The X9Q4 option calibrates the sensor at a single FIGURE 15. Graph of a Typical One-point Trim
customer-specified point. A calibration certificate with the
resistance value at this point is supplied. This value could be used
to perform a one-point trim on the transmitter.All characterizations
are traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology
(NIST). The calibration table is dated and marked with the sensor
Resistance ()

series and serial number.

Sensors-0000_04A
See Figure 17.

NOTE
The X9Q4 option can be ordered and used in conjunction with the Temperature (C)
X8Q4 option.
A one-point trim shifts the ideal curve up or down based on the
single characterized point.

Option X9Q4: Sensor Calibrated to a Customer-Specified Single Point


When you order an RTD with theX9Q4 option, you must specify a single temperature point at which the sensor is to be calibrated. Before
specifying the point, take careful note of the sensor temperature limits.

Ordering Example:

Typical Lead Wire Sensor Extension Extension Thermowell Immersion Additional


Model Model Termination Type Type Length Material Length Options
Number
0068 N 11 N 00 N 045 X9Q4
If X8Q4 and X9Q4 are both required, do not repeat the Q4 code in the model string. Include the following instead: X8X9Q4
Calibrate at 50 C

-39
Product Data Sheet
00813-0100-2654, Rev DA
Volume 1 September 2003

FIGURE 16. Example of Report Provided with X8Q4 Option

-40
Product Data Sheet
00813-0100-2654, Rev DA
September 2003 Volume 1

-41
Product Data Sheet
00813-0100-2654, Rev DA
Volume 1 September 2003

-42
Product Data Sheet
00813-0100-2654, Rev DA
September 2003 Volume 1

-43
Product Data Sheet
00813-0100-2654, Rev DA
Volume 1 September 2003

-44
Product Data Sheet
00813-0100-2654, Rev DA
September 2003 Volume 1
FIGURE 17. Example of Report Provided with X9Q4 Option

-45
Product Data Sheet
00813-0100-2654, Rev DA
Volume 1 September 2003

-46
Product Data Sheet
00813-0100-2654, Rev DA
September 2003 Volume 1
TABLE 22. Option Code X9Q4 Calibration Uncertainties for the Series 68 and 78 Standard and High Temperature
Temperature Uncertainty of Calibration Lab(1) Total Uncertainty of Calibrated Sensor(2)
C F C F C F
50 58 0.06 0.10 0.07 0.13
0 32 0.03 0.05 0.06 0.11
100 212 0.08 0.14 0.09 0.16
200 392 0.13 0.23 0.14 0.25
400 752 0.23 0.41 0.24 0.43

(1) Includes only the uncertainty of the lab.

(2) Includes uncertainty of the lab and repeatability.

TABLE 23. Resistance vs. Temperature


IEC 751
Platinum 100, = 0.00385 RTD
F Ohms F Ohms F Ohms C Ohms C Ohms C Ohms
330 18.04 210 138.08 690 235.15 200 18.52 90 134.71 380 240.18
320 20.44 220 140.19 700 237.09 190 22.83 100 138.51 390 243.64
310 22.83 230 142.29 710 239.02 180 27.10 110 142.29 400 247.09
300 25.20 240 144.39 720 240.95 170 31.34 120 146.07 410 250.53
290 27.57 250 146.49 730 242.87 160 35.54 130 149.83 420 253.96
280 29.93 260 148.58 740 244.79 150 39.72 140 153.58 430 257.38
270 32.27 270 150.67 750 246.71 140 43.88 150 157.33 440 260.78
260 34.61 280 152.75 760 248.62 130 48.00 160 161.05 450 264.18
250 36.94 290 154.83 770 250.53 120 52.11 170 164.77 460 267.56
240 39.26 300 156.91 780 252.44 110 56.19 180 168.48 470 270.93
230 41.57 310 158.98 790 254.34 100 60.26 190 172.17 480 274.29
220 43.88 320 161.05 800 256.24 90 64.30 200 175.86 490 277.64
210 46.17 330 163.12 810 258.14 80 68.33 210 179.53 500 280.98
200 48.46 340 165.18 820 260.03 70 72.33 220 183.17 510 284.30
190 50.74 350 167.24 840 263.80 60 76.33 230 186.84 520 287.62
180 53.02 360 169.30 850 265.68 50 80.31 240 190.47 530 290.92
170 55.29 370 171.35 860 267.56 40 84.27 250 194.10 540 294.21
160 57.55 380 173.40 870 269.44 30 88.22 260 197.71 550 297.49
150 59.81 390 175.45 880 271.31 20 92.16 270 201.31 560 300.74
140 62.06 400 177.49 890 273.17 10 96.09 280 204.90 570 304.01
130 64.30 410 179.53 900 275.04 0 100.00 290 208.48 580 307.25
120 66.54 420 181.56 910 276.90 10 103.90 300 212.05 590 310.49
110 68.77 430 183.59 920 278.75 20 107.79 310 215.61 600 313.71
100 71.00 380 173.40 930 280.61 30 111.67 320 219.15 610 316.92
90 73.22 390 175.45 940 282.46 40 115.54 330 222.68 620 320.12
80 75.44 400 177.49 950 284.30 50 119.40 340 226.21 630 323.30
70 77.66 410 179.53 960 286.14 60 123.24 350 229.72 640 326.48
60 79.86 420 181.56 970 287.98 70 127.08 360 233.21 650 329.64
50 82.07 430 183.59 980 289.82 80 130.90 370 236.70 660 332.79
40 84.27 450 187.65 990 291.65
30 86.47 460 189.67 1000 293.48
20 88.66 470 191.68 1010 295.30
10 90.85 480 193.70 1020 297.12
10 93.03 490 195.71 1030 298.94
20 95.21 500 197.71 1040 300.75
30 97.39 510 199.71 1050 302.56 Note
40 99.57 520 201.71 1060 304.37
50 101.74 530 203.71 1070 306.17 To covert from C to F: {1.8 X (C)] + 32 = F
60 106.07 540 205.70 1080 307.97 Example: (1.8 X 100) + 32 = 212 F
70 108.23 550 207.69 1090 309.77
80 110.38 560 209.67 1100 311.56
90 112.53 570 211.66 1110 313.35 To convert from F to C: 0.556 [(F) 32] = 100 F
100 114.68 580 213.63 1120 315.14 Example: 0.556 (212 32) = 100 C
110 116.83 590 215.61 1130 316.92
120 118.97 600 217.58 1140 318.70
130 121.11 610 219.55 1150 320.47
140 123.24 620 221.51 1160 322.24
150 125.37 630 223.47 1170 324.01
160 127.50 640 225.42 1180 325.77
170 129.62 650 227.38 1190 327.53
180 131.74 660 229.33 1200 329.29
190 133.86 670 231.27 1210 331.04
200 135.97 680 233.21

-47
Product Data Sheet
00813-0100-2654, Rev DA
Volume 1 September 2003

Mounting Accessories
EXTENSION FITTING ASSEMBLIES FIGURE 19. 3144 Transmitter Housing Temperature Rise
versus Extension Length for a Test Installation
Extension fitting assemblies are available in
a coupling and nipple assembly
a union and nipple assembly 60

FIGURE 18. Extension Fitting 50

40
HOUSING
Length (E) (Nominal) Coupling and Nipple RISE ABOVE 30
Assembly AMBIENT (C) 815 C Oven Temperature

20

Sensors-0036A

3044-0123A
540 C Oven
Temperature
10
0.53 (13) Max. Thread Engagement (14 ANPT Ref.)
250 C Oven Temperature
0
3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Union and Nipple N LENGTH (in.)
Assembly

Example
Dimensions are in inches (millimeters)
The rated ambient temperature specification is 85 C. If the
TABLE 24. Extension maximum ambient temperature is 40 C and the process
temperature to be measured is 540 C, the maximum allowable
Coupling and Nipple, SST Union and Nipple, SST housing temperature rise is the rated temperature specification
Nom. Nom.
limit minus the existing ambient temperature (85 40), or 45 C.
Length (E) Length (E) As shown in Figure 19, an extension (E) dimension of 3.0-in (76
Model Number (inches) Model Number (Inches) mm) will result in a housing temperature rise of 30 C. An E
7903540250 2.5 7903550250 2.5 dimension of 3-in. would therefore be the minimum recommended
7903540300 3.0(1) 7903550300 3.0(1) length, and would provide a safety factor of about 15 C. A longer
7903540350 3.5 7903550350 3.5 E dimension, such as 6-in. (152 mm), would be desirable in order
7903540400 4.0 7903550400 4.0 to reduce errors caused by transmitter temperature effect,
7903540450 4.5 7903550450 4.5 although in that case the transmitter would probably require extra
79035-0500 5.0 7903550500 5.0 support. If a thermowell with lagging is used, the E dimension
7903540550 5.5 7903550550 5.5 may be reduced by the length of the lagging.
7903540600 6.0(1) 7903550600 6.0(1)
7903540650 6.5 7903550650 6.5 FLAT COVER CONNECTION HEAD
7903540700 7.0 7903550700 7.0
The Flat Cover Connection Head (P/N 00079-0325-xxxx) is for
7903540750 7.5 7903550750 7.5
general-purpose and spring-loaded sensors. The terminal block
7903540800 8.0 7903550800 8.0
has six terminals for either single- or dual-element sensors.
7903540850 8.5 7903550850 8.5
7903540900 9.0 7903550900 9.0

(1) Standard configuration with best delivery. Also available for


EXTENDED COVER CONNECTION HEAD
emergency requirements. Consult factory for information. The Extended Cover Connection Head (P/N 00079-0324-xxxx)
provides the additional space required by sensors that have
Choosing an Extension and a bayonet connectors. This model can also be used with
general-purpose and spring-loaded sensors. The terminal block
Thermowell has six terminals for either single- or dual-element sensors.
Aside from ambient temperature variations, the heat from the
process is transferred from the thermowell to the transmitter Specifications
housing. If the process temperature is near or beyond specification
limits, consider the use of additional thermowell lagging, an
Sensor Connection
extension nipple, or a remote mounting configuration to isolate the 1
transmitter from the excessive temperatures. Use Figure 19 and /214 ANPT mounting thread. Screw terminals for lead wire
the example below to determine an adequate thermowell connections
extension length.

-48
Product Data Sheet
00813-0100-2654, Rev DA
September 2003 Volume 1
Electrical Connection TABLE 25. Connection Head
3/414 ANPT conduit
Model Description

Materials of Construction 007903252003 Six Terminals with Flat Cover,


Unapproved, Unpainted
Housing: Lowcopper aluminum alloy
O-ring seal: Silicone rubber 007903242003 Six Terminals with Extended Cover,
Unapproved, Unpainted
Terminals: Nickelplated brass
007903250002 Six Terminals with Flat Cover, FM
Approved, Unpainted
Temperature Limits 007903240002 Six Terminals with Extended Cover,
Head Type Unapproved With E5 option With E6 option FM Approved, Unpainted
Painted 100 to 100 C 50 to 85 C 50 to 85 C 007903250003 Six Terminals with Flat Cover, CSA
148 to 212 F 58 to 185 F 58 to 185 F Approved, Unpainted
Unpainted 100 to 200 C 50 to 85 C 50 to 200 C 007903240003 Six Terminals with Extended Cover,
148 to 392 F 58 to 185 F 58 to 392 CSA Approved, Unpainted
007903252005 Six Terminals with Flat Cover,
Enclosure Ratings Unapproved, Painted
When installed properly, painted connection heads are suitable for 007903242005 Six Terminals with Extended Cover,
Unapproved, Painted
indoor and outdoor NEMA 4X and CSA Enclosure Type 4X
007903250004 Six Terminals with Flat Cover, FM
installations. When installed properly, unpainted connection heads Approved, Painted
are suitable for NEMA 4 and CSA Enclosure Type 4 installations. 007903240004 Six Terminals with Extended Cover,
See Hazardous Area Approvals for complete installation FM Approved, Painted
information 007903250005 Six Terminals with Flat Cover, CSA
Approved, Painted
Weight 007903240005 Six Terminals with Extended Cover,
Extended cover type: 2 lb 8 oz CSA Approved, Painted
Flat cover type: 1 lb 9 oz C537510301 Six Terminals, No Approval Options,
White Polypropylene

POLYPROPYLENE CONNECTION HEAD Connection Head Dimensional Drawings


The polypropylene connection head (P/N C53751-0301) is
Flat Cover Extended Cover Terminal View
designed for use with sanitary sensors. It meets the requirements
of NEMA 4X, is FDA-compliant, and is resistant to attack by acids,
alkalies, and organic solvents. 3.5 5.5 1/214 ANPT
(89) (140)

Specifications 4.9
(124)
Sensor Connection

Sensors-0035A
1/214 ANPT mounting thread. Screw terminals for lead wire

connections
3
/414 ANPT
Electrical Connection Chain Terminal Block (6 terminals)
3
/414 ANPT conduit
Polypropylene
Temperature Limits
73 to 104 C (100 to 220 F)
Sensors-3751A02A, 3751B02A
Weight 35 2.90 (74)

0.5 lb 1.63 (41) 0.80 (20)

Materials of Construction
Housing: White polypropylene polymer 1.175 (30)
3/418 ANPT
O-ring seal: Silicone rubber
Terminals: Nickelplated brass
1.41 (36)
1.05 (27)
Dimensions are in inches (millimeters)

-49
Product Data Sheet
00813-0100-2654, Rev DA
Volume 1 September 2003

MOUNTING ADAPTERS FOR SERIES 58, 68, 78, AND 183


M5M7, Sensor Compression Fittings, 316 SST
For adjustable sensor length.
Fitting Diameter
For low pressure applications
(100 psig maximum).
Fits -inch diameter sensors.
Available with 1/827 (M5), 18 (M6), and 14 (M7) ANPT
process threads.
Not available on spring-loaded sensors.

Sensors-0025A
Sensor Process Thread

Length

TABLE 26. Compression Fittings, 316 SST


(for attachment to the stem of the capsule)

Model Number Option Code Sensor Process Thread Fitting Diameter Length
in. mm in. mm
C07961-0005 M5 1/827 ANPT 0.25 6.35 1.31 33.27
C07961-0006 M6 1/418 ANPT 0.25 6.35 1.5 38.1
C07961-0008 M7 1/214 ANPT 0.25 6.35 1.75 44.45

-50
Product Data Sheet
00813-0100-2654, Rev DA
September 2003 Volume 1

LEAD WIRE EXTENSIONS, CONNECTORS, AND SEALS


The following options are available on most Series 68 and 78 sensors. They are not available for use on Series 58C, 68Q, and 183 sensors or
with SAA or CENELEC/ISSeP Flameproof approval (Option Codes E7 or E1).

(Capsule Sensor Only)


Twisted Lead WIre Extension
(Option Codes A1 A8)

(Capsule Sensor with Standard Adapter)

Shielded Cable Lead Wire Extension


(Option Codes B1 B8)

Armored Cable Lead Wire Extension


(Option Codes C1 C8)

Armored Cable
Mating Plug with Lead
Wire Extension
(Option Codes L1 L8) Armored Cable Lead Wire Extension with
Electrical Plug
(Option Codes D1 D8)

4-Pin Connector
(Option Codes H1 H8) Bayonet Connector
(Option Code F1)
Moisture-Proof Seal Assembly for
Armored Cable (Option Code J1)

Sensors-0009A05A
3244MV Transmitter Armored Cable Lead Wire Extension (Option Codes C1 C8)

A1A8, Twisted Lead Wire Extension


Lead wire connections are silver brazed and
individually insulated by shrinkable Teflon tubes Option Code Y Length (ft) Option Code Y Length (ft)
Withstands 95 percent relative humidity A1 11/2 A5 24
200 C (392 F) maximum temperature A2 3 A6 50
A3 6 A7 75
Available with single or dual-element sensors
A4 12 A8 100

22-Gauge Teflon (PTFE) Lead Wire


Teflon Sensor
Sensors-0027A

6 (152) [Ref.]
Y

Not available for use with Series 68Q Sanitary RTDs and 183 thermocouples or with SAA or CENELEC/ISSeP flameproof approval
(option codes E7 or E1)
Dimensions are in inches (millimeters)

-51
Product Data Sheet
00813-0100-2654, Rev DA
Volume 1 September 2003

B1B8, Shielded Cable Lead Wire Extension


Copper shielded cable prevents electrical noise distortions to
sensor signal output Option Code Y Length (ft) Option Code Y Length (ft)
Withstands 95 percent relative humidity B1 11/2 B5 24
200 C (392 F) maximum temperature B2 3 B6 50
B3 6 B7 75
B4 12 B8 100

Shielded Cable Teflon Jacket Rubber Seal


0.375 (10) Diameter
22-Gauge Teflon-Insulated Wires 0.25 (6) [Approx.] Sensor

Sensors-0028A
Y 2.75 (70) [max.]
Not available for 58C, 68Q, and 183 sensors or with SAA or CENELEC/ISSeP flameproof approval (option codes E7 or E1)
Dimensions are in inches (millimeters)

C1C8, Armored Cable Lead Wire Extension


Provides lead wire protection
in heavy duty environments. Option Code Y Length (ft) Option Code Y Length (ft)
Withstands 95 percent relative humidity C1 11/2 C5 24
200 C (392 F) maximum temperature C2 3 C6 50
C3 6 C7 75
Available with single or dual-element sensors
C4 12 C8 100

22-Gauge Teflon-Insulated Wire


Armor Cable 0.34 (8.64) I.D. 0.375 (10) Diameter 0.445 (11)
Sensor

Sensors-0030A
6.0
Y 2.75 (70) [Max.]
(152)
Not available for 58C, 68Q, and 183 sensors or with SAA or CENELEC/ISSeP flameproof approval (option codes E7 or E1)
Dimensions are in inches (millimeters)

D1D8, ARMORED CABLE LEAD WIRE EXTENSION WITH ELECTRICAL PLUG


Provides lead wire protection in
heavy-duty environments Option Code Y Length (ft) Option Code Y Length (ft)
Provides quick-disconnect capability D1 11/2 D5 24
Withstands 95 percent relative humidity D2 3 D6 50
D3 6 D7 75
D4 12 D8 100

Mates with Option Codes L1L8


Armor Cable 0.25 (6) 0.375 (10) Diameter
Sensor
Sensors-0029A

Y 2.75 (70) [Max.]


Not available for 58C, 68Q, and 183 sensors or with SAA or CENELEC/ISSeP flameproof approval (option codes E7 or E1)
Dimensions are in inches (millimeters)

-52
Product Data Sheet
00813-0100-2654, Rev DA
September 2003 Volume 1
L1L8, ARMORED CABLE MATING PLUG WITH LEAD WIRE EXTENSION
Completes quick-disconnect capability for armored cable
Option Code Y Length (ft) Option Code Y Length (ft)
Withstands 95 percent relative humidity L1 11/2 L5 24
Twisted lead wire extension for lowest cost installation L2 3 L6 50
L3 6 L7 75
L4 12 L8 100

22-Gauge Teflon Lead Wire Mates with Option Codes D1D8

Sensors-0031A
Y
Not available for 58C, 68Q, and 183 sensors or with SAA or CENELEC/ISSeP flameproof approval (option codes E7 or E1)
Dimensions are in inches (millimeters)

F1, 4-PIN BAYONET CONNECTOR


Provides quick-disconnect capability
Withstands 100 percent relative humidity with connector mate
Available for capsule and general purpose with 4-wire lead
wire configuration only

Receptance Shell and Pin 0.652 (17) Mates with Option Codes H1H8
Finish Are Nickel Plate Dia. Max. 0.375 (10) Diameter

Sensors-0032A
Wiring Schematic Sensor
A 2.0 (51)
B
4-Wire 3.0 (76)
C
D 150 C Max. for Series 68 and 78
Not available for 58C, 68Q, and 183 sensors, or with FM or CSA explosion-proof, or with SAA or CENELEC/ISSeP flameproof approval
(option codes E5, E6, E7, or E1)
Dimensions are in inches (millimeters)

H1H8, 4-PIN CONNECTOR MATING PLUG WITH LEAD WIRE EXTENSION


Completes the quick-disconnect capability of connector
Option Code Y Length (ft) Option Code Y Length (ft)
Provides twisted lead wire extension for H1 11/2 H5 24
remote installations H2 3 H6 50
Withstands 100 percent relative humidity H3 6 H7 75
with connector mate H4 12 H8 100
F1 connector is required if H1H8 lead wire extension is used

22-Gauge Teflon
4-Pin Connector (Mates with Option Code F1)
Lead Wire
Sensors-0033A

Y
Not available for 58C, 68Q, and 183 sensors, or with FM or CSA explosion-proof, or with SAA or CENELEC/ISSeP flameproof approval
(option codes E5, E6, E7, or E1)
Dimensions are in inches (millimeters)

-53
Product Data Sheet
00813-0100-2654, Rev DA
Volume 1 September 2003

J1, MOISTURE-PROOF SEAL ASSEMBLY FOR ARMORED CABLE


Prevents moisture migration through armored cable
For use in humid environments but not for direct liquid
immersion
Non-disconnectable type assembly with armored cable
and sensor

Nipple, 304 SST, 1/214 ANPT 1.12 (28.45) Long

Moisture-Proof Seal (J1)


Compression Fitting Sensor

ensors-0034A
Armored Cable Lead Wire
(Specify Option Codes C1C8)
J1
Not available for 58C, 68Q, and 183 sensors, or with FM or CSA explosion-proof, or with SAA or CENELEC/ISSeP flameproof approval
(option codes E5, E6, E7, or E1).
Moisture-proof seal assembly must be ordered with armored cable lead wire extension (option codes C1 C8)
Dimensions are in inches (millimeters)

THERMOWELLS
To simplify ordering, the previous Series 79, 80, and 81 thermowell Construction
offerings are all included in the new Series 91 thermowell option. All thermowell bodies with an overall length less than 42-in. are
machined from solid bar stock to ensure water-tightness. Flange
Materials mounts are welded to the thermowell body. Standard construction
Rosemount Thermowells are supplied in most materials required provides immersion lengths (U) from 2 to 48 inches with overall
for industrial applications. Standard materials are 316 SST, 304 lengths (L) from 4 to 59 inches respectively. Thermowells with
SST, and C1018 carbon steel. For corrosive environments, special overall lengths larger than 42-in. will be a 3-piece welded
materials such as Monel, Hastelloy, and Inconel 600 are construction. Consult the factory for more information on welded
available. Consult factory for other material availability. 3-piece construction thermowells.

Strength (Pressure and Flow Vibration) Identification Data


The strength of a thermowell depends on several parameters that The part number is etched on each thermowell. Additional tagging
relate thermowell construction to the installation environment. For for specific customer requirements is available.
most industrial applications, standard Rosemount thermowells
provide the necessary strength if the material, style, and length are Installation
correct for the application. The proper selection of a thermowell For dimensional drawings of Thread Mounted, Weld Mounted, and
depends on fluid type, temperature, pressure, and fluid velocity. It Flange Mounted Thermowells, refer to Figure 20, 22, and 24.
is important to note that most thermowell failures are caused by
vibration that is induced by fluid flow. If static pressure strength is a
major consideration, refer to Table 27 for standard material ratings
for a 1/2-inch tip. Tapered thermowells are offered for additional
strength.

Strength Calculation
Rosemount Inc. has the ability to perform thermowell frequency
calculations to verify that the thermowell dimensions you provide
are appropriate for your specific application. To take advantage of
this calculation, fill out and return the Configuration Data Sheet
on page -69.

TABLE 27. Thermowell Material Rating


Process Rating(1) (psi) at Temperature (F)
Material Recommended Usage 0 F 300 F 500 F 700 F 900 F 1100 F 1300 F
304 SST Good resistance to oxidation 5600 4800 4700 4600 3400 2400 780
316 SST Good resistance to corrosion. Better resistance to 5600 5400 5300 5200 4400 3200 1250
chemical attack than 304 SST
Carbon Steel For non-corrosive service 3700 3700 3700 3650 2000

(1) In case of an explosion, the integrity of the thermowell is maintained to the specified pressures.

-54
Product Data Sheet
00813-0100-2654, Rev DA
September 2003 Volume 1

ORDERING INFORMATION
TABLE 28. Series 91 Thermowells

Model Description
0091 Series 0091 Thermowells
Code Thermowell Material Code Thermowell Material Code Thermowell Material
A Type 316 SST G Monel R Nickel 200
B Type 304 SST H Inconel 600 T Titanium
C Carbon Steel J Hastelloy C (304 SST Flange, if U(2) 316 SST with tantalum sheath
flange style is ordered)
D 316L SST L Hastelloy B (304 SST Flange, if V 310 SST
flange style is ordered)
E 304L SST M 304 SST with Teflon coating W 321 SST
F Alloy 20 P Chrome Molybdenum F22 Z Chrome Molybdenum F11
Code Length (U) in inches(1) Code Length (U) in inches(1) Code Length (U) in inches(1)
(2)
015 1.5 130 13.0 260 26.0
020 2.0 135 13.5 270 27.0
025 2.5 140 14.0 280 28.0
030 3.0 145 14.5 290 29.0
035 3.5 150 15.0 300 30.0
040 4.0 155 15.5 310 31.0
045 4.5 160 16.0 320 32.0
050 5.0 165 16.5 330 33.0
055 5.5 170 17.0 340 34.0
060 6.0 175 17.5 350 35.0
065 6.5 180 18.0 360 36.0
070 7.0 185 18.5 370 37.0
075 7.5 190 19.0 380 38.0
080 8.0 195 19.5 390 39.0
085 8.5 200 20.0 400 40.0
090 9.0 205 20.5 410 41.0
095 9.5 210 21.0 420 42.0
100 10.0 215 21.5 430 43.0
105 10.5 220 22.0 440 44.0
110 11.0 225 22.5 450 45.0
115 11.5 230 23.0 460 46.0
120 12.0 240 24.0 470 47.0
125 12.5 250 25.0 480 48.0
Code Thermowell Mounting Style Stem Style Tip A (in.) Root B (in.)
T20 Thread, 1/214 ANPT Stepped 0.50 0.63
T22 Thread, 3/414 ANPT Stepped 0.50 0.75
T24 Thread, 111.5 ANPT Stepped 0.50 0.88
T26 Thread, 3/414 ANPT Tapered 0.63 0.88
T28 Thread, 111.5 ANPT Tapered 0.63 1.06
T30 Thread, 11/211.5 ANPT Tapered 0.75 1.50
T32 Thread, 1/214 ANPT Straight 0.50 0.50
T34 Thread, 3/414 ANPT Straight 0.75 0.75
T36 Thread, 111.5 ANPT Straight 0.75 0.75
T38 Thread, 3/414 ANPT Straight 0.50 0.50
T44 Thread, 1/214 ANPT Tapered 0.50 0.50
W38 Weld, 3/4-in. pipe Stepped 0.50 0.75
W40 Weld, 1-in. pipe Stepped 0.50 0.88
W42 Weld, 3/4-in. pipe Tapered 0.63 0.88
W44 Weld, 1-inch Pipe, Tapered 0.75 1.00
W46 Weld, 11/4-inch Pipe Tapered 0.75 1.25
W48 Weld, 3/4-inch Pipe Straight 0.75 0.75
W50 Weld, 1-inch Pipe Straight 0.75 0.75
F10 Flange, F = 2-inch, Class 150 Straight 0.75 0.75
F12 Flange, F = 3-inch, Class 150 Straight 0.75 0.75

-55
Product Data Sheet
00813-0100-2654, Rev DA
Volume 1 September 2003

F52 Flange, F = 1-inch, Class 150 Stepped 0.50 0.75


F54 Flange, F = 1-inch, Class 150 Stepped 0.50 0.75
F56 Flange, F = 2-inch, Class 150 Stepped 0.50 0.75
F58 Flange, F = 1-inch, Class 150 Tapered 0.75 1.00
F60 Flange, F = 1-inch, Class 150 Tapered 0.75 1.00
F62 Flange, F = 2-inch, Class 150 Tapered 0.75 1.25
F64 Flange, F = 1-inch, Class 150 Straight 0.75 0.75
F66 Flange, F = 1-inch, Class 150 Straight 0.75 0.75
F70 Flange, F = 1-inch, Class 300 Stepped 0.50 0.75
F72 Flange, F = 1-inch, Class 300 Stepped 0.50 0.75
F74 Flange, F = 2-inch, Class 300 Stepped 0.50 0.75
F76 Flange, F = 1-inch, Class 300 Tapered 0.75 1.00
F78 Flange, F = 1-inch, Class 300 Tapered 0.75 1.00
F80 Flange, F = 2-inch, Class 300 Tapered 0.75 1.25
F82 Flange, F = 1-inch, Class 300 Straight 0.75 0.75
F84 Flange, F = 1-inch, Class 300 Straight 0.75 0.75
F86 Flange, F = 2-inch, Class 300 Straight 0.75 0.75
F88(3) Flange, F = 1-inch, Class 600 Stepped 0.50 0.75
F90(3) Flange, F = 1-inch, Class 600 Stepped 0.50 0.75
F92(3) Flange, F = 2-inch, Class 600 Stepped 0.50 0.75
F94(3) Flange, F = 1-inch, Class 600 Tapered 0.75 1.00
F96(3) Flange, F = 1-inch, Class 600 Tapered 0.75 1.00
F98(3) Flange, F = 2-inch, Class 600 Tapered 0.75 1.25
F02(3) Flange, F = 1-inch, Class 600 Straight 0.75 0.75
F04(3) Flange, F = 1-inch, Class 600 Straight 0.75 0.75
F06(3) Flange, F = 2-inch, Class 600 Straight 0.75 0.75
F16(3) Flange, F = 1-inch, Class 900 Tapered 0.75 1.00
F34(3) Flange, F = 1-inch, Class 1500 Tapered 0.75 1.00
F24(3) Flange, F = 2-inch, Class 1500 Tapered 0.75 1.25
F08(4) Flange, F = 1-inch, Class 2500 Tapered 0.75 1.00
Q02 Sanitary, 1-in.,Tri-Clamp Stepped 0.50 0.75
Q04 Sanitary, 11/2-in., Tri-Clamp Stepped 0.50 0.75
Q06 Sanitary, T2-in., ri-Clamp Stepped 0.50 0.75
Q08 Sanitary, 3-in.,Tri-Clamp Stepped 0.50 0.75
Q20 Sanitary, 3/4-in., Tri-Clamp Straight 0.44 0.44
Q22 Sanitary, 1-in.,Tri-Clamp Straight 0.50 0.50
Q24 Sanitary, 11/2-in., Tri-Clamp Straight 0.50 0.50
Q26 Sanitary, 2-in., Tri-Clamp Straight 0.50 0.50
Q28 Sanitary, 3-in.,Tri-Clamp Straight 0.50 0.50
Thermowell Lagging Thermowell Lagging Thermowell Lagging
Code Length (T) in. Code Length (T) in. Code Length (T) in.
T000 0.0 T035 3.5 T070 7.0
T005 0.5 T040 4.0 T075 7.5
T010 1.0 T045 4.5 T080 8.0
T015 1.5 T050 5.0 T085 8.5
T020 2.0 T055 5.5 T090 9.0
T025 2.5 T060 6.0 T095 9.5
T030 3.0 T065 6.5
Code Instrument Connection Thread
P 1/214 NPSM

D 1/214 ANPT for CSA

-56
Product Data Sheet
00813-0100-2654, Rev DA
September 2003 Volume 1

Code Additional Options


Thermowell Options
Q8 Thermowell material certificate
R01(5) Thermowell special external pressure testing
R03 Thermowell dye penetration testing
R04 Special cleaning for oxygen service
R05 Thermowell NACE approval
R06 Stainless steel plug and chain
R07(6) Full penetration weld
R09(6)(7) Concentric serrations of thermowell flange face
R10 (6)(7) Thermowell flat faced flange
R11 Thermowell vent hole
R14(8) Thermowell special surface finish (12 Ra Max) (Maximum (U) length = 22.5 in.)
R16(3)(6)(7) Ring joint flange (Not available with 0-in. (T) length)
R20 Electropolishing
R21 Thermowell Wake Frequency Calculation (Configuration Data Sheet required)
R22 Internal pressure testing
R23 Brass plug and chain

(1) Thermowells with an overall lengths (U + T + 1.75-in.) of 42-in. or less are machined from solid bar stock. Thermowells with an overall length larger
than 42-in. will be constructed using a welded 3-piece design and are available only with a stepped stem style.

(2) Available in straight stem only

(3) Not available with 0-in. (T) length.

(4) Not available with 0- or 1/2-in. (T) length.

(5) Maximum (U) length = 42.0-in.

(6) Available on flanged thermowells only.

(7) Only one flange face option allowed.

(8) Maximum (U) length = 22.5 inches.

Ordering Example
Typical Model Immersion Lagging
Number Model Material Length Mounting Style Length Connection Thread Additional Options
0091 A 030 F52 T040 P R01
R05
R07

-57
Product Data Sheet
00813-0100-2654, Rev DA
Volume 1 September 2003

FIGURE 20. Thread Mounted Thermowells

Straight

Wrench and
Lagging Extension, Nom. Thread U
T
Allowance
1.75 (44)
14 NPSM* A Tip Diameter

Sensors-0010A
Inside Diameter 0.26 (7)
P Process
H 0.875 Mounting Thread
(22) Max.
L 0.25 (6)
Nominal

Thread (P) Hex Size Inches (H)


0.5 0.75 ANPT 1.125
111.5 ANPT 1.375
Tapered

Wrench and
Lagging Extension, Nom. T Thread
Allowance U
14 NPSM* 1.75 (44) Root Diameter B
A Tip Diameter

Sensors-0012A
P Process Inside Diameter 0.26 (7)
H 0.875
(22) Max. Mounting Thread

L 0.25 (6)
Nominal

Thread (P) Hex Size Inches (H)


0.5 0.75 ANPT 1.125
111.5 ANPT 1.375
* 1/214 ANPT threads are available
Dimensions are in inches (millimeters)

-58
Product Data Sheet
00813-0100-2654, Rev DA
September 2003 Volume 1
FIGURE 21. Thread Mounted Thermowells (continued)

Stepped

Wrench and
Thread
Lagging Extension, Nom. T Allowance U
1.75 (44)
14 NPSM* 2.5 (64)
B Root A Tip Diameter
Diameter

Sensors-0011A
Inside Diameter 0.26 (7)
H 0.875 P Process Mounting
(22) Max. Thread
L
0.25 (6)
Nominal

Stepped, For Thermowells with Overall Length Greater than 42-in. (3-Piece Construction)

T 1.75 (44) U
14 NPSM*
2.5 (64)
Pipe

0.26 (7) Nominal

Sensors-0051A
H
Welds 0.25 (6)

Thread (P) Hex Size Inches (H)


0.5 0.75 ANPT 1.125
111.5 ANPT 1.375
* 1/214 ANPT threads are available
Dimensions are in inches (millimeters)

-59
Product Data Sheet
00813-0100-2654, Rev DA
Volume 1 September 2003

FIGURE 22. Weld Mounted Thermowells

Straight

1.75
T U
(44)
14 NPSM* A Tip Diameter

Sensors-0015A
Inside Diameter 0.26 (7)

0.875 (22) Max.


S Socket Weld Diameter
L 0.25 (6) Nominal

Pipe Size Socket Size (S) Diameter


0.75-in. 1.050 0.010
1-in. 1.315 0.010
Tapered

T 1.75 U
(44)

Root Diameter B
14 NPSM* A Tip Diameter

Sensors-0017A
Inside Diameter 0.26 (7)
0.875 (22)
S Socket Weld Diameter
L 0.25 (6) Nominal

Pipe Size Socket Size (S) Diameter


0.75-in. 1.050 0.010
1-in. 1.315 0.010
* 1/214 ANPT threads are available
Dimensions are in inches (millimeters)

-60
Product Data Sheet
00813-0100-2654, Rev DA
September 2003 Volume 1
FIGURE 23. Weld Mounted Thermowells (continued)

Stepped

1.75
T (44) U

14 A Tip Diameter
NPSM* 2.5 (64)

Sensors-0016B
0.875 (22) Max. B Root Diameter Inside Diameter 0.26 (7)
S Socket Weld Diameter
0.25 (6)
L Nominal

Stepped, For Thermowells with Overall Length Greater than 42-in. (3-Piece Construction)

14 U

T 1.75 (44) 2.5 (64)


Pipe

0.26 (7) Nominal

Sensors-0052A
0.25 (6)
S Socket Weld Diameter
Welds
L

Pipe Size Socket Size (S) Diameter


0.75-in. 1.050 0.010
1-in. 1.315 0.010
* 1/214 ANPT threads are available
Dimensions are in inches (millimeters)

-61
Product Data Sheet
00813-0100-2654, Rev DA
Volume 1 September 2003

FIGURE 24. Flange Mounted Thermowells

Straight

G 1.7
T U
5 Flange Mount
1.25 (32) Diameter
14 A Tip Diameter
NPSM*

Inside Diameter 0.26 (7)

Sensors-0013A
0.875
(22)
Max. H
F L 0.25 (6) Nominal
E
Tapered

G
1.75
1.25 (32) Diameter T (44) U

14 Flange
NPSM* Mount A Tip Diameter

0.875 Inside Diameter 0.26 (7)


R Root Diameter
(22) Max.

Sensors-0047A
H
F L 0.25 (6) Nominal
E

Class 150 Class 600


Size (in.) O.D. (E) Circle (F) # of holes thickness Size (in.) O.D. (E) Circle (F) # of holes thickness
and dia. (G) (in.) (H) and dia. (G) (in.) (H)
1.0 4.25 3.12 four-0.625 0.5625 1.0 4.88 3.5 four-0.75 0.94
1.5 5.0 3.88 four-0.625 0.6875 1.5 6.12 4.5 four-0.88 1.13
2.0 6.0 4.75 four-0.75 0.75 2.0 6.5 5.0 eight-0.75 1.25
3.0 7.5 6.00 four-0.75 0.94 Class 900 and 1500
Class 300 1.5 7.0 4.88 four-1.12 1.5
1.0 4.88 3.5 four-0.75 0.69 Class 2500
1.5 6.12 4.5 four-0.88 0.81 1.5 8.0 5.75 four-1.25 2.0
2.0 6.5 5.0 eight-0.75 0.88

* 1/214 ANPT threads are available


Dimensions are in inches (millimeters)

-62
Product Data Sheet
00813-0100-2654, Rev DA
September 2003 Volume 1
FIGURE 25. Flange Mounted Thermowells (continued)

Stepped

G 1.75
T (44) U
Flange
1.25 (32) Diameter 14 A Tip
Mount
NPSM* 2.5 Diameter

Sensors-0014A
0.875 Inside Diameter 0.26 (7)
R Root
(22) Max.
Diameter
H
F 0.25 (6) Nominal
L
E

Stepped, For Thermowells with Overall Length Greater than 42-in. (3-Piece Construction)

1.75
T (44.5)
G
1.25 (32) Diameter
U
Flange
Weld Weld
14 Pipe 2.5 (64)
NPSM*

0.26 (7) Nominal


F 0.25 (7) Nominal
Welds

Sensors-0053A
E

Class 150 Class 600


Size (in.) O.D. (E) Circle (F) # of holes thickness Size (in.) O.D. (E) Circle (F) # of holes thickness
and dia. (G) (in.) (H) and dia. (G) (in.) (H)
1.0 4.25 3.12 four-0.625 0.5625 1.0 4.88 3.5 four-0.75 0.94
1.5 5.0 3.88 four-0.625 0.6875 1.5 6.12 4.5 four-0.88 1.13
2.0 6.0 4.75 four-0.75 0.75 2.0 6.5 5.0 eight-0.75 1.25
3.0 7.5 6.00 four-0.75 0.94 Class 900 and 1500
Class 300 1.5 7.0 4.88 four-1.12 1.5
1.0 4.88 3.5 four-0.75 0.69 Class 2500
1.5 6.12 4.5 four-0.88 0.81 1.5 8.0 5.75 four-1.25 2.0
2.0 6.5 5.0 eight-0.75 0.88

* 1/214 ANPT threads are available


Dimensions are in inches (millimeters)

-63
Product Data Sheet
00813-0100-2654, Rev DA
Volume 1 September 2003

Hazardous Area Approvals


SENSORS SENSOR AND TRANSMITTER
Factory Mutual (FM) Approvals ASSEMBLIES
E5 Explosion Proof for Class I, Division 1, Groups B, C, and D. CENELEC/ATEX Approvals
Dust-Ignition Proof for Class II/III, Division 1, Groups E, F, E1 CENELEC/ATEXExplosion- proof
and G. Suitable for indoor and outdoor (NEMA 4X)
Certificate Number: KEMA99ATEX8715
hazardous locations. Install in accordance with Rosemount
ATEX Marking: II 2 G
drawing 00068-0013. EEx d IIC T6 ( 40C = Tamb = +65C)
Rosemount Series 68 and 78 RTD and Series 184
Canadian Standards Association (CSA) Approvals
thermocouple temperature sensors with spring-loaded or
E6 Explosion Proof for Class I, Division 1, Groups B, C, and D. general purpose style sensors are approved only for direct
Dust-Ignition Proof for Class II/III, Division 1, Groups E, F, mount to the Rosemount 3144P, 3244MV, 644, 244E, 144H,
and G. Suitable for Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, and and 248.
D. Suitable for indoor and outdoor (CSA Enclosure Type 4X)
To ensure approval compliance, specify the E1 option on
hazardous locations. Install in accordance with Rosemount
both the sensor and the transmitter at the time of ordering.
drawing 00068-0033.
To ensure approval compliance install sensors in exact
accordance with the specified installation drawings (see NOTE
Figure 27). Rosemount series 68 and 78 RTD and Series 183 Thermocouple
Temperature Sensors can be supplied as a replacement part with
the E1 option for installation in an existing temperature
CONNECTION HEADS measurement assembly.
Factory Mutual (FM) Approvals
E5 Explosion Proof for Class I, Division 1, Groups B, C, and D.
Dust-Ignition Proof for Class II/III, Division 1, Groups E, F, Standard Association of Australia (SAA)
and G. Painted models are suitable for indoor and outdoor Flameproof Approval
(NEMA 4X) hazardous locations. Unpainted models are E7 Ex d IIC T6 (Tamb = 20 to 60 C)
suitable for indoor and outdoor (NEMA 4) hazardous Rosemount Series 68 and 78 RTD and Series 183
locations. When used with temperature sensors, connection thermocouple temperature sensors with spring-loaded or
heads must be installed in accordance with Rosemount general purpose style sensor adapters are approved for
drawing 00068-0013. direct mount to the Rosemount 144, 244E, 644, 3144 and
3244MV Smart Temperature Transmitters.
Canadian Standards Association (CSA) Approvals To ensure approval compliance, specify the E7 option on
E6 Explosion Proof for Class I, Division 1, Groups C, and D. both the sensor and the transmitter at the time of ordering,
Dust-Ignition Proof for Class and install in exact accordance with Rosemount drawing
II/III, Division 1, Groups E, F, and G. Suitable for Class I, 03144-0225 (see Figure 29).
Division 2, Groups A, B, C, and D.
Painted models are suitable for indoor and outdoor (CSA
Enclosure Type 4X) hazardous locations. Unpainted models
are suitable for indoor and outdoor (CSA Enclosure Type 4)
hazardous locations. When used with temperature sensors,
connection heads must be installed in accordance with
Rosemount drawing 00068-0033.
To ensure approval compliance, install connection heads in
exact accordance with the specified installation drawings
(see Figure 27).

-64
Product Data Sheet
00813-0100-2654, Rev DA
September 2003 Volume 1

Factory Mutual (FM) Explosion-Proof


FIGURE 26. Installation Drawing 00068-0013, Rev. AC

NOTE
For Hand-Tight Assembly Option XA: End-User (installer) must unscrew threaded joints, then reassemble and tighten all joints per installation
drawing 00068-0013.

-65
Product Data Sheet
00813-0100-2654, Rev DA
Volume 1 September 2003

Canadian Standards Association (CSA) Explosion-Proof


FIGURE 27. Installation Drawing 00068-0033, Rev. AA

NOTE
For Hand-Tight Assembly Option XA: End-User (installer) must unscrew threaded joints, then reassemble and tighten all joints per installation
drawing 00068-0033.

-66
Product Data Sheet
00813-0100-2654, Rev DA
September 2003 Volume 1

CENELEC Flameproof
FIGURE 28. Installation Drawing 03144-0324, Rev. AB

-67
Product Data Sheet
00813-0100-2654, Rev DA
Volume 1 September 2003

Standard Association of Australia (SAA) Flameproof


FIGURE 29. Drawing 03144-0225, Rev. A

-68
Product Data Sheet
00813-0100-2654, Rev DA
September 2003 Volume 1

Configuration Data Sheet


Calculations conducted per ASME/ANSI PTC 19.3 but with Strouhal number varying with Reynolds number.

Company Information

Requesting Company: Phone: Fax:


Contact Tag Number
End Customer Date of Request:
Thermowell Information (Information for either (a), (b), or (c) required)

a) Rosemount Thermowell Part Number (example 0091A030FS2T040PR01):


b) Rosemount Sensor Model Number (example 0078R21C30A120F54):
c) Generic Thermowell Information:
Thermowell Material: Mounting Stem
Style Style
Stem Style: Straight U A
Stepped
Threaded Straight
Tapered
D
Mounting Threaded
Style: T
Welded
U
Flanged Z A
If flanged, ANSI/ASME Welded

SENSORS_0010B, 0016B, 0047B


Stepped
specify:
DIN D
B T
Size: Class:
Thermowell Bore Diameter (D):
U
Tip Diameter (A):
A
Tip Thickness (T):

Length from Tip to Support (U): Flanged Tapered


Root Diameter (B): D
B
(same as (A) for straight thermometers)
T
Length of Tip Diameter (Z):
(stepped thermowells only)

Service: Liquid Gas Steam Fluid Description:


Operating Fluid Flow Rate; Maximum:
Operating Fluid Flow Rate Units:
gal/s gal/min gal/hr l/s l/min l/hr ft/s
ft3/min ft3/hr bbl/hr impgal/s impgal/min impgal/hr m/s
m3/min m3/hr shton/hr lb/hr kg/s kg/hr other:
Operating Max. Fluid Pressure: Gauge
Absolute
Viscosity: kg/m s (Pas)
Centipoise
Operating Fluid Specific F Operating Fluid Density: m3/kg
Temperature: C ft3/lbm
Specific Volume: at process conditions
at standard conditions (STP)

Process Pipe Size:


Pipe Schedule:
For Rosemount Internal Use Only

Rosemount Order/Quotation # Line Item # Ship Set # ID #


Customer Order/Item # Salesperson:
Cont. Admin. Tech. Specialist:

-69
Product Data Sheet
00813-0100-2654, Rev DA
September 2003 Volume 1

Rosemount and the Rosemount logotype are registered trademarks of Rosemount Inc.
Teflon is a registered trademark of E.I. du Pont de Nemours & Co.
Hastelloy is a registered trademark of Haynes International.
Monel and Inconel is a registered trademark of International Nickel Co.
All other marks are the property of their respective owners.

Emerson Process Management

Rosemount Inc. Emerson Process Management Emerson Process Management Asia


8200 Market Boulevard Temperature GmbH Pacific Private Limited
Chanhassen, MN 55317 USA Frankenstrasse 21 1 Pandan Crescent
T (U.S.) 1-800-999-9307 63791 Karlstein Singapore 128461
T (International) (952) 906-8888 Germany T (65) 6777 8211
F (952) 949-7001 T 49 (6188) 992 0 F (65) 6777 0947
F 49 (6188) 992 112 AP.RMT-Specialist@emersonprocess.com
www.rosemount.com
00813-0100-2654}
2003 Rosemount Inc. All rights reserved.
Mounting and
Installation Advice
00809-0301-2654
Rev. AA, September 2001

Resistance Thermometers
and Thermocouple Assemblies
Product
Manual
Mounting and Installation Advice
for Resistance Thermometers and
Thermocouple Assemblies
NOTICE
Read this manual before working with the product. For personal and system safety, and
for optimum product performance, make sure you thoroughly understand the contents
before installing, using, or maintaining this product.
For further details please contact your local Rosemount representative.

! CAUTION
The products described in this document are NOT designed for nuclear-qualified applica-
tions. Using non-nuclear qualified products in applications that require nuclear-qualified
hardware or products may cause inaccurate readings.
For information on Rosemount nuclear-qualified products, contact your local Rosemount
Sales Representative.

Rosemount and the Rosemount logotype are registered trademarks of Rosemount Inc.

Cover Photo: Product Overview Temperature Sensors and Transmitters

2
Table of Contents

SECTION 1 Description and Measuring Principle .................................................... 5


Temperature Measurement Structure ................................................................................................... 5
with Resistance Methods of Connection ............................................................................ 7
Areas of Application ................................................................................. 8
Thermometers

SECTION 2 Description and Measurement Principle ............................................... 9


Temperature Measurement Installation of Protective Tubes ........................................................... 10
with Thermocouples Leads and Connections .......................................................................... 10
Areas of Application ............................................................................... 11

SECTION 3 Rules and Regulations ........................................................................... 13


Assembly of Housing Operating Stress .............................................................................. 13
Starting Torques for Screw-in Type Threads ................................ 13
Assembly of Housing with Flange Mounting ................................ 13
Installation of Ceramic
Housing in Plants at Operating Temperature .............................. 14
Connection of Transmitter .............................................................. 14

APPENDIX Appendix I
Limit Tolerances of the Basic Values ............................................. 15
Appendix II
Limit Tolerances for Thermocouples .............................................. 15

3
Rosemount Mounting and Installation Advice for Resistance Thermometers and Thermocouple

4
Section
1 Temperature Measurement
with Resistance Thermometers
Description and Measuring Principle ......................................... page 5
Structure ......................................................................................... page 5
Methods of Connection ................................................................ page 7
Areas of Application ..................................................................... page 8

DESCRIPTION AND Temperature measurement with resistance thermometers is based on


MEASURING PRINCIPLE the property possessed by all conductors and semiconductors, namely
that their resistance varies as a function of temperature. This property
is more or less pronounced, depending on the particular material. The
relative change in the resistance as a function of temperature (dR/dt)
is known as the temperature coefficient, the value of which is usually
not constant over the range of temperature of interest, but is itself a
function of temperature. The result is that the mathematical relation-
ship between resistance and temperature takes the form of a high-
order polynomial.

Figure 1 shows the change in resistance as a function of temperature


for a Pt 100 resistance thermometer.

Figure 1:
Pt 100 characteristic curve

STRUCTURE The resistance temperature detector is made up of a platinum coil


wound on a suitable support. The wire coil is either fused into glass or
embedded in ceramic. To meet todays requirements for more compact
dimensions and higher resistance values, extremely thin platinum
layers are applied to a ceramic substrate instead of wires (see Fig. 2).

5
Rosemount Mounting and Installation Advice for Resistance Thermometers and Thermocouple

Figure 2:
Glass wire-wound, ceramic wire-wound
and thin-film resistance thermometers

To protect them against mechanical damage (pressure or flowing liquid)


these measuring elements are usually installed into suitable protective
tubes (measuring inserts). This also ensures easy replacement without
the need to replace the complete fitting. As resistance thermometers
are contact-making temperature sensors (i.e. the sensor has to reach
the temperature of the medium in which measurement is to be per-
formed) the housing has to be adapted to the application (see Fig. 3).

Figure 3:
Resistance thermometer modules

6
METHODS When using resistance thermometers for temperature measurement, the
OF CONNECTION fact that the measurement result is influenced by the resistance of the
selected lead wire must be taken into account.

Three circuit types are commonly used: 2-wire, 3-wire and 4-wire
circuits.

The most accurate measurements are obtained with the 4-wire circuit,
as in this case the measurement is not affected by lead wire resistance
or environment temperature of lead wires (see Fig. 4).

The 3-wire circuit is normally used for eliminating the lead wire
resistance (Wheatstone bridge).

In the case of the 2-wire circuit the lead wire resistance is fully mea-
sured by the measuring bridge. By the use of modern control equip-
ment the influence of the lead wire resistance at 2-wire circuit can be
compensated by a line compensation resistor, which is independent of
temperature.

Figure 4:
Methods of connection

7
Rosemount Mounting and Installation Advice for Resistance Thermometers and Thermocouple

AREAS OF APPLICATION Resistance thermometers can be used over a temperature range of


-220 C to +600 C.

Their advantages are:


High temperature ranges
Resistance to vibration
High immunity to electrical interference
Long-term stability
Robust design
High accuracy

Resistance thermometers are used in the following industries:


Chemical industries
Petrochemical industries
Pharmaceutical industries
Power generation
Mechanical engineering
Food & beverage
Mining

8
Section
2 Temperature Measurement
with Thermocouples
Description and Measuring Principle ......................................... page 9
Installation of Protective Tubes ................................................ page 10
Leads and Connections .............................................................. page 10
Areas of Application ................................................................... page 11

DESCRIPTION AND A thermocouple consists of two electrical conductors of different mate-


MEASUREMENT rials connected to one another at one end (measuring junction). The
PRINCIPLE two free ends build a compensation point resp reference junction. The
thermocouple can be extended by using an extension or a compensa-
ting cable. The extension or compensating cables are connected to a
measuring instrument, e.g. a galvanometer or electronic measuring
unit (see Fig. 5).

Figure 5

The thermoelectric voltage appearing at the reference junction depends


on the thermocouple wire material and on the temperature difference
between the measuring junction and the reference junction. For tem-
perature measurement, the temperature of the reference junction must
be kept constant (e.g. 0 C) or must be well known, to make a apprio-
priate correction in mV (see Fig. 6).

Figure 6

9
Rosemount Mounting and Installation Advice for Resistance Thermometers and Thermocouple

Extension cables are manufactured of the same material as the corres-


ponding thermocouple, e.g. Cu-CuNi, Fe-CuNi. Compensating cables
are manufactured of special materials.

Up to 200 C compensating cables supply the same thermoelectric volt-


age as the thermocouples to which they are connected. The thermo-
electric voltages of the thermocouples are laid down in so-called basic
value series.

e.g. PtRh30%-PtRh6% Type B


Fe-CuNi Type J
NiCr-NiAl Type K
PtRh87/13%-Pt Type R
PtRh90/10%-Pt Type S
and others in DIN IEC 584-1

and Fe-CuNi Type L


Cu-CuNi Type U
These thermocouples are not more available
for use in new plants (thermoelectric voltage
according to DIN 43710). Basic value tables
are available on request only at manufacturer
site.

The compensating cable for a thermocouple must be made of a mate-


rial to suit the particular type of thermocouple, so compensating leads
are colour-coded. For standardized compensating cable the regulations
contained in DIN EN 60584 apply.
Maximum temperatures indicated by manufacturer have to be considered.

Most thermocouples are supplied ready for operation, that is in a pro-


tective mounting to prevent damage to the thermocouple by mechanical
forces or chemical attack.

INSTALLATION OF The protective tubes of thermocouples must be adapted to the particular


PROTECTIVE TUBES operating conditions. Precious metal thermocouples are always protec-
ted with a ceramic tube, even if the unit has a metallic protective
mounting.

At high temperatures the protective tubes should be installed vertically,


where possible, i.e. suspended, to avoid damage deflection to the protec-
tive tube and thermocouple through bending. If specific conditions on
site make a horizontal installation unavoidable, long protective tubes
have to be suitably supported.

LEADS AND When laying and connecting extension resp. compensating cables, care
CONNECTIONS must be taken to connect the positive pole of the thermocouple to the
positive terminal of the indicating instrument. If extension cables or
compensating cable are used, care must be taken not to interchange
positive and negative conductors. To prevent errors, the positive and
negative leads bear a corresponding marking.

10
All connections must be absolutely clean and firmly tightened. The
corresponding positive and negative terminals should have the same
temperature potential.

The compensating cables between the thermocouple and the indica-


ting instrument should comply with the requirements for insulated
leads in power systems (VDE 0250) . In exceptional cases, the regula-
tions for insulated leads in telecommunications systems (VDE 0810)
may be applied.

AREAS OF APPLICATION In the negative temperature range, thermocouples can be used down
to -200 C. For temperatures above 1000 C thermocouples made of
platinum and a platinum/rhodium alloy are used.

Advantages of thermocouples are:


Very high temperature ranges
Fast response
Compact design
Extremely high resistance to vibration
Long term stability
Robust design.

Thermocouples are used in the following and other industries:


Chemical industries
Pharmaceutical industries
Power generation
Mechanical engineering
Food & beverage
Mining
Iron and steel
Ceramics and glass

11
Rosemount Mounting and Installation Advice for Resistance Thermometers and Thermocouple

12
Section
3 Assembly of Housing

Rules and Regulations ......................................................... page 13, 14

RULES AND For assembly of housing following instructions are to be considered.


REGULATIONS
VDE/VDI 3511
Technical temperature measurement/instruction

VDE/VDI 3512
Set-up for temperature measurements

AD instruction leaflets (1)


Working group pressure vessels

TRB technical directions for tank


construction (1)

Vd TV regulations (1)

Operating stress
The stresses, indicated in the drawing, apply to the supplied housing.
The load data, included in the standards for every type, are valid for
housing according to DIN 43763 and DIN 43772.

Starting torques for screw-in type threads


Applicable to screw-in type threads of housing according to DIN
43763 and DIN 43772 as well as comparable housing according to
customers specification.

G 3 8, G 50 Nm
G 100 Nm

Above starting torques are to be used as well for coupling rings with
similar threads.

(1)
To be considered in case of weld-in type protective tubes. Material, weld and pressure test according to operating conditions

13
Rosemount Mounting and Installation Advice for Resistance Thermometers and Thermocouple

Assembly of housing with flange mounting


The seal is to be selected according to the requirements. During insertion
of the seal, a good support is necessary. Fastening screws are to be
tightened evenly and crosswise.

Installation of ceramic housing in plants at operating


temperature
Temperature of the plant:
1600 C insertion speed: 12 cm/min
1200 C insertion speed: 1020 cm/min

Connection of transmitters
When connecting transmitter, the installation-, connection- and test
instructions of the manufacturers are to be considered.

14
Appendix
A Appendix I and Appendix II

APPENDIX I
Limit tolerances of the basic values according to DIN IEC 751 and DIN 43760
Basic values Limit tolerances
according to according to according to according to
DIN IEC 751 DIN 43760 DIN IEC 751 DIN 43760
Platinum RTD- Nickel RTD- Platinum RTD-elements Nickel RTD-
elements elements elements

Class A Class B
Ohm Ohm/K Ohm Ohm/K Ohm corresp. C
C Ohm corresp. C Ohm corresp. C
-200 18.49 0.44 0.24 0.55 0.56 1.3
-100 60.25 0.41 0.14 0.35 0.32 0.8
-60 69.5 0.47 - 1.0 2.1
0 100.00 0.39 100.0 0.55 0.06 0.15 0.12 0.3 0.2 0.4
100 138.50 0.38 161.8 0.69 0.13 0.35 0.30 0.8 0.8 1.1
200 175.84 0.37 240.7 0.90 0.20 0.55 0.48 1.3 1.6 1.8
250 289.2 1.04 2.3 2.1
300 212.02 0.35 0.27 0.75 0.64 1.8
400 247.04 0.34 0.33 0.95 0.79 2.3
500 280.90 0.33 0.38 1.15 0.93 2.8
600 313.59 0.33 0.43 1.35 1.06 3.3
700 345.13 0.31 1.17 3.8
800 375.71 0.30 1.28 4.3
850 390.26 0.29 1.34 4.6

APPENDIX II
Limit tolerances for thermocouples according DIN IEC 584-2
Class 1 2 3(2)
(1)
Limit tolerances 0.5 C or 0.004 x |t| 1 C or 0.0075 x |t| 1C or 0.015 x |t|
() Limit tolerances apply to following temperature ranges
Typ T -40 C up to 350 C -40 C up to 350 C -200 C up to 40 C
(1)
Limit tolerances 1.5 C or 0.004 x |t| 2.5 C or 0.0075 x |t| 2.5 C or 0.015 x |t|
() Limit tolerances apply to following temperature ranges
Typ E -40 C up to 800 C -40 C up to 900 C -200 C up to 40 C
Typ J -40 C up to 750 C -40 C up to 750 C ---
Typ K -40 C up to 1000 C -40 C up to 1200 C -200 C up to 40 C
(1)
Limit tolerances 1.0 C or 1.5 C or 0.0025 x |t| 4 C or 0.005 x |t|
[1+(t-1100) x 003] C
() Limit tolerances apply to following temperature ranges
Type R and S 0 C up to 1600 C 0 C up to 1600 C ---
Type B --- 600 C up to 1700 C 600 C up to 1700 C
(1)
Limit tolerances for thermocouples are indicated in degrees centigrade or as percentage of the measured temperature in degrees centigrade. Whichever value is greater applies.
(2)
Thermocouples and thermocouple wires are usually supplied with limit tolerances according to the table above valid for temperature range above of -40 C. The thermocouple limit
tolerances of same material at temperatures below -40 C may be exceeded as stated for tolerance class 3 according to DIN IEC 584-2. Thermocouples requested by purchaser
with limit tolerances according to classes 1, 2 or 3 may be obtained by special material selection.
|t| = Temperature in degrees Centigrade

15
This document is available electronically at www.fisher-rosemount.com

Fisher-Rosemount satisfies all obligations coming


from legislation to harmonise product requirements
in the European Union.

Rosemount Temperature GmbH Fisher-Rosemount Ltd.


Frankenstrae 21 Heath Place
63791 Karlstein Bognor Regis, PO22 SH6,
Germany England
Phone +49 (6188) 992-0 Phone +44 (1243) 863-121
Fax +49 (6188) 992-286 Fax +44 (1243) 867-554
Internet www.fisher-rosemount.de/rtemp Internet www.rosemount.com

MFM25-2654.A01 1.09.01 Rev. AA VD/Kroeber Printed in Germany


Technical alterations reserved
1/4 3 (DN 6 80)

jamesbury
STANDARD PORT 600
CWP BRASS BALL VALVES
Jamesbury Series 300 general purpose ball valves
feature bubble tight shut-off and are used in hot and
cold water, compressed air, natural and bottled gas,
and low pressure steam applications.
FEATURES
Body and cap forged from high strength MS58 brass

Bulletin B103-4
for a durable compact design.
Brass ball and stem are plated to resist wear and
corrosion. Series 361T and 362T valves feature a 3/4" male hose

thread.The hose end includes a cap with lace retainer.


Internal entry system for positive retention.
Available in 1/2" and 3/4" (DN 15 and 20) sizes. Series
Large port for high flow capacity. 361T has female NPT, and 362T is made for joining
Proven polymeric sealing with no metal to metal with solder. Excellent valve for utility services such as
contact for reliable shut-off. water and HVAC. The hose connection is great for
Adjustable packing gland with reinforced PTFE washdown and drain.
stem seals.

CLOSED POSITION

Solder End Series 341T and 346T are available in 1/2" 2" Upstream
(DN 15 50) sizes. Series 346T Features 316 stainless Sealed
steel ball and stem.
Air Power
Supply Device

Downstream vent
to atmosphere

Series 371T vent valves provide automatic downstream


venting when in the closed position. A slide locking
handle is standard on the 371T. Valves conform to issue 10/2002
OSHA 1910.147 lock/tagout requirements.The 1/2" 1"
(DN 15 25) valves can be cycled during an emergency
Threaded Series 351T and 356T are the most economic from the open to the closed position without interfer-
choice for general purpose ball valves from Jamesbury. ence from mechanical stops. Other size valves may be
Sizes range from 1/4" 3" (DN 6 80). Series 356T locked in either open or closed position.
features 316 stainless steel ball and stem which is
ideal for saturated steam service to 150 psi (10.34 bar).
M E T S O A U T O M AT I O N

VALVE-BODY RATINGS Valve Seat Ratings


This is the maximum working pressure of the valve body Temperature C
only. The seat rating and solder joint rating determine the 0 50 100 150 200 250
practical pressure limitation in actual service. Working 700
pressure rating is 600 psi (41.37 bar) at -20F to +100F Series 351T, 356T, 362T

Maximum Differential Pressure, bar


600

Maximum Differential Pressure, psi


(-29C to 38C). 0F (-18C) solder end valves. 40

500
Solder Joint Ratings
Series 341T, 346T, 361T 30
Based on ANSI B16.18 and B16.22 400
Working Maximum Working
Joining Temperature Pressure psi (bar) 300 20
Material 1/2 1 1-1/4 2
F C (DN 15 25) (DN 30 50) Series 371T
200
100 38 200 (13.8) 175 (12.1)
50-50
150 66 150 (100.3) 125 (8.6) 10
Tin-Lead 100
200 93 100 (6.9) 90 (6.5)
Solder
250 121 85 (5.9) 75 (5.2)
0
100 38 400 (27.6) 400 (27.6) -100 0 100 200 300 400 500
95-5 Temperature F
150 66 400 (27.6) 350 (24.1)
Tin-Antimony
200 93 300 (20.7) 250 (17.2)
Solder
250 121 200 (13.8) 175 (12.1)

Dimensions - Inches (mm) and Weights

E Port Dia.

B
A Location of vent series 371T only

These valves are available with a wide range of handles. For Automated Brass Valves refer to Bulletin B103-2. Valves
Round Handles, Extension Handles, Locking devices and feature Jamesbury VPVL double opposed compact piston
Memory Stops. To view valve handle accessories, please actuators.
refer to Bulletin B103-6.

-2-
1 / 4 3 ( D N 8 8 0 ) S TA N D A R D P O R T 6 0 0 C W P B R A S S B A L L VA LV E S

Series 341T / 346T (Solder-End)


Valve Approx. Dimensions inches Approx. Valve Approx. Dimensions (mm) Approx.
Size Weight Size Weight
A B E H J A B E H J
inches lb DN kg
1/2 2.07 0.94 0.39 3.94 1.65 0.4 15 52.6 23.9 9.91 100.1 41.9 .18
3/4 2.64 1.32 0.59 3.94 1.73 0.6 20 67.1 33.5 15.0 100.1 43.9 .27
1 3.27 1.63 0.79 4.72 2.07 1.0 25 83.1 41.4 20.1 119.9 52.6 .45
1-1/4 3.74 1.87 0.98 4.72 2.24 1.4 30 95.0 47.5 24.9 119.9 56.9 .63
1-1/2 4.41 2.20 1.26 6.22 3.03 2.1 40 112.0 55.9 32.0 158.0 77.0 .94
2 5.37 2.70 1.57 6.22 3.29 3.5 50 136.4 68.6 39.9 158.0 83.6 1.6

Series 351T / 356T / 371T (Threaded-End)


Valve Approx. Dimensions inches Approx. Valve Approx. Dimensions mm Approx.
Size Weight Size Weight
A B E H J A B E H J
inches lb DN kg
1/4 1.78 0.89 0.31 3.94 1.50 0.3 6 45.2 22.6 7.9 100.1 38.1 .14
3/8 1.81 0.91 0.34 3.94 1.50 0.3 10 46.0 23.1 8.7 100.1 38.1 .14
1/2 2.22 1.11 0.41 3.94 1.65 0.4 15 56.4 28.2 10.4 100.1 41.9 .18
3/4 2.41 1.20 0.59 3.94 1.73 0.5 20 61.2 30.5 15.0 100.1 43.9 .23
1 2.97 1.48 0.78 4.75 2.09 1.2 25 75.4 37.6 19.8 120.7 53.1 .54
1-1/4 3.34 1.67 1.00 4.75 2.24 1.5 30 84.8 42.4 25.4 120.7 56.9 .68
1-1/2 3.75 1.88 1.25 6.25 3.03 2.2 40 95.3 47.8 31.8 158.8 77.0 .99
2 4.28 2.14 1.56 6.25 3.29 3.3 50 108.7 54.4 39.6 158.8 83.6 1.5
2-1/2 5.28 2.64 1.89 6.25 3.52 5.3 65 134.1 67.1 48.0 158.8 89.4 2.4
3 6.38 3.19 2.52 10.04 5.20 10.6 80 162.1 81.0 64.0 255.0 132.1 4.8

Series 361T

Valve Approx. Dimensions inches Approx. Valve Approx. Dimensions mm Approx.


Size Weight Size Weight
A B E H J A B E H J
inches lb DN kg
1/2 2.45 1.06 0.39 3.94 1.65 0.4 15 62.2 26.9 9.9 100.1 41.9 .18
3/4 2.56 1.20 0.59 3.94 1.73 0.5 20 65.0 30.5 15.0 100.1 43.9 .23

Series 362T

Valve Approx. Dimensions inches Approx. Valve Approx. Dimensions mm Approx.


Size Weight Size Weight
A B E H J A B E H J
inches lb DN kg
1/2 2.33 0.94 0.39 3.94 1.65 0.4 15 59.2 23.9 9.9 100.1 41.9 .18
3/4 2.68 1.32 0.59 3.94 1.73 0.6 20 68.1 33.5 15.0 100.1 43.9 .23

-3-
M E T S O A U T O M AT I O N

Bill of Materials and Parts List


Part Name Materials of Construction
Body Forged Brass++
Ball* Chrome-Plated Brass
Seats Virgin PTFE
Stem* Nickel-Plated Brass
Stem Seal Virgin PTFE (PTFE & Viton 3 Size)
Handle Vinyl-Coated Steel
Handle Nut Carbon Steel
Packing Nut Carbon Steel
Stem Thrust Washer Carbon-Filled PTFE
Cap & Seal+ Brass & EPDM

* Series 356T and 346T feature 316 stainless steel ball and stem material.
+ For Series 361T & 362T valves. Cap & seal not shown.
++Attention: The state of California has determined lead and lead
compounds are known to cause cancer, birth defects and reproductive
harm. The state of California prohibits the use of brass valves for
drinking water service.

HOW TO ORDER
To order a valve series, first indicate the size then follow with the series. Example: 1/ 2" (DN 15) valve series 351T is specified 1/2 351T.

Installation Instructions, Maintenance and Operation


IMO's (Installation, Maintenance, and Operating instructions) or AMI's (Assembly, Mounting, and Installation instructions)
are shipped with the products. Additional copies of these instructions are available. Call your local Metso Automation
Distributor, or visit our web site.
Metso Automation, Field Systems Division
Europe, Levytie 6, P.O.Box 310, 00811 Helsinki, Finland. Tel. int. +358 20 483 150. Fax int. +358 20 483 151
Europe (UK), 8 Pipers Wood Industrial Park, Waterlooville, Hampshire PO7 7XU UK. Tel. int. +44 (0)23 9223 8500. Fax int. +44 (0)23 9223-8510
North America, 44 Bowditch Drive, P.O.Box 8044, Shrewsbury, Massachusetts, 01545-8044 USA. Tel. int. +1 508 852 0200. Fax int. +1 508 852 8172
Latin America, Av. Central, 181- Chracas Reunidas, 12238-430, So Jose dos Campos. Tel. int. +55 12 335 3500. Fax int. +55 12 335 3535
Asia Pacific, 501 Orchard Road, #05-09 Wheelock Place, 238880 Singapore. Tel. int. +65 735 5200. Fax int. +65 735 2955
www.jamesbury.com

B103-4-10/02 2002 Metso Automation Printed in U.S.A.-M-J


E2

Temperature Products New!


Model ADJ 3 and 5 Adjustable Angle MADE IN USA

Industrial Bimetallic Thermometers


DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATIONS
U.S. Gauge offers 3 and 5 STEM DIAMETER: .25 standard up to 42 stem; .375
heavy duty, industrial standard over 42 stem
bimetallic thermometers CONNECTION: 1/2-14 NPT
with a versatile case and EXTERNAL RESET: Easy to calibrate by inserting 1/16 hex
stem that can be wrench into reset opening
adjusted to almost any CONSTRUCTION: 304 stainless steel external parts and
angle for easy viewing. welded construction; corrosion resistant to most chemicals
The head can be rotated HERMETIC SEAL: Per ASME B40.3, dustproof and
360 and the stem leakproof
positioning moves over 180. HARNESS: All stainless steel brackets with screws that
These thermometers are rugged and loosen to allow 360 rotation of head and 180 adjustment
preferred by the process, offshore, power, of stem position
pharmaceutical, and chemical industries. BELLOWS: Heavy-duty flexible stainless steel, hermetically
The union connection is 1/2-14 NPT, sealed at case and connection; protects mechanism that
transfers temperature
but others are available. The thermometers
DIAL: True anti-parallax dial, easy to read from any angle,
may be silicone filled for additional vibration minimizes reading errors; anodized aluminum with large
dampening. A variety of lens materials are black numbers and graduations
available including acrylic, polycarbonate, LENS: Glass
shatterproof and tempered glass. Standard
BIMETALLIC COIL: Helix coil is silicone coated on ranges
stem diameter, up to 42 long, is .25. below 500F for vibration dampening and to maximize heat
Other available stem sizes are .24 (6 mm), transfer and response time
.32 (8 mm), and .375 (9.52 mm). ACCURACY: 1% full span per ASME B40.3 Grade A;
adjustment of the angle between case and stem may affect
accuracy up to 0.5% of span (ASME B40.3)
A OVER TEMPERATURE LIMITS: Up to 250F, 100%; 250 to
550F, 50%; 550 to 1000F, continuous use up to 800F,
intermittent use over 800F

2.37
(60.2)

.625
1/2-14 NPT (15.88)
STANDARD
STEM LENGTHS
INCHES 2.5 (63.5) MODEL UNIT A B
4 (101.6)
(MM) 6 (152.4) inches 2.43 3.19
9 (228.6) ADJ-3
.25 mm 61.72 80.95
12 (304.8)
(6.35) 15 (381.0) inches 2.66 5.04
18 (457.2) ADJ-5
24 (609.6) mm 67.56 128.02

2002, by AMETEK, Inc. All rights reserved. 15M1102A (160126) Specifications are subject to change without notice. Visit our Web sites for the most up-to-date information.

For Gauges/Thermometers: For Electronic Products: For Diaphragm Seals:


U.S. GAUGE PMT PRODUCTS M&G PRODUCTS
820 Pennsylvania Blvd. 820 Pennsylvania Blvd. 8600 Somerset Drive
Feasterville, PA 19053 U.S.A. Feasterville, PA 19053 U.S.A. Largo, FL 33773 U.S.A.
Tel: (215) 355-6900 Tel: (215) 355-6900 Tel: (727) 536-7831
Fax: (215) 354-1802 Fax: (215) 354-1800 Fax: (727) 539-6882
www.ametekusg.com www.ametekusg.com www.ametek.com/tci
Customer Service Tel: (863) 534-1504
Customer Service Fax: (863) 533-7465
E3

Temperature Products
Model ADJ 3 and 5 Adjustable Angle
Industrial Bimetallic Thermometers
SPEC NUMBER SELECTION CHART

Model ADJ-3 3 Dial Size


2-1/2 Stem 4 Stem 6 Stem 9 Stem 12 Stem
Length Length Length Length Length
Temperature
Connection Range* Spec No. Spec No. Spec No. Spec No. Spec No.
1/2-14 NPT 0 to 200 FC 415002 415008 415014 415020 415026
0 to 250 FC 415003 415009 415015 415021 415027
50 to 300 FC 415004 415010 415016 415022 415028
50 to 400 FC 415005 415011 415017 415023 415029
50 to 550 FC 415006 415012 415018 415024 415030
200 to 1000 FC 415007 415013 415019 415025 415031

Model ADJ-5 5 Dial Size


2-1/2 Stem 4 Stem 6 Stem 9 Stem 12 Stem
Length Length Length Length Length
Temperature
Connection Range* Spec No. Spec No. Spec No. Spec No. Spec No.
1/2-14 NPT 25 to 125 FC 415038 415045
0 to 200 FC 415032 415039 415046 415052 415058
0 to 250 FC 415033 415040 415047 415053 415059
50 to 300 FC 415034 415041 415048 415054 415060
50 to 400 FC 415035 415042 415049 415055 415061
50 to 550 FC 415036 415043 415050 415056 415062
200 to 1000 FC 415037 415044 415051 415057 415063

* All dials are dual scale, Fahrenheit outer scale, Celsius inner scale

2002, by AMETEK, Inc. All rights reserved. 15M1102A (160126) Specifications are subject to change without notice. Visit our Web sites for the most up-to-date information.

For Gauges/Thermometers: For Electronic Products: For Diaphragm Seals:


U.S. GAUGE PMT PRODUCTS M&G PRODUCTS
820 Pennsylvania Blvd. 820 Pennsylvania Blvd. 8600 Somerset Drive
Feasterville, PA 19053 U.S.A. Feasterville, PA 19053 U.S.A. Largo, FL 33773 U.S.A.
Tel: (215) 355-6900 Tel: (215) 355-6900 Tel: (727) 536-7831
Fax: (215) 354-1802 Fax: (215) 354-1800 Fax: (727) 539-6882
www.ametekusg.com www.ametekusg.com www.ametek.com/tci
Customer Service Tel: (863) 534-1504
Customer Service Fax: (863) 533-7465
Check Valve Doctor

In-Line Check Valves


DFT

Check Valve Doctor

DFT in-line check valves began over 50 years ago with a customers need
for a small metal-seated check valve that could be installed in any position
while providing tight shut-off. The Basic-Check valve was developed to
satisfy that need. Over the following decades, other customers needs led
to the development of the DLC, Excalibur, GLC, PDC, SCV and WLC
styles of in-line silent check valves. Each of these DFT in-line check valves
addresses the particular needs of a modern day customer.
DFTs objective is to solve check valve problems and prevent check valve
failures. DFT has learned by listening to customers like you that each indus-
try has special needs that can exceed other check valve designs. We spe-
cialize in providing in-line check valves that meet customer requirements as
opposed to simply meeting line size. In some cases, minor modifications to
our valves have solved customer problems by improving performance and
extending service life. The Check Valve Doctor continues to grow from
satisfying these needs and solving problems.
DFT silent check valves are known around the world as the valve to use to
prevent or eliminate water hammer problems. Whatever your size, pres-
sure or piping configurations, DFT has a check valve for you.
Thank you for considering DFT for your check valve requirements.

Table Of Contents
ITEM PAGE ITEM PAGE ITEM PAGE
Applications ..............................27 Introduction.................................2 SCV ...........................................6
Basic-Check.............................18 Materials...................................26 Selection Chart ............................5
Codes and Standards ................24 Material Limitations ...................25 Technical Information .................29
DLC ..........................................8 Ordering Information ................30 Vacuum Breakers .......................20
Excalibur .................................12 PDC .......................................16 Valve Data Sheet .......................31
Features ......................................4 Pressure-Temperature Warranty ..................................30
Flange Dimensions.....................28 Ratings .....................................25 Water Hammer ...........................3
GLC ........................................14 Restrictor Check ........................22 WLC (Wafer Check) .................10

Basic-Check, Excalibur, DLC, GLC, PDC, WLC are registered trademarks of DFT Inc.

dft@dft-valves.com
2 610-363-8903
www.dft-valves.com
Water Hammer
is the generation and effect of high pressure shock waves (transients) in relatively incompressible
fluids. Water hammer is caused by the shock waves that are generated when a liquid is stopped
abruptly in a pipe by an object such as a valve disc. Symptoms include noise, vibration and
hammering pipe sounds which can result in flange breakage, equipment damage, ruptured piping
and damage to pipe supports. Whenever incompressible fluids exist in a piping system, the
potential exists for water hammer. The risks of water hammer developing are particularly high when
the velocity of the fluid is high, there is a large mass of fluid moving and/or when there are large
elevation changes within the piping systems. Since the swing check must rely on gravity and/or fluid
flow to help it close, flow reversal must occur before closure begins. When the swing check finally
closes, it abruptly stops the flow and causes a pressure surge resulting in shock waves. These shock
waves continue until the energy generated from this sudden action dissipates. Figure 1 shows
typical pressure curves after closure of a check valve.

These high pressure waves act against the piping and the valve, exerting very high forces. This
causes severe stress on the metal and vibrations in the system. If the system is not designed to
withstand these high transient forces, the pipe could rupture and/or other components in the system,
such as pumps and valves, could possibly be damaged. These problems can be eliminated or
greatly minimized by installing a spring assisted silent check valve. Silent check valves do not rely
on gravity or fluid flow for their closure. Instead as the forward velocity of the fluid slows, the spring
assist on the valve starts to close the disc. Due to the spring assist and the relatively short distance
the disc must travel, by the time the forward velocity has decreased to zero, the valve disc has
reached the seat and the valve is closed. With reverse flow eliminated, the forces necessary to
produce water hammer on both the upstream and downstream sides of the valves are substantially
eliminated as shown on the right side of Figure 1.

dft@dft-valves.com
610-363-8903 3

www.dft-valves.com
Features
Designed to prevent Water Hammer.

The spring-assisted, in-line design featured in all DFT check valves insures that as the
forward flow in a pipeline decreases the disc begins moving closer to the seat. By the time
the flow stops, the disc is closed against the seat preventing flow reversal. This prevents the
valve from slamming closed causing Water Hammer and the resultant noise and damage
to piping systems from occurring.

Designed to open at 0.5 psi differential pressure and fully open at 1.0 psi differential
pressure.

Can be installed in ANY position.


Including vertical with flow up or down. (Special springs may be required)

MSS SP 126-2000 Steel In-line Spring-Assisted Center Guided Check Valves Standard
DFT carbon steel, stainless steel and alloy valves meet this standard. (Does not apply to the
Basic-Check , Restrictor Check or Vacuum Breaker)

Meet or exceed MSS SP-61 leakage requirements.


Metal-to-metal seating is standard in all DFT in-line check valves. Cast iron valves
meet AWWA seat leakage requirements.

Available with soft seats for bubble-tight shutoff.

Dual guided stems.


The stem is guided upstream and downstream to guard against vibrations and insure
proper disc seating. (Does not apply to the Basic-Check, DLC, Restrictor Check, SCV or
Vacuum Breaker)

Custom sizing available.


The following DFT check valves can be sized to the appropriate flow conditions: Excalibur,
GLC and WLC.

Pulse-Damping Design.
The DFT Model PDC is specifically designed for use on the discharge of reciprocating air
or gas compressors. The design includes a pulse-damping chamber to protect against
premature seat wear due to chattering.

Liquids, gas or steam.


All DFT in-line check valves provide positive shutoff for applications involving liquids, gas or
steam and can be used in most industries including oil and gas, petrochemical, pulp and
paper, textiles, food and beverage and commercial construction. Applications include
chemical lines, fluid injection, condensate recovery, steam, nitrogen, pump and compressor
discharge, chiller and boiler feed systems. Cast Iron valves are recommended for liquid
services only.

Maintenance and Installation guides.


Available for all DFT in-line check valves.

dft@dft-valves.com
4 610-363-8903
www.dft-valves.com
Valve Selection Chart
Basic- Restrictor Vacuum
DLC Excalibur GLC PDC SCV WLC
Check Check Breaker
PAGE 18 8 12 14 16 22 6 20 10
SIZE 1/4 TO 3/4 TO 2 TO 24 1 TO 2 TO 1/4 TO 1/2 TO 1 TO 4 1 TO
2-1/2 3 24 12 2-1/2 3 10

ENDS
NPT X X X(1) X
SW X(1)
FLG X X X X
BW X
FLG/BW X
Victaulic X
Wafer X

ANSI
125 X X
150 X X X X X
250 X X
300 X X X X X
600 X X X X
900 X X X X
1500 X X X X
2500 X X

750 CWP X
3600 CWP X
OTHER X(2) X(3) X(2) X(2) X(3)

MATERIALS BODY /TRIM


Cast Iron X(4) X(4)
WCB/316 SS X X X X
316SS/316SS X(5) X X X X X(5) X X(5) X
Other Alloys X X X

OPTIONS
Soft Seat X X X X X X X X
X-750 Spring X X(6) X X X X X(6) X X

1. NPT x SW available.
2. CWP RATING BSS, BSA, BSE, BSSV, Restrictor Check: 450 to 2500 CWP depending on size;
BSSH6, BSSV6: 450 to 6000 CWP depending on size.
BSSH7: 800 to 6000 CWP depending on size.
3. API 2000 and 5000 ARE AVAILABLE. Contact DFT for sizes.
4. TRIM MATERIAL: BRONZE OR 316 SS
5. BODY & SEAT: BSE, BSS, BSSV. Restrictor Check: 303SS, BSA: 416SS, BSSH6, BSSH7, BSSV6: 316SS
6. Inconel X-750 spring is standard.

dft@dft-valves.com
610-363-8903 5

www.dft-valves.com
SCV
Features:

1/2 to 3 Line size


750 & 3600 CWP
NPT & SW ends
316 Stainless Steel Construction
Inconel X-750 spring
Meets NACE MR-01-75
Spring-assisted silent closing
Zelon body O ring
Horizontal or vertical installation
Body guided disc
Tight shut-off - lapped disc & seat
Simplified construction - 5 parts
Easy maintenance
Versatile
OPTIONS:
- 316 SS Springs
- Body seal weld
- Soft seat
- Alloy 20 body & seat
- Hastelloy C body & seat
- NPT x socket weld ends

The DFT Model SCV is a corrosion resistant, dependable, ver-


satile and economical spring-assisted, in-line check valve for a
wide range of applications. Whether the fluid is liquid, gas or
steam, the SCV provides tight shut-off and protects other
equipment in the system from water hammer. Its 316 stainless
steel construction insures a long service life.

dft@dft-valves.com
6 610-363-8903
www.dft-valves.com
SCV
750 CWP/500 WSP
1/2 3/4 1 1 1/4 1 1/2 2 3
A 2.68 3 3.32 3.87 4.75 5 6.75
B (dia.) 1.62 2.13 2.54 3.06 3.44 4.4 6.19
Weight 1.1 1.5 1.9 3.9 4.7 7.7 18.8
CV 7 13 22 39 54 93 180
Cracking 0.4 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.2 0.2 0.3
Pressure (psi)

3600 CWP
1/2 3/4 1 2
A 3.16 3 3.75 6.38
B 1.88 2.33 2.75 4.06
B
Weight 1.5 3 4.5 12.0
CV 6.0 11 19 65
Cracking 0.5 0.4 0.4 0.3
Pressure (psi)
Notes: All dimensions are in inches. Weights are in pounds. A

750 CWP MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION 3600 CWP MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION


Body A351 CF8M A351 CF8M
Seat (1) A351 CF8M A351 CF8M
Disc A240 316 A240 316
Spring Inconel X-750 Inconel X-750
O ring Zelon (470F max.) Zelon (400F max.) (2)
Notes: 1. Soft seats are available for bubble-tight shutoff. See below. 2. Buna-N CO2 resistant O ring
Body seal and soft seat material are the same unless otherwise requested. is available upon request.
3. Maximum temperature for Buna-N.
PRESSURE TEMPERATURE RATING (PSIG) 4. Maximum temperature for Viton and
Zelon w/3600CWP SCV.
Temp. (deg.F) 750 CWP 3600 CWP 5. Maximum temperature for Zelon
-20 to 100 750 3600 w/750CWP SCV.
200 630 3095 6. Buna-N and Viton are not suitable for
steam service.
250 (3) 600 2945 7. Maximum valve temperature rating is
300 570 2795 limited by the body seal & seat material
selected.
400 (4) 525 2570 8. 750CWP is rated to 470F.
470 (5) 510

BODY O RING/SOFT SEAT MATERIALS (6) (7) SPRINGS


MATERIALS BUNA-N VITON ZELON(8) 316SS INCONEL X-750
TEMP. F -70 TO 250 -40 TO 400 37 TO 400 -460 TO 450 -460 TO 700

dft@dft-valves.com
610-363-8903 7

www.dft-valves.com
DLC

Features:
ANSI Face-to-Face dimensions
Spring-assisted silent closing
3/4 to 3 Line size
ANSI 150 and 300
316 Stainless Steel Construction
BODY
SPRING Raised Face Flanged ends
Inconel X-750 spring
DISC Electron beam welded body
Meets B16.34 - 1988
Meets NACE MR-01-75
ELECTRON
BEAM WELD
Horizontal or vertical installation
Body guided disc
Tight shut-off - lapped disc & seat
Simplified construction - 3 parts
Versatile
OPTIONS:
- 316 SS Springs
- Body Materials
- Alloy 20

- Hastelloy C

The DFT Model DLC is a corrosion resistant,


dependable, versatile and economical spring
assisted, in-line check valve for a wide range of
applications. Whether the fluid is liquid, gas or
steam, the DLC provides tight shut-off and protects
other equipment in the system from water hammer.
Its 316 stainless steel construction insures a long
service life.

dft@dft-valves.com
8 610-363-8903
www.dft-valves.com
DLC

Class 150 RF
3/4 1 1 1/2 2 3
A 4.62 5.00 6.50 8.00 9.50
B 3.88 4.25 5.00 6.00 7.50
Weight 4.5 6.0 11.7 19.1 39.2
CV 13 22 54 93 180
Cracking .3 .3 .2 .2 .3
Pressure
(psi) B

Class 300 RF
3/4 1 1 1/2 2 3
A 7.00 8.50 9.50 10.50 12.50
B 4.62 4.88 6.12 6.50 8.25 A
Weight 7.2 9.9 18.5 24.3 50.5
CV 13 22 54 93 180
Cracking .3 .3 .2 .2 .3
Pressure
(psi)
Notes: All dimensions are in inches. Weights are in pounds.

MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION PRESSURE TEMPERATURE RATING (PSIG)


Body A351 CF8M Temp. (deg.F) Class 150 Class 300
Seat A351 CF8M 460 to 100 275 720
Spring Inconel X-750 200 235 620
Disc 316 SS 250 225 590
300 215 560
400 195 515
470 175 490
500 170 480
600 140 450
700 110 430

dft@dft-valves.com
610-363-8903 9

www.dft-valves.com
WLC

BODY GUARD Features:

Wafer design
Lightweight
Spring-assisted silent closing
SPRING Edge guided (1 & 1-1/2)
DISC
Center guided (2 to 10)
Dual guided stem (2 to 10)
Horizontal or vertical installation
Protected spring
ANSI 150 to 2500
O-RING - 1 to 10 Line Size
SEAT
- WCB & 316 SS bodies
RETAINING - 316 SS trim
RING 1 and 1-1/2 WLC - Ends:
- Wafer RF
- Wafer RTJ
BUSHING - MSS-SP 61 seat leakage
SPRING - API 594 Face-to-Face dimension:
- Class 600 RF
- Class 900/1500 RF
OPTIONS:
- Inconel X-750 Spring
- Soft Seat
- Custom Sizing
- Body Materials:
- Alloy20, Inconel 625, Titanium
- Stellited trim (600F+)
- Weld Neck Flanges to meet B16.10
Face-to-Face dimensions
BODY STEM/DISC ASSY. SEAT ANSI 125 & 250
2 and larger WLC - 2 to 10 Line Size
- Cast Iron body
- Bronze or 316 SS trim
The DFT Model WLC Wafer style Silent Check Valve is
- Ends:
a lightweight, spring-assisted, center guided, in-line
- Wafer FF
check valve that provides reliable, low maintenance
- AWWA seat leakage
service for a wide range of fluids and pressure/
- FM approval:
temperature combinations. The joint between the seat
- 2 to 10 CI. 125 w/Bronze trim
ring and body is sealed by the flange gasket upon
OPTIONS:
installation preventing any leakage through the joint
- Soft seat
when the valve is in service.

Consult page 25 for Pressure/Temperature ratings and page 26 for materials of construction.

dft@dft-valves.com
10 610-363-8903
www.dft-valves.com
WLC

Class 150 RF(1) Class 300 RF(1) Class 150/300 RF 150 RF


1* 11/2* 1* 11/2* 2* 21/2* 3* 4* 5* 6* 8* 10*
A 2 21/2 2 21/2 25/8 27/8 31/8 4 45/8 51/2 61/2 81/4
B 25/8 31/4 27/8 33/4 43/8 51/8 53/4 71/8 81/2 97/8 121/8 175/8
Weight 2 4 3 6 4 10 12 20 35 41 86 138
CV 19 36 13 36 57 95 140 265 360 506 860 1355

B A
Class 600 RF(1)
1 11/2 2 3 4 6
A 23/8 27/8 23/8 27/8 31/8 53/8
B 27/8 33/4 41/4 53/4 71/2 103/8
Weight 21/2 8 5 11 21 68
CV 19 23 53 133 234 441

Class 900/1500 RF(1)


1 11/2 2 3 4 6
A 23/8 27/8 23/4 31/4 4 61/4
B 31/8 37/8 51/2 63/4 81/8 111/4
Weight 4 8 14 21 38 100
CV 19 23 48 113 211 370

Class 1500 RTJ(2) 1500 RF(2) 2500 RTJ(2)


1 11/2 2* 3 4* 6 10 10 1 2* 3
A 23/8 27/8 31/8 31/4 41/8 61/4 9 3/4 93/4 23/8 213/16 33/8
B 31/8 37/8 51/2 63/4 81/4 111/4 171/16 17 31/8 53/4 71/2
Weight 4 7 14 21 38 100 430 430 4.1 17 33
CV 19 23 48 113 211 370 755 755 19 35 80

Class 125/250 Cast Iron FF


2* 21/2* 3* 4* 5* 6*
A 25/8 27/8 31/8 4 43/4 51/2
B 41/4 5 53/4 7 83/8 93/4
Weight 6 7 12 18 27 42
CV 66 88 130 228 350 520

Class 125 Cast Iron FF Class 250 Cast Iron FF


8* 10* 8* 10*
A 61/2 81/4 A 61/2 81/4
B 133/8 16 B 133/8 16
Weight 85 129 Weight 86 137
CV 900 1450 CV 900 1450
All dimensions are in inches. Weights are in pounds.
*Does not meet API 594 face-to-face dimension.
o
Notes: 1. Size 1 and 1-1/2 have Buna-N (-70 to 250 F) body O ring seals. Contact DFT for other materials.
o
2. All sizes have Buna-N (-70 to 250 F) body O ring seals except 10 C l.1500 RTJ/RF have spiral wound body
seals. Contact DFT for other materials.

dft@dft-valves.com
610-363-8903 11

www.dft-valves.com
Excalibur

Features:

ANSI B16.10 Face-to-Face dimensions


Spring-assisted silent closing
2 to 24 Line size
ANSI 150 to 1500
WCB & 316 SS bodies
316 SS trim
Ends:
- RF Flanged
- RTJ
Center guided
Dual guided stem
Horizontal or vertical installation
Tight shut-off
Two piece body
Protected spring
Body gaskets (See Page 26)
Easy maintenance
Versatile
OPTIONS:
SEAT - Soft seat
- Inconel X-750 Spring
- Custom sizing
- Digester trim
- Body Materials:
- Alloy 20
- Monel
- Stellited trim (600F+)
(1)
- Ends :
- Butt weld
- Flanged x Butt weld
- Victaulic

The DFT Excalibur Silent Check Valve is a spring-assisted, center guided, in-line, check valve that
provides reliable, low maintenance service for a wide range of fluids and pressure/temperature
combinations. The valve consists of a body, gasket, seat, spring, disc with stem and guide bushing.
Excalibur check valves are available in a wide range of sizes and pressure ratings and in a variety of
metals to meet most check valve requirements.
(1) Consult DFT for availability
Consult page 25 for Pressure/Temperature ratings and page 26 for materials of construction.

dft@dft-valves.com
12 610-363-8903
www.dft-valves.com
Excalibur

Class 150 RF*


2 21/2 3 4 6 8 10 12 16 24
A 8 81/2 91/2 11 /2 14 191/2
1 241/2 27 /2 34
1 51
B 6 7 71/2 9 11 131/2 16 19 231/2 32
Weight 22 30 37 64 114 207 317 457 830 1851
CV 65 105 155 265 685 1050 1650 2400 5200 11300

Class 300 RF*


2 21/2 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 20
A 101/2 111/2 121/2 14 171/2 21 241/2 28 33 40
B 61/2 71/2 81/4 10 121/2 15 171/2 201/2 23 301/2
Weight 29 42 52 92 177 285 456 696 725 2375
CV 65 105 155 265 685 1050 1650 2400 3600 7850

Class 600 RF*


2 3 4 6 8 10 12
A 111/2 14 17 22 26 31 33
B 61/2 81/4 103/4 14 161/2 20 22
Weight 35 69 138 300 481 981 1320
CV 65 155 265 584 985 1650 2400

Class 900 RF*


2 3 4 6 8 10
A 141/2 15 18 24 29 33
B 81/2 91/2 111/2 15 181/2 211/2
Weight 81 155 176 780 1250 1650
CV 51 138 242 512 777 1449

Class 1500 RF* A

2 3 4 6 8
A 141/2 181/2 211/2 27 /4 323/4
3

B 81/2 101/2 121/4 151/2 19


Weight 81 158 267 780 1270
CV 51 109 187 512 777 B

* For other sizes, consult factory.

Note: All dimensions are in inches. Weights are in pounds.

dft@dft-valves.com
610-363-8903 13

www.dft-valves.com
GLC

Features:

Short Face-to-Face dimensions


One piece body
Spring-assisted silent closing
Center guided
Dual guided stem
BODY Horizontal or vertical installation
Protected spring
BUSHING
Easy maintenance
SPRING Versatile
ANSI 150 To 2500
DISC
- 1 to 24 Line size
STEM - WCB & 316 SS Bodies
- 316 SS trim
SEAT
- RF Flanged Ends
- MSS-SP61 seat leakage
(1)
O-RING
(some valves)
OPTIONS:
- Inconel X-750 Spring
- Soft seat
- Custom sizing
- Body Materials
Full Face Seat (2) - Alloy 20
(some valves)
- Digester trim
- Stellited trim (600F+)
(3)
- RTJ Ends
ANSI 125 & 250
- 2-1/2 to 24 Line size (CI.125)
The DFT Model GLC Silent Check Valve is a spring-assisted,
center guided, in-line, flanged check valve that provides - 2-1/2 to 8 Line size (CI.250)
reliable, low maintenance service for a wide range of fluids - Cast Iron Body
and pressure/temperature combinations. The valve consists - Bronze or 316 SS trim
of a body, seat, spring, disc with stem and guide bushing. - Ends:
Some valves have body or gasket seals. The DFT GLC check - FF Flanged
valve has the advantage of minimum pressure loss with silent, - AWWA seat leakage
non-slam operation. - OPTIONS:
(1) Consult Page 15 for valves with Body O ring seals. - Soft seat
(2) Consult Page 15 for valves with Full Face seats
(3) Contact DFT for availability

Consult page 25 for Pressure/Temperature ratings and page 26 for materials of construction.

dft@dft-valves.com
14 610-363-8903
www.dft-valves.com
GLC

Class 150 RF
1 11/2 2* 3* 4 5 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 24
A 41/2 53/4 61/4 71/2 81/2 91/2 10 12 14 18 21 221/2 24 24 28
B 41/4 5 6 71/2 9 10 11 131/2 16 19 21 231/2 25 271/2 32
Weight 7 13 17 33 55 72 93 172 266 387 456 700 753 1292 1571
CV 17 35 63 148 260 415 620 1030 1630 2370 3500 5100 6400 7700 11100

Class 300 RF
1 11/2 2 21/2 3 4 5 6 8 10 12* 14* 16* 20 24
A 43/4 6 61/2 71/4 77/8 91/8 103/8 11 13 153/8 191/2 23 24 24 28
B 47/8 61/8 61/2 71/2 81/4 10 11 121/2 15 171/2 201/2 23 251/2 301/2 36
Weight 9 17 23 41 46 71 89 139 232 335 550 724 898 1357 2420
CV 19 35 63 100 148 267 415 620 933 1704 2370 2781 5100 7700 10510

Class 600 RF
1 11/2 2* 3* 4 6 8* 10* 12 16*
A 51/4 65/8 71/4 85/8 101/8 123/8 145/8 171/8 211/4 26
B 47/8 61/8 61/2 81/4 103/4 14 161/2 20 22 27
Weight 11 19 25 57 115 175 332 450 840 1093
CV 17 35 63 125 237 549 933 1620 2272 5100
Class 900 RF
11/2* 2* 21/2 3 6* 8* 10*
A 73/8 81/4 9 91/8 13 151/4 175/8
B 7 81/2 95/8 91/2 15 181/2 211/2
Weight 30 56 78 87 264 396 539
CV 26 46 81 114 549 851 1499 Class
B
Class 1500 RF 2500 RF
11/2* 2* 21/2 3 4* 6* 8* 12* 2* 3*
A 73/8 81/4 9 97/8 113/8 151/8 171/2 441/2 91/4 14
B 7 81/2 95/8 101/2 121/4 151/2 19 261/2 91/4 12
Weight 30 56 78 110 164 405 670 2550 77 218
CV 26 46 81 114 192 441 742 1689 32 77 A
Class 125 Cast Iron FF
21/2 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 24
A 51/2 6 71/4 81/2 93/4 121/2 151/2 141/4 153/4 175/8 183/4 205/8 24
B 7 71/2 9 10 11 131/2 16 19 21 231/2 25 271/2 32
Weight 24 29 42 52 73 126 205 306 380 501 724 890 1220
CV 110 155 278 435 625 1115 1770 2500 3400 4400 5600 6900 10000
Class 250 Cast Iron FF
21/2 3 4 5 6 8
A 51/2 6 71/4 81/2 93/4 121/2
B 71/2 81/4 10 11 121/2 15
Weight 30 36 59 78 103 179
CV 110 155 278 435 625 1115
Note: All dimensions are in inches. Weights are in pounds.
*Full Face seat valves with Buna-N (-70 to 250F) body O ring seal. Contact DFT for other materials. SPLIT FACE SEAT
Valves without body O ring seals have a Split Face design.

dft@dft-valves.com
610-363-8903 15

www.dft-valves.com
PDC

Features:

Pulse damped design


Modulating air or gas applications:
- discharge of reciprocating
air/gas compressors
- self sizing - accommodates varying
BODY flows without chattering
BUSHING Mediums:
SPRING
- air
- gas
DISC ANSI B16-10 Face-to-Face dimensions
One piece body
ORIFICE Spring-assisted silent closing
PLUG 2 to 12 Line size
SEAL ANSI 150 to 1500
SPRING
RETAINER
RING WCB, 316 SS & LCC body
GUIDE 316 SS trim
RING
316 SS spring (450F max)
DISC
SPRING
GUIDE Ends:
BALL - RF Flanged
CHECK - RTJ
Center guided
Horizontal or vertical installation
Tight shut-off
Protected spring
FULL FACE SEAT
SEAT(1) O-RING (2)
Easy maintenance
(some valves) NUT (some valves) Versatile
OPTIONS:
US Patent #4,766,929 #4,693,270 - Soft seat
- Inconel X-750 Spring (500F max
due to nonmetallic components)
- Monel trim

The DFT Model PDC Silent Check Valve is specially designed for use on the discharge side of
reciprocating air or gas compressors. It includes a pulse damping chamber to maintain the disc in
the open position during the momentary reductions in flow associated with each cycle of a
reciprocating compressor and to protect against premature seat wear.
(1) Consult Page 17 for valves with Full Face Seat.
(2) Consult Page 17 for valves with Body O ring seals.
Consult page 25 for Pressure/Temperature ratings and page 26 for materials of construction.

dft@dft-valves.com
16 610-363-8903
www.dft-valves.com
PDC

Class 150 RF
2 3 4 6 8*
A 8 91/2 111/2 14 191/2
B 6 71/2 9 11 131/2
Weight 20 40 64 94 158
CV 62 148 255 660 1005

Class 300 RF
2 3 4 6 8* 10* 12
A 101/2 121/2 14 171/2 21 241/2 28
B 61/2 81/4 10 121/2 15 171/2 201/2
Weight 27 50 82 149 293 452 673
CV 62 148 255 660 1005 1580 2300

Class 600 RF
2* 3* 4* 6* 8* A
A 111/2 14 17 22 26
B 61/2 81/4 103/4 14 161/2
Weight 35 58 117 272 450
CV 62 142 255 660 1005

B
Class 900 RF
2* 3* 4* 6*
A 141/2 15 18 24
B 81/2 91/2 111/2 15
Weight 65 84 144 322
CV 55 118 224 567

Class 1500 RF
2* 3*
A 141/2 181/2
B 81/2 101/2
Weight 65 171
CV 55 118 SPLIT FACE SEAT
Note:
1. All dimensions are in inches. Weights are in pounds.
2. Maximum operating temperature is 4500F with the 316 SS spring. 5000F with the Inconel X-750 spring due
to nonmetallic components.
*Full Face seat valves with Buna-N (-70 to 250F) body O ring seal. Contact DFT for other materials.
Valves without body O ring seals have a Split Face design.

dft@dft-valves.com
610-363-8903 17

www.dft-valves.com
Basic-Check

Features:
1/4 to 2-1/2 Line size
450 to 6000 CWP
Threaded ends
Stainless Steel Construction
Spring-assisted silent closing
Horizontal or vertical installation
B Tight shut-off - lapped disc & seat
Easy Maintenance
Versatile
OPTIONS:
A - Inconel 750 Spring
The DFT Basic-Check valve is a versatile all-purpose, -Soft seat
spring-assisted, in-line check valve that provides
reliable, low maintenance service for a wide range of
liquids and gases at various pressure/temperature
combinations. The valve consists of a guard cage,
spring, valve disc, retaining ring and seat. It can be
combined with pipe fittings such as reducing couplings,
drain elbows, etc. to form a complete check valve unit
ideally suited for a broad range of pipeline
applications or incorporated into machinery for OEM
applications. The metal-to-metal sealing area of the Use with reducing coupling.
Basic-Check valves disc and seat is precision lapped,
providing very tight shut-off of both gas and liquid. If
bubble-tight shut-off is required, resilient soft seats are
available.

MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION

Retaining
Model Seat Disc Guard Spring Ring

Basic-Checks BSS 303 SS 316 SS 316 SS(1) 316 SS 316 SS


BSA 416 SS 316 SS 316 SS 316 SS 316 SS Drain elbow is another
BSE 303 SS 316 SS 17-4 SS Inconel 316 SS standard fitting with which
DFT Basic-Check Units are
High Pressure BSSH6 316 SS 316 SS 316 SS 316 SS 316 SS
used.
Basic-Checks BSSH7 316 SS 17-7 SS 316 SS 316 SS 316 SS

(1) 1/4, 3/8 and 1/2 BSS units have a 303 SS guard

dft@dft-valves.com
18 610-363-8903
www.dft-valves.com
Basic-Check

TECHNICAL INFORMATION

BASIC CHECK VALVE CRACKING


PRESSURE* Approx.
Line Size Outside Net WT.
Inlet Thread CV Friction Loss (Inches of Each
(FNPT) (MNPT) (Feet of Pipe) (PSI) Water) (In lbs.)
A B

1/4 1 5.8 7 .60 (1) 16.7 .38


3/8 1 5.8 7 .60 (1) 16.7 .38
1/2 1 5.8 7 .60 (1) 16.7 .38
3/4 1-1/2 13.2 6 .45 12.5 .88
1 2 23.1 7 .38 10.5 1.25
1-1/4 2-1/2 36 12.5 .20 5.5 2.25
1-1/2 3 57.4 11 .14 3.9 3.75
2 4 90 16 .15 4.3 7.00
2-1/2 4 90 16 .15 4.3 7.00
(1) Light spring available: Cracking Pressure = . 18 PSI (5.0 inches of water)
*Cracking pressure for vertical flow will be slightly different: upward flow, slightly higher;
downward flow, slightly less.
Not recommended for use on discharge of reciprocating compressors.

Sat. Steam Adjusted


Pressure Tempera- Rating as
COLD, NON-SHOCK PRESSURE RATING (2)
(PSIG) ture Percent of
Ref. (3) (Deg. F.) Cold Rating
1/4
Size 3/8 3/4 1 1-1/4 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 -3 200 86%
15 250 82%
1/2 52 300 78%
BSS BSA 232 400 71%
Basic-Check BSE 2500 2000 1500 850 700 450 450 407 450 69%
High-Pressure BSSH6 6000 5500 3000 1100 900 450 450 665 500 66%
1526 600 62%
Basic-Check BSSH7 6000 6000 6000 4000 2700 800 800 3075 700 60%

All stainless steel construction is suitable for cryogenic service. For pressure rating at elevated temperatures for standard metal-
seated valves, reduce above rating per chart at right.
Maximum valve temperature rating is limited by soft seal (if any) and spring materials in chart below. For ratings of soft seals
using some other elastomers, consult factory.
(2) Contingent on service ratings of matching pipe and fittings.
(3) Saturated steam pressure is given for reference only; pressure limit of valve is the adjusted rating at the given temperature.

MAXIMUM OPERATING TEMPERATURES OF MATERIALS


SEAL (4) SPRING
MATERIALS BUNA-N VITON ZELON 316 SS INCONEL
X-750

TEMP. F -70 to 250 -40 to 400 37 to 400 -460 TO 450 -460 TO 700

(4) Buna-N and Viton are not suitable for steam service.

dft@dft-valves.com
610-363-8903 19

www.dft-valves.com
Vacuum Breaker
Features:
1 to 4 size
450 to 6000 CWP
Threaded O.D. (MNPT)
Unthreaded inlet bore
Stainless Steel Construction
Spring-assisted silent closing
Horizontal or vertical installation
Tight shut-off - lapped disc & seat
Easy maintenance
Versatile
OPTIONS:
- Inconel 750 Spring
-Soft seat

DFT Vacuum Breakers provide effective protection


against collapse of pressure vessels, tanks and rolls.
They prevent condensate back-up when equipment is
shut down or inlet steam is reduced by modulating con-
trol valves. In piping systems, DFT Vacuum Breakers are
used to break siphons, prevent pipe collapse during
transient pressure drops, and to provide addition of air
on the downstream side of check valves to dampen
water hammer.
Two DFT Vacuum Breakers
used in a dry can.

MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION

Retaining
Model Seat Disc Guard Spring Ring

Vacuum BSSV 303 SS 316 SS 316 SS(1) 316 SS 316 SS


Breakers BSSV6 316 SS 316 SS 316 SS 316 SS 316 SS

(1) 1 has a 303 SS guard

dft@dft-valves.com
20 610-363-8903
www.dft-valves.com
Vacuum Breaker
TECHNICAL INFORMATION

VACUUM BREAKER VALVE CRACKING


Approx.
PRESSURE* Net WT.
Nominal Size Unthreaded Friction Loss (Inches of Each
(MNPT) Inlet Bore CV (Feet of Pipe) (PSI) Water) (In lbs.)
A B
1 9/16 5.8 7 .60 (1) 16.7 .38
1-1/2 7/8 13.2 6 .45 12.5 .88
2 1-3/32 23.1 7 .38 10.5 1.25
2-1/2 1-1/2 36 12.5 .20 5.5 2.25
3 1-23/32 57.4 11 .14 3.9 3.75
4 2-7/32 90 16 .15 4.3 7.00
(1) Light spring available: Cracking Pressure = . 18 PSI (5.0 inches of water)
*Cracking pressure for vertical flow will be slightly different: upward flow, slightly higher;
downward flow, slightly less.

COLD, NON-SHOCK PRESSURE RATING (2) Sat. Steam Adjusted


Pressure Tempera- Rating as
(PSIG) ture Percent of
Ref. (3) (Deg. F.) Cold Rating

Size 1 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3 4 -3 200 86%


15 250 82%
Vacuum BSSV 2500 2000 1500 850 700 450 52 300 78%
Breaker BSSV6 6000 5500 3000 1100 900 450 232 400 71%
407 450 69%
665 500 66%
1526 600 62%
3075 700 60%

All stainless steel construction is suitable for cryogenic service. For pressure rating at elevated temperatures for standard metal-
seated valves, reduce above rating per chart at right.
Maximum valve temperature rating is limited by soft seal (if any) and spring materials in chart below. For ratings of soft seals
using some other elastomers, consult factory.
(2) Contingent on service ratings of matching pipe and fittings.
(3) Saturated steam pressure is given for reference only; pressure limit of valve is the adjusted rating at the given temperature.

MAXIMUM OPERATING TEMPERATURES OF MATERIALS


SEAL (4) SPRING
MATERIALS BUNA-N VITON ZELON 316 SS INCONEL
X-750

TEMP. F -70 to 250 -40 to 400 37 to 400 -460 TO 450 -460 TO 700

(4) Buna-N and Viton are not suitable for steam service.

dft@dft-valves.com
610-363-8903 21

www.dft-valves.com
Restrictor Check
Features:
Higher cracking pressures
(2 to 40 psi)
1/4 to 2-1/2 Line size
450 to 2500 CWP
Threaded ends
Stainless Steel Construction
Spring-assisted silent closing
Horizontal or vertical installation
B
Tight shut-off - lapped disc & seat
Easy maintenance
Versatile
A OPTIONS:
-Soft seat

The DFT Restrictor Check Valve (RCV) is a versatile,


all-purpose, spring-assisted, in-line check valve for
applications that require higher cracking pressures to
open the check valve than those offered by other DFT
check valves. Cracking pressures are available from 2
to 40 psi. Like the Basic-Check valve, the Restrictor
Check provides reliable, low maintenance service for a
wide range of fluids and gases at various pressure/
temperature combinations. The valve consists of a
guard cage, spring, valve disc, retaining ring and seat.
It can be combined with pipe fittings such as couplings,
drain elbows, etc. (not provided by DFT) to form a com-
plete check valve unit ideally suited for a broad range
of applications. The RCV should not be considered a
substitute for a Pressure Relief Valve.
Typical Installation
MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION

Retaining
Model Seat Disc Guard Spring Ring

Restrictor Checks 303 SS 316 SS 316 SS 302 SS 316 SS

dft@dft-valves.com
22 610-363-8903
www.dft-valves.com
Restrictor Check
TECHNICAL INFORMATION

RESTRICTOR CHECK VALVE CRACKING


PRESSURE Approx.
Line Size Outside
Inlet Thread Friction Loss (PSI) Net WT.
(FNPT) (MNPT) (Feet of Pipe) ( 10%) Each
A B (In lbs.)

1/4 1 7 3.3 to 20.4 .38


3/8 1 7 3.3 to 20.4 .38
1/2 1 7 3.3 to 20.4 .38
3/4 1-1/2 6 3.4 to 15.5 .88
1 2 7 4.2 to 40.7 1.25
1-1/4 2-1/2 12.5 1.8 to 18.8 2.25
1-1/2 3 11 2.4 to 19.1 3.75
2 4 16 1.7 to 9.4 7.00
2-1/2 4 16 1.7 to 9.4 7.00
Not recommended for use on discharge of reciprocating compressors.

COLD, NON-SHOCK PRESSURE RATING (1) Sat. Steam Adjusted


Pressure Tempera- Rating as
(PSIG) ture Percent of
1/4 Ref. (2) (Deg. F.) Cold Rating
Size 3/8 3/4 1 1-1/4 1-1/2 2 2-1/2
-3 200 86%
1/2 15 250 82%
52 300 78%
Restrictor Check 2500 2000 1500 850 700 450 450 232 400 71%
407 450 69%
665 500 66%
1526 600 62%
3075 700 60%
All stainless steel construction is suitable for cryogenic service. For pressure rating at elevated temperatures for standard metal-
seated valves, reduce above rating per chart at right.
Maximum valve temperature rating is limited by soft seal (if any) and spring materials in chart below. For ratings of soft seals
using some other elastomers, consult factory.
(1) Contingent on service ratings of matching pipe and fittings.
(2) Saturated steam pressure is given for reference only; pressure limit of valve is the adjusted rating at the given temperature.

MAXIMUM OPERATING TEMPERATURES OF MATERIALS


SEAL (3) SPRING
MATERIALS BUNA-N VITON ZELON 316 SS INCONEL
X-750

TEMP. F -70 to 250 -40 to 400 37 to 400 -460 TO 450 -460 TO 700
(3) Buna-N and Viton are not suitable for steam service.

dft@dft-valves.com
610-363-8903 23

www.dft-valves.com
Codes and Standards
Basic- DLC Excalibur GLC PDC Restrictor SCV Vacuum WLC
Check Check Breaker
ANSI
B1.1 X X X
B1.20.1 X X X X
B16.5 X X X X X
B16.10 X X X
B16.20 X X X X
B16.25 X X
B16.34 X X X X X(1) X

MSS
SP-6 X X X X
SP-25 X X X X X X X X X
SP-61 X X X(2) X X X(2)
SP-125 X(7) X(7)
SP-126 X X X(6) X X X(6)
ASTM
A126CLASS B X X
A216GR WCB X X X X
A351GR CF8M X X X X X X

API
594 X(3)
FM X(4)

NACE
MR-01-75 X X(5) X(5) X(5) X X(5)

ANSI B1.1 Unified Inch Screw Threads Form #C & S


ANSI B1.20.1 Pipe Threads, General Purpose
1. Complies with B16.34 except for
ANSI 16.5 Pipe Flanges & Flanged Fittings. markings. 2 3600 CWP does not
ANSI 16.10 Face to Face & End to End Dimensions of Valves meet B16.34.
ANSI 16.20 Ring-Joint Gaskets & Grooves for Steel Pipe Flanges 2. Class 125 and 250 Cast Iron
ANSI 16.25 Buttwelding Ends valves are leak tested in
ANSI 16.34 Valves - Flanged, Threaded & Welding Ends accordance with AWWA.
3. ANSI Class 600 RF and
900/1500 RF valves meet face to
MSS SP-6 Standard finishes for contact faces of pipe flanges and
connecting end flanges of valves & fittings face dimensional only.
4. WLC with Cast Iron body (A126
MSS SP-25 Standard marking system for valves, fittings, flanges and unions CLASS B), and Bronze Trim in
MSS SP-61 Pressure testing of steel valves ANSI Class 125 only.
MSS SP-125 Grey Iron & Ductile Iron In-Line Check Valves 5. Meets this requirement when
MSS SP-126 Steel In-Line Spring-Assisted Center Guided Check Valves furnished with an Inconel X-750
spring.
ASTM A126 CLASS B Grey Iron Castings 6. Except Cast Iron Valves
ASTM A216 GR WCB Carbon Steel Castings 7. Cast Iron Valves only.
ASTM A315 GR CF8M Austenitic Steel Castings Victaulic is a registered trademark of Victaulic Company
of America
Teflon and Viton are registered trademarks of E.I. Dupont
API 594 Wafer & Wafer-Lug Check Valves Company
Inconel and Monel are registered trademarks of
International Nickle Co., Inc.
FM Factory Mutual System Hastelloy is a registered trademark of Haynes
International Inc.
Rulon is a registered trademark of Dixon Industries
NACE MR-01-75 Sulfide stress cracking resistant metallic materials for oilfield Corporation
equipment

dft@dft-valves.com
24 610-363-8903
www.dft-valves.com
Pressure/Temperature
PRESSURE-TEMPERATURE RATINGS FOR WCB1 (PSIG)
TEMP. (deg. F) CLASS
150 300 600 900 1500 2500
20 285 740 1480 2220 3705 6170
100 285 740 1480 2220 3705 6170
200 260 675 1350 2025 3375 5625
250(2) 245 665 1330 1995 3325 5545
300 230 655 1315 1970 3280 5470
400(3) 200 635 1270 1900 3170 5280
450(4) 185 615 1235 1845 3080 5135
470(5) 175 610 1220 1825 3045 5075
500 170 600 1200 1795 2995 4990
600 140 550 1095 1640 2735 4560
650 125 535 1075 1610 2685 4475
700(6) 110 535 1065 1600 2665 4440
750 95 505 1010 1510 2520 4200
800 80 410 825 1235 2060 3430

PRESSURE-TEMPERATURE RATINGS FOR CF8M1 (PSIG)


TEMP. (deg. F) CLASS
150 300 600 900 1500 2500
462 275 720 1440 2160 3600 6000
100 275 720 1440 2160 3600 6000
200 235 620 1240 1860 3095 5160
250(2) 225 590 1180 1770 2945 4910
300 215 560 1120 1680 2795 4660
400(3) 195 515 1025 1540 2570 4280
450(4) 180 495 990 1485 2480 4130
470(5) 175 490 975 1465 2440 4070
500 170 480 955 1435 2390 3980
600 140 450 900 1355 2255 3760
650 125 445 890 1330 2220 3700
700(6) 110 430 870 1305 2170 3620
750 95 425 855 1280 2135 3560
800 80 420 845 1265 2110 3520
850 65 420 835 1255 2090 3480
900 50 415 830 1245 2075 3460
950 35 385 775 1160 1930 3220
1000 20 350 700 1050 1750 2915
1050(7) 20 345 685 1030 1720 2865
1100(7) 20 305 610 915 1525 2545

Notes:
1. Pressure/temperature ratings in accordance with ASME/ANSI B16.34-1996. 5. Maximum temperature for Zelon with 750CWP SCV.
2. Maximum temperature for Buna-N. 6. Maximum temperature for Inconel X-750 spring.
3. Maximum temperature for Viton & Zelon w/3600CWP SCV. 7. Butt weld end valves only. Flanged ratings terminate
4. Maximum temperature for 316 SS spring. at 1000o F.

PRESSURE TEMPERATURE RATING FOR CAST IRON (PSIG)


Class 125 Class 250
Temp. (deg. F) 2 to 12 14 + 2 to 12 14 +
0 to 150o 200 psig 150 psig 400 psig 300 psig
200o (MAX.) 190 psig 135 psig 370 psig 280 psig
Notes: Buna-N soft seat available for bubble tight shutoff. 316 stainless steel trim recommended for temperatures from 180o F to 200o F.

MAXIMUM OPERATING TEMPERATURES OF MATERIALS (8)


SEAL (9) SPRING
MATERIALS BUNA-N VITON ZELON 316 SS INCONEL HASTELLOYC
X-750
TEMP. F -70 to 250 F -40 to 400 F 37 to 400 F -460 to 450 F -460 to 700 F -460 to 1000 F
Note: 8. Maximum valve temperature rating is limited by seal and spring materials shown above.
9. Buna-N and Viton are not suitable for steam service.

dft@dft-valves.com
610-363-8903 25

www.dft-valves.com
Standard Materials
EXCALIBUR, GLC AND WLC*
COMPONENT CARBON STEEL BODY STAINLESS STEEL BODY
Body A216 Grade WCB A351 CF8M
Disc/stem assy A351 CF8M/A479 316 A351 CF8M/A479 316
Seat (1) A351 CF8M A351 CF8M
Spring (2) A313 316 A313 316
Bushing A 479 316 A479 316
Bolting (3) A193-B7 (Stud) & A194-2H (Nut)
Cl.150 & 300 Durlon8500 Flexible Graphite
Gasketing (3)
Cl.600+ 316 Spiral wound with Flexible Graphite Filler
*1 & 1-1/2 WLC; Cl 150 to 1500 - 316 SS trim except 17-7 disk in Cl 900+.
Some valves contain body seals (O ring or gasket). Consult DFT for material selection.
Notes: 1. Soft seats are available for bubble-tight shutoff. See page 25.
2. Inconel X-750 spring is available.
3. Excalibur only. Contact DFT for stainless steel or other bolting materials.
PDC
COMPONENT CARBON STEEL BODY STAINLESS STEEL BODY
Body A216 Grade WCB A351 CF8M
Disc A351 CF8M A351 CF8M
Seat (4) A351 CF8M A351 CF8M
Spring (5) A313 316 (450 F max.) A313 316 (450 F max.)
Spring for ball check Inconel X-750 Inconel X-750
Disc guide A479 316 A479 316
Bushing Rulon (6) Rulon (6)
Seal ring Teflon/Hastelloy C276(6) Teflon/Hastelloy C276(6)
Spring retainer - ball check A479 316 A479 316
Guide ring Teflon (6) Teflon (6)
Ball check Teflon (6) Teflon (6)
Orifice Plug A479 316 A479 316

PDC temperature rating is limited by the body seal material (pg. 17), spring material and nonmetallic components.
Notes: 4. Soft seats are available for bubble-tight shutoff. See page 25.
5. Inconel X-750 spring is available.
6. 500 F maximum.

CAST IRON GLC AND WLC


COMPONENT CAST IRON BODY/BRONZE TRIM CAST IRON BODY/316 TRIM (7)

Body A126 Class B Cast Iron A126 Class B Cast Iron


Disc/stem assy B584 836 - Bronze A351 CF8M
Seat (8) B584 836 - Bronze A351 CF8M
Spring A313 T302 A351 CF8M
Bushing B584 836 - Bronze A351 CF8M
Notes: 7. 316 stainless steel trim recommended for temperatures from 180 F to 200 F.
8. Buna-N soft seat available for bubble-tight shutoff.

dft@dft-valves.com
26 610-363-8903
www.dft-valves.com
Applications
Chemical Processing Power Generation
Process Lines Steam Lines
Boiler Feed & Discharge Water Lines
Steam Lines Cooling Towers
Condensate Lines Evaporators
Water Treatment Vacuum System
Nitrogen Purge (Fly Ash System)
Pump Discharge Boiler Feed & Discharge
Cooling Towers Pump Discharge
Compressor Discharge Compressor Discharge
Evaporators
Mineral Dewatering Food, Beverage & Drug
Cryogenics Boiler Feed & Discharge
Vacuum Lines & Breakers Cookers
Metering Pumps Evaporators
Refrigeration (Hot Gas Defrost)
Petroleum Production & Refining Metering Pumps
Crude & Refined Product Lines Chemical Lines
Boiler Feed & Discharge Steam Lines
Steam Lines Condensate Lines
Condensate Lines Vacuum Lines & Breakers
Water Treatment Pump Discharge
Pump Discharge Compressor Discharge
Cooling Towers Autoclaves
Compressor Discharge
Evaporators Mining
Generator Inlet & Discharge Mine Dewatering
Vacuum Lines & Breakers Boiler Feed & Discharge

Pulp & Paper Primary Metals


Steam Lines Hydraulic Lines
(Digester & Paper Machines) Steam Lines
Chemical Lines Condensate Lines
Boiler Feed & Discharge Pump Discharge
Condensate Lines Compressor Discharge
Water Treatment Water Lines
Pump Discharge Water Treatment
Metering Pumps Evaporators
Generator Inlet & Discharge Extrusion Equipment
Chemical Lines
Textiles Presses - Water Inlet & Outlet
Chemical Dye Lines
Boiler Feed & Discharge Building Maintenance
Pump Discharge Steam Lines
Compressor Discharge Condensate Lines
Metering Pumps Pump Discharge
Steam Lines Compressor Discharge
Condensate Lines Water Lines

dft@dft-valves.com
610-363-8903 27

www.dft-valves.com
Flange Dimensions
ANSI Nominal Outside Outside Minimum Diameter Diameter Number Diameter
Class Pipe Diameter Diameter Thickness of Bolt of Bolt